KIP 9000 Service Manual Ver A - 0

High Volume
Network Printer
Service Manual
Version A.0
Chapter 1
Introduction
Page
1. 1 Features 1- 1
1. 2 Specifications 1- 2
1. 3 Appearance 1- 4
1. 3. 1 Front view 1- 4
1. 3. 2 Right side view 1- 5
1. 3. 3 Rear view 1- 6
1. 3. 4 Operation Panel 1- 8
1. 3. 5 Media Indicators 1-10
1. 3. 6 “in use” Indicators 1-11
1-1 K115sm1e1.doc
1. 1 Features
(1) New Contact Development Technology with non-magnetic mono-component toner
Superior image quality High definition line, distinctive greyscale and consistent solid
black can be produced.
100% toner efficiency No waste toner is generated. Neither cleaning mechanism nor
waste toner receptacle is needed. It is environmentally
friendly and can reduce the running cost.
(2) Superior printing productivity

KIP9000’s fast print speed (240mm/sec) enables to process large volume of prints/copies
(11 A0 or E minute).
(3) Long parts life and low frequency of service maintenance

Service parts are durable for very long use and self-cleaning functions of KIP9000
enables the operator to enjoy quality images for a long term without maintenance.
(4) Pre-calibrated LED Head

All LED pixels are individually calibrated for the best image quality.
(5) Image Enhancement Technology

Dependent on the image, the best level of Image Enhancement is
automatically calculated.
(6) Installation of roll media and Toner Cartridge while printing

It is possible to install new roll media or add more toner without interrupting printing
operation.
(7) Long print

The maximum print length guaranteed is 6 meters (19.7 ft)(with plain paper).
The maximum possible length is 24 meters. (75ft) (Quality of print is not guaranteed.)
1-2 K115sm1e1.doc
1. 2 Specifications
Subject Specification
Model KIP 9000
Type Console
Printing method LED Array Electro Photography
Photoconductor Organic Photoconductive Drum
Print speed 240mm / second (11 A0 or E /minute - 22D/minute)
Exposure method LED Print Head
Resolution 600dpi x 600dpi
Print width Max : 914mm (36 inches)
Min : 297mm (11 inches)
Print length Max : Plain paper 6m (19.7’) with A0 or 36” wide
Tracing paper A0 / 48 inch
Film A0 / 48 inch
NOTE : Longer print than the above specified maximum lengths
is available. However, KIP does not guarantee any result
including image quality and media feeding if the print is
longer than the above specified lengths.
Min 210mm (8.5”)
Warm up time Shorter than 6 minutes
(At 23 degrees centigrade, 60% RH and 230V)
First print time Shorter than 12 seconds (A0 / E)
Fusing method Heat roller fusing
Development Contact type mono component non-magnetic development system
(One toner cartridge contains 500g.)
Charging method Corona
Media feeding method Automatic roll feeding (4 Roll Decks)
Manual bypass feeding
NOTE : Multiple cut sheet feeding (50 sheets max) is available
when the size is narrower than A2 (594mm) or 24”.
Transfer method Corona
Separation method Corona and LED
Input power 220 - 240V (+6% / -10%), 16A and 50/60Hz in U.S.A. and Europe
Interface KIP Interface 8 (LVDS)
USB2.0 (5VDC max)
RS-232C (12VDC max)
Maximum power When 230V, 50/60Hz and Dehumidify Heater is ON
consumption Stand by 0.9 Kwh
Printing 3.0 Kwh
Warm up 3.5 Kwh
Acoustic noise Less than 70db (Printing) NOTE : Impact noise is excluded.
Less than 55db (Stand by)
Ozone Less than 0.05ppm (Average of 8 hours)
Dimensions 1360mm (Width) x 980mm (Depth) x 1265mm (Height) (54x39x50)
Weight About 400kg (880lbs)
Media Specified media
Plain paper 18 - 24# 70 - 90g/m2
Tracing paper 18 - 24# 70 - 90g/m2
Film 100 micrometer (4mil) or thinner..
1-3 K115sm1e1.doc
Subject Specification
Environmental Temperature 10 - 32C (50 - 89F)
condition Humidity 20 - 80% RH
Storage condition of Print media Keep the media surely in a plastic bag and close to
consumables shut out the humidity.
Toner Keep the toner cartridge away from the direct
sunlight, and store it in the condition of 0 - 35 oC
and 10 - 85% RH.
NOTE
These specifications may be changed without notice.
1-4 K115sm1e1.doc
1. 3 Appearance
1. 3. 1 Front view
Power Switch Operation Panel User Interface
Bypass Feeder
Right Side Door
Roll Decks
Toner Cover
Media Indicator “in use” Indicators
Name of part Function

Power Switch Turns on/off the KIP9000.
Bypass Feeder Cut sheet media can be set here and fed into.
Multiple cut sheet feeding (50 sheets max) is available when the
size is narrower than A2 (594mm) or 24”.
Operation Panel Indicates the status of KIP 9000, error, mis-feed location and so
on.
Roll Decks There are 4 Roll Decks (Drawers are 3 but Roll Spools are 4.).
Each Roll Deck holds one roll of media.
Roll Deck 1 : (Top drawer)
Roll Deck 2 : (Middle drawer)
Roll Deck 3 : (Front side of bottom drawer)
Roll Deck 4 : (Rear side of bottom drawer)
Media Indicator Informs the size and the type of roll media loaded on each Roll
Deck.
Toner Cover Can access to the Toner Supplying Mechanism and replace the
Toner Cartridge.
Right Side Door Can access the internal of KIP9000 for removing the mis-fed
media.
Use Interface Touch Screen offers many kinds of user operation.
“in use” Indicators Shoes the Roll Deck that must not be opened.
1-5 K115sm1e1.doc
1. 3. 2 Right side view
Toner Cartridge Fuser Handle
Cutter Handle
Counter A
Counter B
Internal Transportation Unit Lever

Cutter Handle Can cut the roll media manually if it has not been cut yet after it
was mis-fed.
Counter A Counts the linear feet of total prints.
Counter B Counts the square feet of total prints.
Internal Transportation Can unlock and open the Internal Transportation Unit for removing
Unit Lever the mis-fed media.
Fuser Handle Can eject the mis-fed media manually from the Fuser Unit.
Toner Cartridge Includes 500 grams of toner.
1-6 K115sm1e1.doc
1. 3. 3 Rear view
Dehumidify Heater Switch
Interface Connector for scanner Top Rear Cover
Exit Cover
Power Cord
Folder Port VGA Port Interface Connector

for IPS
USB Port
Power Outlet
Shut Down Diag Port for controller
it
1-7 K115sm1e1.doc
Exit Cover Can remove the mis-fed media around Fuser section.
Interface Connector for Connects the cable from the controller unit.
Controller Unit D-Sub Connector 36 pins, 3.3Vdc maximum (large)
Interface Connector for Connects the cable from the image scanner.
Scanner D-Sub Connector 36 pins, 3.3Vdc maximum (large)
Folder Port Not used in North America
SHUT DOWN Port Connects the Shutdown Signal Cable.
KIP 9000 will send a shutdown signal to the controller through this
cable. 12Vdc maximum
Diag Port Not used usually. (Service personnel may use to make field
service.)
VGA Port Connect the cable here, which comes from the controller VGA port
by UL-Listed cable for Touch screen LCD. 5Vdc maximum
USB Port Connect the cable here, which comes from the controller USB Key
Connector Type B for Touch screen LCD. 5Vdc maximum
Top Rear Cover Can access the Dehumidify Heater Switch.
Outlet for Controller Unit In case you place a controller unit outside of the KIP 9000, it is
possible to supply AC power from the KIP 9000 to the controller
unit if you connect the power cord to this outlet. (220 - 240V, 3A
maximum)
Connected controller unit must meet UL Standard 60950-1 (UL-

Listed)
NOTE: Specification for Power Cord used in North America

Use the following type of Power Cord for a controller unit.
(1) Rating minimum 250VAC 7A
(2) Plug Type IEC60320: C13
(3) Socket Type IEC60320: C14
(4) Cord H05VV-F 3G-0.75mm
SVT3x18AWG
(5) UL-Listed
Power Cord Connect to the wall outlet alone.
Dehumidify Heater Turns on/off the Dehumidify Heater.
Switch
1-8 K115sm1e1.doc
1. 3. 4 Operation Panel
Operation Panel on offers several user operations.
Names and functions of key and indication LED are as follows.
1 2 3 4 5 8 12 15
PAPER DECK MF EXIT
1 2 3 4 D1
D2 PF
WIRE CLEAN EXP- CLEAN SELECT CUT COPY DENSITY MENU ENTER ONLINE
D3 D4
6 7 9 10 11 13 14 16
No. Name of part Function

1 Ready Indicator Flashes green when KIP 9000 is warming up, and lights green
when it is ready.
2 Open Indicator Lights orange when any door or unit is open or unlocked.
3 Toner Empty Flashes red when the toner is near empty. (Toner Cartridge has
Indicator no Toner).
Lights red when the toner is completely empty. (Developer Unit
has no toner. No more print is available.)
4 Roll Empty Indicator Lights red if the roll media in use is empty.
5 Mis-feed Indicator Lights red when the print media is mis-fed.
6 WIRE-CLEAN Key Starts cleaning for the Image Corona Wire.
7 EXP-CLEAN Key Starts cleaning for the LED Head.
8 Roll Deck Indicator Shows the present selection of roll to perform initial cut.
9 SELECT Key Selects a roll to perform initial cut.
10 CUT Key Performs initial cut for the selected roll.
11 Mis-feed Location Shows the location of mis-fed media by lighting the concerning
Indicator LED.
12 Density Indicator Shows the present selection of density level.
13 COPY DENSITY Changes the density level for making the print density darker or
Key lighter.
14 MENU Key [MENU], [ ], [ ] and [ENTER] Keys are used in User
Key Modes.
Key (The service personnel may use them also in the field service.)
* Key [ * ] Key is used to stop the alarm sound.
ENTER Key
15 Status Display Indicates kinds of information such as error codes, mis-feed
codes, and etc.
16 ONLINE Key & The ONLINE Indicator lights green when KIP9000 is online, and
Indicator it is put out when offline.
ONLINE Key switches between online and offline, and also
cancels the User Mode.
1-9 K115sm1e1.doc
1. 3. 5 Media Indicators
The Media Indicator on the right front of KIP9000 informs the size (width) and the type of roll media
installed in each Roll Deck.
plain paper
1 vellum / tracing
film
plain paper
2 vellum / tracing
film
plain paper
3 vellum / tracing
film
plain paper
4 vellum / tracing
film
Example 1 : Metric mode Example 2 : Inch mode

Roll Deck 1 : A0 plain paper Roll Deck 1 : 36” vellum
Roll Deck 2 : A1 tracing paper Roll Deck 2 : 30” plain paper
Roll Deck 3 : A3 film Roll Deck 3 : 24” film
Roll Deck 4 : A4 plain paper Roll Deck 4 : 12” plain paper
plain paper plain paper

1 vellum / tracing
1 vellum / tracing
film film

2 vellum / tracing
2 vellum / tracing
film film

3 vellum / tracing
3 vellum / tracing
film film

4 vellum / tracing
4 vellum / tracing
film film
1-10 K115sm1e1.doc
1. 3. 6 “in use” Indicators
3 “in use” Indicators on the right front of KIP9000 are related with 3 drawers respectively, and
inform the operator which drawer must not be opened during printing.
in use
4
3
One or two “in use” Indicator light orange when the KIP 9000 is on printing.
Do not open the drawer if the concerning “in use” Indicator is lighting orange.
The drawer can be opened even if the KIP9000 is on printing if the concerning “in use” Indicator is
not lighting.
Example : Top and middle drawer can not be opened as the “in use” Indicators for them are
lighting orange.
Only the bottom drawer can be opened as its “in use” Indicator is not lighting.
1
in use
2
in use
4
3
in use
1-11 K115sm1e1.doc
Reference
Even if the KIP9000 is printing, it is possible to open the drawer and replace/install the roll
media without interrupting the print operation. However, it is not necessarily allowed to open
any drawer at any time. A certain drawer can not be opened in the following situations.
1. When the roll media is fed from a certain drawer, this drawer can not be opened.
2. When the media (including cut sheet media) fed from other drawer is passing through the
media path in a certain drawer, this drawer can not be opened.
See the following section diagram. Media feeding paths from each Roll Deck is integrated into
one path in the middle drawer. When the KIP 9000 is printing with the roll media fed from the
Roll Deck 1 for example, only the bottom drawer can be opened. (“in use” Indicators for top
and middle drawers will light orange in this case.)
Top Drawer is not

allowed to open. in use
Roll Deck 1
Middle Drawer is not

allowed to open. in use
Roll Deck 2
Roll Deck 4
Bottom Drawer is
in use
allowed to open.
Roll Deck 3 D4
1-12 K115sm1e1.doc
Chapter 2
Installation
KIP9000 had passed the strict inspection after careful adjustment in the factory, and then it
was packaged and shipped. Installation is an important work to reproduce the same machine
performance at customer site. Service personnel have to understand all the detail about
KIP9000 before installation. Install the machine in a good environmental place in a correct
way, and confirm that it operates correctly.
Page
2.1 Installation Requirements 2-2
2.2 Unpacking 2-3

2. 2. 1 Unpacking 2-3
2. 2. 2 Confirm accessories 2-4
2.3 Level the KIP9000 2-11
2.4 Removal of Tape, Screws and Shock Absorbers 2-12
2.5 Setting up the Process Unit (LED Head, Developer & Drum) 2-14
2.6 Installing the Monitor 2-31
2.7 Installing the Controller 2-50
2.8 Installing the Toner Cartridge 2-48
2.9 Loading Media into the Roll Decks 2-50

2. 9. 1 Roll 1, 2 and 3 2-50
2. 9. 2 Roll 4 2-55
2.10 Installing the Cut Sheet Tray 2-57
2.11 Turning on the KIP9000 2-58
2.12 Supplying Toner into Developer Unit 2-59
2-1
2.1 Installation Requirements
The following conditions are required for installation of the equipment.
(1) Power source should be as follows (according to your region).

U.S.A. / Europe 220 - 240V (+6% / -10%), 16A, 50/60Hz
(2) The equipment must be on a dedicated circuit.

The outlet must be near the equipment and easily accessible.
(3) Connect this equipment to a properly grounded outlet.
(4) The site temperature range 10 - 32C (or 50 - 89 F) with the humidity between
20% - 80% (NON CONDENSING).
Keep the equipment away from water sources, boilers, humidifiers or refrigerators.
(5) The installation site must not have open flames, dust or ammonia gases.
(6) The equipment should not be exposed to the direct sunlight.

Please draw curtains to block any sunlight.
(7) Ozone will be generated while this equipment is in use, although the quantity generated is
within safe levels. (see certifications) Ventilate the room, if required.
(8) Levelling Bolts on the bottom of the KIP 9000 should touch the floor securely.
And the equipment must be levelled. Floor strength must be ample to sustain the weight of the
system.
(9) Keep ample room around the equipment to ensure comfortable operation.
Required space is noted.
195cm (77 inch) or wider
Rear
50cm
(20 inch)
or wider
Front
2-2
2.2 Unpacking
2. 2. 1 Unpacking
CAUTION
When the printer is to be installed in winter condensation may occur! The printer will be very
cold if it has been kept in a warehouse or delivered by truck. If a cold machine is unpacked on
the customer site right after it’s delivery, condensation will occur and cause issues. In such
cases, leave the KIP9000 at the installation site for at least 6 hours without removing its
package. Only if the printer is warmed to room temperature, then start the installation.
Be careful not to be harmed during installation as it is heavier than 400Kg. (880 lbs)
NOTE
Toner and media are not included in the package. Please purchase them separately.
A
B C
H
D
E
G F
1. Remove the top crate and 4 side crates.
2. Remove the wrapping film and the protection paper from KIP9000.
Confirm that the product includes the following items.
A : Drum Package E : Setup Procedure and User’s Manual

B : LED Head Package F : Setup Toner Bottle (Inside of the Right Side Door)
C : Manual Tray G : Monitor parts (inside lower deck)
D : Drum Stand and 36”x5” paper H : Controller case (packed on back)
3. Lift up the KIP9000 using a folk lift, with the forks set to the widest possible position to fit into
the inner skid, and place the KIP9000 directly onto the floor.
4. Remove the plastic.
5. Remove the wrapping film.
2-3
2. 2. 2 Confirm accessories
Confirm the system includes the following items.
Description Picture / Notes Quantity

Drum 1
(Inside of the black box)
LED Head 1
LED Cleaning Pad 1
Monitor 1
2-4
Item name Picture Number
of article
Monitor Arm 1
M4x10 Flush Head Screw 3
Monitor Panel BKT 1
M4x6 Tooth Washer Screw 3
• 1 for securing the

ground strap of
Panel BKT
• 2 for securing the

Cover 3
2-5
of article
M4x8 Tooth Washer Screw 4
Monitor Cover 2 1
Monitor Cover 3 1
M4x10 Tooth Washer 4

Screw
2-6
of article
PC Bracket 1
Cover 21 1
Cut Sheet Feeder Tray 1
36”x5” paper 1
2-7
of article
Drum Stand 1
Setup Toner Bottle (200g) 1
Drum Cleaning Blade 1
Drum Shading Sheet 1
2-8
of article
Service Label 1
IPS (PC) 1
KIP IPS Computer

in a separate box
with VGA cable and Power cable
Serial Cable 1
IF Cable 1
2-9
of article
USB Cable 1
VGA Cable 1
With IPS
Power Supply Lead 1

With IPS
2-10
2.3 Level the KIP9000
KIP9000 needs to be levelled with a water level. If it is not levelled, it may cause creasing or a poor
image.
Put the water level on the following 3 locations on the KIP9000 to level the printer.
Turn the 4 Height Adjusters (1) on the bottom.
1 1 Height Adjuster
2-11
2.4 Removal of Tape, Screws and Shock
Absorbers
Remove the tape, screws and shock absorbers which secure some movable items. They prevent parts
from being damaged during transportation.
1. Remove 2 screws with the tag (1) on the bottom of the Fuser. These screws are no longer used.
NOTE
The above 2 screws removes pressure during delivery to avoid damage.
As the Pressure Roller needs to give proper tension to the Fuser Roller during normal
operation, do not forget to remove these screws at installation. If not removed, the toner will
not be fused.
2. Open each Roll Deck (2) and remove the tape (3) and the shock absorber (4).
4
3
2-12
3. Open the Toner Cover (5) and remove the tape (6) securing the Toner Cartridge Cover.
5 6
4. Open the Right Side Door (7), and remove the tapes (8) and the shock absorber with tag (9).
8 9
5. Open the Top Rear Cover (10) and remove the

10 11
shock absorber with tag (11) on the right.
6. Remove the shock absorber (12) protecting the

monitor cables. 12
2-13
2.5 Setting up the Process Unit
(LED Head, Developer & Drum)
1. Open the Right Side Door (1).
2. Twist the Lock Lever (2) counter-clockwise to unlock the Internal Transportation Unit, bring
down the Internal Transportation Unit (3), and hold its shaft with the Hook (4).
2 3
2.a Unplug the connector on the side of process frame
2-14
3. Remove 2 M4x10 screws (5). Also remove 4 M4x14 screws (6) in gray sponges.
NOTE
Gray sponges hold the M4x14 screws (6) and
prevent them from dropping out.
Sponge
Machine
side M4x14
4. Hold the Handles (7) firmly and draw out the Process Unit (8).
7
8
2-15
5. Open the Top Rear Cover (9), disconnect the connector (10) on the left, remove 4 tooth
washer screws (11), and remove the Top Center Cover (12).
12
11 11
9 10
6. Open the packaging box of LED Head, and carefully remove the wrapped LED Head (13) and
small box (14). Remove the wrapping from the LED Head, and remove the Cleaning Pad from the
small box.
13 14
7. Loosen the screw (15) on the LED Head Unit, and install the Cleaning Pad (16) with this screw.
16
16
15
2-16
8. Remove the protection box (17) on one side of the LED Head Unit, which is protecting the Wire
Cleaning Motor.
17
9. Insert 2 positioning bars (18) on motor side of LED Head Unit into the positioning slits (19)
on the left side of the KIP9000.
18
19
20
NOTE
Be careful not to bend or break 3 pieces of Ground Plates (20). They must be simply placed
on the upper face of LED Head Unit.
2-17
10. Fit the positioning pin (21) on another side of LED Head to the notch (22) on the right of KIP9000.
21
22
Install the 2 M4x10 screws (5) removed at the former procedure 3

BUT DO NOT TIGHTEN AT THIS TIME.
5
CAUTION
It is necessary to have a correct gap (focus distance) between LED Head and Drum by a later
procedure, and the LED Head Unit must be easily moved up and down at that time. Therefore
do not tighten the M4x10 screws (5) at this time. (If tightened, the positioning bars of LED
Head Unit will be bent.)
2-18
11. Connect 3 connectors (23) to LED Head and 1 connector (24) of Cleaning Motor.
23 24
12. Confirm that the right side of LED Head can be easily moved up and down by hand, then push
the Process Unit (8) into the machine fully. (See NOTE on the next page before closing
the Process Unit.)
The positioning bars (25) on the right of LED Head Unit will fit into the positioning slits (26)
when Process Unit is closed, and a proper gap (focus distance) can be kept between LED
Head and Drum this time.
26
25
2-19
NOTE
Make sure to close the Process Unit with the M4x10 screws loosed!
The positioning bars (25) of the LED Head will fit into the positioning slits (26) when the
Process Unit is closed. The positioning bars (25) are curved up so that they can fit into the
positioning slits (26) vary smoothly. When the bars fit into the slits, the whole LED Head Unit is
moved up and a correct gap (focus distance) can be kept between LED Head and Drum.
Slit
LED Head
Proper gap
Drum
Bar
If the Process Unit is closed when M4x10 screws are tightened, the LED Head can not move
up. This state can not have a proper gap (focus distance) between LED Head and Drum, and
will bend the positioning bars (25) .
LED Head can

not move
Gap is not
proper
Bar is bent.
Tightened
2-20
13. Secure the Process Unit tightening 4 M4x14 screws (6). After that, tighten 2 M4x10 screws (5) to
secure the LED Head Unit with keeping a proper focus distance.
NOTE
Process Unit needs to be fixed before LED Head Unit to have correct focus distance. Do not
change the order.
14. Return the Top Center Cover (12), and close the Top Rear Cover (9).
12
15. Remove 4 M4x10 screws (6), and draw out the Process Unit (8) again.
2-21
16. Disconnect the connector (27) of the Wire Cleaning Motor, remove 2 screws (28) at both sides,
and remove the Image Corona (29).
29
27
28
17. Remove the tapes (30) and protection paper (31) on the Developer Unit.
30
31
NOTE
The Developer Roller is purposely covered with the toner for smooth rotation. Do not remove it
when removing the protection paper.
2-22
18. Remove the screw with tag (32) on the right of Developer Unit. Also remove the screw with
tag (33) on the left. (These screws are no longer used.)
33
32
NOTE
The screw (32) is not reused. ( this differs from the KIP 8000 )
19. Remove 3 screws (34), and remove the Toner Hopper Cover (35).
34 35
Hopper
35
(Section drawing of Developer & Toner Hopper)
2-23
20. Put the 36”x5” paper (36) under the Sender Screw of Toner Hopper to close the toner
supplying holes on the bottom of Toner Hopper. (Shift the 36”x5” paper (36) to the left side as
far as possible.)
36
36
This is an accessory of KIP9000.
36 36
Sender Screw
21. Shake the Setup Toner Bottle (37) to

loosen the toner.
(Setup Toner Bottle includes 200g of toner.)
37
22. Supply the Setup Toner into the Toner Hopper so that an even level of toner can be kept
across the hopper. (The Sender Screw should be covered evenly)
Toner Sender Screw
2-24
23. Carefully remove the 36”x5” paper (36).
36
24. Return the Toner Hopper Cover (35) and secure it

with 3 screws (34).
34
35
25. Remove the tapes on both sides of Cleaning Roller (38).

Loosen the tooth washer screw (39) and hexagon head screw (40), and remove the
Bracket (41) on the right.
41
39
38
40
2-25
26. Remove the Cleaning Roller (38) from its operating position, and put it on its “temporary position”
by fitting both bearings to the notches (42) on both sides as shown in below.
(Left side)
42
38
(Right side)
42
38
NOTE
Do not close the Process Unit with the Cleaning Roller placed on the “temporary position”. The
surface of Cleaning Roller will be damaged.
Confirm the Cleaning Roller is returned to its operating position, then close the Process Unit.
2-26
27. Remove the Drum (43) from the box, fit both Drum Bearings (44) into the Drum Guides (45) on
both sides of Process Unit with placing the Drum Gear (46) on the left, and carefully bring
down the Drum along with the Drum Guides.
46
44
45 43
NOTE
The Drum Shaft inside of KIP9000 has 2 Driving Pins (47), and the Drum Bearing on Drum
Gear side has 2 Projections (48). Driving Pins (47) hold the Projections (48) when the Drum
Shaft rotates, so the Drum is rotated.
47 48
49
47
50
If the Process Unit is closed when both Driving Pins (47) and Projections (48) are at the same
position, the Driving Pins (47) will be bent or broken as the projections (48) will hit them.
The Dents (49) on the Drum Shaft show the position of Driving Pins (47) on another side, and
the Marking Lines (50) on outside of Drum Bearing show the position of internal Projections
(48). Rotate the Drum by hand so that the Dents (49) and Marking Lines (50) do not overlap
with each other (cross position), then close the Process Unit. This will prevent the Driving
Gears (47) from being bent.
2-27
28. Return the Cleaning Roller (38) to its correct position, and secure it with Bracket (41), tooth washer
screw (39) and hexagon head screw (40).
41
39
38
40
NOTE
(1) Tighten the tooth washer screw (39) and hexagon head screw (40) when pressing
down the Bracket (41).
(2) Tighten the hexagon head screw (40) with a wrench. Do not use a screwdriver as the Drum
may be scratched.
(3) Confirm that the Electrode Plate (51) inside of Bracket (41) is surely contacted to the
Cleaning Roller shaft.
41 51
51
Cleaning Roller shaft
2-28
29. Return the Image Corona (29) to the Process Unit and secure it with 2 screws (28).
Connect the connector (27) of the Wire Cleaning Motor.
27 29
28
28
30. Close the Process Unit (8), and secure it with 4 M4x14 screws (6).
31. Release the shaft of Lock Lever from the Hook (4), bring up the Inner Transportation Unit (3)
gently, and lock it firmly with the Lock Lever (2).
3 2
2-29
32 Plug in the connector on the side of process frame
33. Close the Right Side Door (1).
2-30
2.6 Installing the Monitor
1. Open the Top Rear Cover (1).
1
2. Disconnect the connector (2) on the left, and remove 4 screws (3).
3 3
3. Remove the Top Center Cover (4).

4
4. Remove 6 screws (5), and remove the Top Front Cover (6).
2-31
5. Open the Toner Cover (7) and the Toner Cartridge Cover (8).
7 8
6. Remove 2 screws (9), and loosen 1 screw (10).
10
NOTE
The screw (10) needs to be loosened as it will interfere with Cover in the next step.
7. Remove the Cover (11) on the right.
11
2-32
8. Remove the Top Right Cover (12).
12
9. Insert the 3 monitor cables (13) into the Arm (14).

14
NOTE
3 monitor cables (13) are as follows.
• VGA Cable
• USB Cable
• Power Cable
14
13
2-33
10. Install the Arm (14) to machine frame with 3 M4x10 flash head screws (15).
14
15
15
15
NOTE
Place 2 cut-edges (16) on the front.
16
16
11. Return the Top Right Cover (12).

12
2-34
12. Secure the ground strap (17) of Panel BKT Assy to the screw hole (18) on the Arm with 1 piece of
M4x6 Tooth Washer Screw (19).
17
19
18
17
2-35
13. Secure the Panel BKT Assy (20) to the Arm (14)
with 4 M4x8 Tooth Washer Screws (21).
21
20
14
20
21
2-36
14. Put 3 monitor cables (13) inside of Cover 3
Assy (22).
22
22
13
2-37
15. Insert the monitor cables into the square hole (23) of Cover 2 Assy (24) as the arrow
shows, and secure the Cover 3 Assy (22) onto Cover 2 Assy (24) with 2 pieces of M4x6 Tooth
Washer Screw (19).
23
24
19
24
19 22
2-38
16. Connect each VGA Cable (25), Power Cable (26) and USB Cable to its own terminal on the
Monitor Assy (27).
27
VGA Power USB
27
26
25
2-39
17. Secure both Monitor Assy (27) and Cover 2 Assy (24) 28
together with 4 M4x10 Tooth Washer Screws (28).
27 24
27 24
28 28
2-40
18. Adjust the vertical angle of monitor, and tighten the screw (29).
29
19. Adjust the horizontal angle of monitor, and tighten the screw (30).
30
2-41
20. Return the Cover (11).
11
21. Close the Toner Cartridge Cover (8) and the Toner Cover (7).
8
7
22. Return both Top Front Cover (6) and Top Center Cover (4).
2-42
2.7 Installing the Controller
1. Loosen 2 screws (1) and 2 screws (2)
2. Hang the PC Frame (3) to 2 screws (1), and

tighten the screws (1).
2-43
3. Put the Controller Unit (4) on the PC Frame. Connect the necessary cables.
Please see the following two pictures for cable connections on the printer and IPS
NOTE
VGA Cable IF Cable IPS Power
Shut Down Cable USB Cable

(Serial Cable)
2-44
NOTE
IPS Power LAN Cable IF Cable
VGA Cable Shut Down Cable USB Cable

(Serial Cable) (any one)
2-45
4. Hang the Cover 21 Assy (5) to 2 screws (2) while
holding the cables with the wire saddles.
Tighten the screws (2) to secure the Cover 21 (5).
NOTE
Place the Power Cord of Controller Unit with the 7 6
right wire saddle (6), and the other cables
with left sire saddle (7).
Do not place the Power Cord with other cables.
2-46
5. The power switch on the IPS should only be turned on after confirming that the IPS power
supply voltage slider is set to “230”. The power outlet on the KIP 9000 is 220 - 240 VAC or the same
as the wall voltage.
2-47
2.8 Installing the Toner Cartridge
NOTE
The product does not include the Toner Cartridge. Purchase it separately.
Use only KIP 9000 Toner
1. Open the Toner Cover (1), and open the Toner

Cartridge Cover (2). 2
2. Shake the new Toner Cartridge (3) fully to loosen

the toner. 3
3. Install the Toner Cartridge (3) with its green

seal (4) up. 4
2-48
4. Rotate the Toner Cartridge quarter revolution. Strip off the green seal (4).
5. Rotate the cartridge quarter revolution more to place the toner supplying hole on the bottom.
NOTE
Be sure to place the toner supplying bole on the bottom. Otherwise the KIP9000 will show
Toner Empty Error.
6. Close the Cartridge Cover (2) and Toner

Cover (1).
2
1
2-49
2.9 Loading the Media into the Roll Decks
NOTE
The product does not include the media. Please purchase it separately.
2. 9. 1 Roll deck 1, 2 and 3

1. Open the concerning Roll Deck (1).
2. Retrieve the Roll Spool (2) to the arrow direction for 1 revolution to disengage the gears on the
left, and remove it from the deck.
2
2
NOTE
If the Roll Spool is removed without disengaging
the gears (3) on the left, these gears will be broken.
2-50
3. Pressing down the green lever (4), insert the Roll
Spool to the new roll media.
NOTE
Do not install the roll media with wrong direction.
Correct Wrong
4. Align the edge of roll media with the concerning

size guide (5), then release the green lever.
The roll media is firmly fixed to the Roll Spool. 5
2-51
5. Return the Roll Spool to the Roll Deck.
NOTE
The driving belt (6) inside of the Roll Deck must
be flat and evenly contact on the bottom of black
small roller (7) on the right of Roll Spool.
If it is twisted or not contacting the black small
roller properly, correctly it.
7 7
6 6
Correct Wrong (Belt is twisted.)
2-52
6. Using the slit (8) on each drawer, cut off the leading part of roll media with a cutter knife to
straighten the leading edge.
DO NOT FEED ANY TAPE OR ADHESIVE INTO THE MACHINE AS IT MAY STICK TO THE DRUM.
It is best to trim at least one revolution from the roll to prevent this. Please advise the users
7. Insert the leading edge of media between feeding rollers (9), and rotate the upper feeding roller
to pinch the leading edge (1-2cm) with the rollers.
NOTE
The Roll Deck 3 only has a positioning hole (10). (Other Rolls do not have it.)
Feed the roll media until its leading edge comes to appear in the hole, and place the leading
edge at the center of the hole.
10
2-53
8. Set the Media Selector (11) correctly according to the type of media installed.
If any inch size media is installed, select either “ENGINEERING” or “ARCHITECTURE” as well.
(“ENGINEERING” is selected when the button is up, and “ARCHITECTURE” when it is down.)
11
NOTE
Set the Media Selector to correct media type. (Including Architecture/Engineering selection)
Wrong setting of Media Selector could cause unexpected printing results.
9. Close the Roll Deck (1).
2-54
2. 9. 2 Roll deck 4
The method of installation to Roll 4 is a little different from the method for the other Rolls because of the
different location of Roll 4’s feeding rollers. This section instructs the operation required for Roll 4. Refer
to [10.1 Roll 1, 2 & 3] on page 2-55 for the common operations.
1. Open the bottom Roll Deck (1).

1
2. Remove the Roll Spool from the Roll Deck, pull

out the Roll Spool from the old roll media, and
set the new roll media onto the Roll Spool.
NOTE
Please keep the correct direction as the following left photo.
(It is the same way you make for Roll 1, 2 & 3.)
Correct Wrong
2-55
3. Return the Roll Spool to the Roll Deck 4.
4. Insert the leading edge of media under the

feeding roller (2).
5. Rotate the green knob (3) clockwise to pinch the

leading edge (about 1-2cm) with the feeding
rollers.
6. Close the Roll Deck 4 (1).
2-56
2.10 Installing the Cut Sheet Feeder Tray
Install the Tray (1) to the setting

holes (2) on the front face.
1
2
PAPER
DEC K
WI RE-C
LEAN
EX P-CLEAN 1 MF
2 3
4
CUT D1
SELECT EXIT
D2
D3 PF
D4 CO PY
DENSITY
M ENU
←
→
*
ENTER
RE SE T
3 4
2-57
2.11 Turning on the KIP9000
1. Plug the printer to a dedicated wall outlet.
NOTE
The outlet must satisfy the following power condition.
U.S.A. / Europe 220 to 240V (+6% to -10%), 16A, 50/60Hz
2. Press “|” side of Power Switch to turn on the KIP 9000.
3. KIP 9000 starts warming up the Fuser, and the Ready Indicator on the Operation Panel
starts flashing.
PAPER DECK MF EXIT
1 2 3 4 D1
D2 PF
D3 D4
Ready Indicator flashes.
4. The Ready Indicator lights when the KIP9000 is ready in about 6 minutes.
2-58
2.12 Supplying the Toner into Developer Unit
1. Press and hold the [ * ] key on the Operation Panel, and press switches in the order as [ ],
[ ], [ ] and [ ] to enter the Service Mode.
MENU ENTER ONLINE MENU ENTER ONLINE
2. The [MENU] key lights green and the Status Display

indicates present Firmware version when entering the
Service Mode. MENU ENTER ONLINE
Firmware version
3. Select the Special Operation Mode indicating the Sub Mode Number “9” on the 1st digit from
the left pressing the [ MENU ] Key.
Sub Mode Number of Special Operation Mode
MENU ENTER ONLINE
4. Select the Toner Supplying Mode indicates the Item Number “09” pressing [ ] Key
(increment) and [ ] Key (decrement).
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
Item Number of “Toner Supplying”

2-59
4. After confirming that “- -” on 5th and 6th digits is lighting, press the [ ENTER ] Key to start
supplying the toner. The 5th and 6th digits indicate “8 8” in flashing during toner supply.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
“8 8” flashes during toner supply.
NOTE
It is unable to start supplying the toner even if the [ ENTER ] Key is pressed if “- -” is flashing
on the 5th and 6th digits.
5. When the printer detects “toner full”, it stops toner supplying automatically. “- -” lights on 5th
and 6th digits again.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
2-60
Chapter 3
Print Process
Page
3. 1 Characteristic of Toner 3- 2
3. 2 Print Processes 3- 3
3. 2. 1 Erasing 3- 5
3. 2. 2 Drum Cleaning 3- 6
3. 2. 3 Charge of Drum 3- 7
3. 2. 4 Exposure 3- 8
3. 2. 5 Development 3- 9
3. 2. 6 Pre-transfer LED 3-11
3. 2. 7 Transfer 3-12
3. 2. 8 Separation 3-13
3. 2. 9 Fusing 3-14
3. 3 Controlling the Movement of Toner in the Developer Unit 3-15
3. 4 Toner Collection Process 3-18
3. 5 Automatic Controls 3-21

3. 5. 1 Auto Density Control 3-21
3. 5. 1. 1 Density Lock 3-22
3. 5. 1. 2 Auto Density Control 3-23
3. 5. 2 Auto SP Control 3-24
3-1 K115sm3e1.doc
3. 1 Characteristic of Toner
The toner used on KIP9000 has a characteristic to be charged “negative” (like a negative object),
which tends to be attracted to a relatively “positive” object.
Suppose that there are objects A and B, and the situation is as follows.
1. Electric potential of the object B is higher than that of object A.

2. Toner exists on the object A.
Comparing the potential of both objects, it can be said that the object B is relatively “positive” and
the object A is “negative”. (In another word, object B is more “positive” than the object A.) As the
toner is “negative”, it is attracted to the object B which is more “positive”. If the object B is moved
close to the object A, the toner moves onto the object B.
Object A with low potential A

(Relatively negative) A A
Toner moves from A to B.
Object B with high potential B B

B
(Relatively positive)
On the contrary, suppose that the toner exists on the object B of which electric potential is higher
than the object A. Even if the object A is moved close to the object B, the toner continues to stay
on the object B because negative toner and relatively negative object A repel each other.
Object A with low potential A

(Relatively negative) A A
Toner stays on B.
Object B with high potential B B

(Relatively positive) B
Thus, the toner has a characteristic to move from one place with a lower potential to another place
with a higher potential. By controlling the electric potentials properly, it is possible to move the
toner from one place to another as intended, or it is also possible to remove the toner from
unwanted place. The movement of toner is controlled correctly thus and several processes as
Development, Toner Transfer, Drum Cleaning and etc. are performed.
3-2 K115sm3e1.doc
3. 2 Print Processes
One print cycle consists of 9 processes.
1. Erasing (Removal of negative electric charges)

2. Drum Cleaning (Removal of remained toner)
3. Charge of Drum
4. Exposure
5. Development
6. Pre-transfer LED
7. Transfer
8. Separation
9. Fusing
Image Corona
LED Head Grid Plate
Cleaning Roller Fuser Roller

Regulation Roller
Eraser Lamp
SPS
Drum
Separation Corona
Pressure Roller
Separation Lamp
Transfer Corona
Density Sensor
Toner Supply Roller

Pre-transfer LED
Developer Roller
3-3 K115sm3e1.doc
Processes from 1 to 8 are related with the control of electric potentials. The following graphic
shows the potential on each process and the movement of toner.
Voltage of
Cleaning Roller
+800V
+700V
+600V
+500V
+400V
+300V 2
Voltage of
+200V 7 Transfer Corona
+100V
0V
1 1
-100V 8
5
-200V
-300V 4
-400V Voltage of
SP1 6
-500V Developer Roller
3
-600V SP2
-700V
-800V
-900V
Potential on Drum surface

SP1 : For black image
SP2 : For white image
Name of part Voltage (Current) during Print Cycle Voltage during Toner Collection
Process
Image Corona Wire About -5.8KV (-2.0mA +/-0.05mA) -
Grid Plate -XV +/-20V -
(It varies following the machine temperature.)
Developer Roller -YV +/-3V +350V +/-3V
(It varies following the detection by Density Sensor.)
Regulation Roller -100V +/-3V from the voltage of Developer Roller -100V +/-3V from the voltage of
(Center) Developer Roller
Regulation Roller +365V +/-3V from the voltage of Developer Roller +365V +/-5V from the voltage of
(Both sides) Developer Roller
Toner Supply Roller -350V +/-3V from the voltage of Developer Roller -350V +/-3V from the voltage of
Developer Roller
Transfer Corona +520V +/-30V -
(When the Insulated Drum is used.)
Separation Corona AC (11KVp-p) + DC (-250V +/-3V : Plain paper) -
(-300V +/-3V : Tracing paper)
(-10V +/-3V : Film)
Cleaning Roller +800V +/-3V -500V +/-3V
Reference
When printing is going to finish or when the used Roll Deck is changed with other one, “Toner
Collection Process” is performed to take back the remained toner into the Developer Unit.
Refer to [3.4 Toner Collection Process] on the page 3-18 for the detail.
3-4 K115sm3e1.doc
3. 2. 1 Erasing
As the first step of print cycle, the negative electric charges on the Drum are removed by Erasing
process, which remained there after the former print cycle.
The Drum has a characteristic to lose the negative electric charges when exposed to the light. So
the Drum is rotated and evenly exposed to the light from the Eraser Lamp. The electric potential on
the Drum becomes 0V as a result of this process.
0V
0V
0V
Drum
Eraser Lamp
Negative electric charges
3-5 K115sm3e1.doc
3. 2. 2 Drum Cleaning
Small amount of toner is remaining on the Drum as it was not transferred onto the printing media in
the former print cycle. Drum Cleaning is a process to remove such toner from the Drum with the
Cleaning Roller.
The Cleaning Roller is supplied with +800V (+/-3V) in the print process, and the potential of Drum
is 0V at this time as the Eraser Lamp removed the negative electric charges in the former “Erasing”
process. As the Cleaning Roller is relatively “positive” against the Drum potential, the toner moves
from Drum to Cleaning Roller.
Cleaning Roller
0V +800V
0V
0V
Drum
Remained toner
NOTE
The Cleaning Roller may not be able to remove all the toner completely from the Drum if a
mass of toner is remaining on a small area of Drum (like a trace of solid black image). Such
toner not removed completely by Drum Cleaning will be removed from the Drum in later
Development Process.
3-6 K115sm3e1.doc
3. 2. 3 Charge of Drum
The Image Corona takes negative discharging, and the Drum surface is charged negatively with
-XV evenly by this process. The Drum surface charged with -XV corresponds to the white area of
the printed image pattern.
The value of surface potential “-XV” is not constant. The Auto SP Control automatically changes
the surface potential to the most appropriate level according to the information from Surface
Potential Sensor and Temperature Sensor. (Refer to [3.4.2 Auto SP Control] on page 3-26 for
more detail.)
Image Corona
-XV
-820V
0V
0V
Drum
3-7 K115sm3e1.doc
3. 2. 4 Exposure
According to the printed image pattern, the LED Head throws light onto a certain area of the Drum
that corresponds to the black area of printed image pattern. As the Drum has a characteristic to
lose the negative electric charges when exposed to the light, the potential of this exposed area is
increased to about -50V. The other part of Drum surface not exposed to the LED light keeps about
-XV of Surface Potential which has been given by the Image Corona. An invisible electric image
pattern that consists of about -XV area and about -50V area is formed on the surface of Drum as a
result. (This is called “Electrostatic Latent Image”.)
LED Head
Image Corona
-50V -XV
-50V -XV
0V
0V
Drum
(Distribution of electric potentials after the Exposure)
-50V -XV
Reference
(1) The LED Head illuminates with 8 different light-on time. These 8 light-on times are called
IE (Image Enhancement) Levels. Each singular pixel included in the print image is exposed
with any of these 8 IE Levels according to its “visual appeal power”. That means the
strength of illumination from the LED is not constant but varies flexibly. See [REFERENCE]
on page 8-81 for the description of IE Level.
(2) The light from LED Head will not be blocked even if there remains the toner on the Drum
as the diameter of toner is much smaller than that of 1 pixel of LED. It is unnecessary to
worry about the effect on the printed image.
3-8 K115sm3e1.doc
3. 2. 5 Development
The Developer Roller is evenly covered with the toner, and it is contacted to the Drum firmly. (The
width of contacting area is about 5mm.) The Developer Roller is supplied with -YV of Developer
Bias which is flexibly adjusted by the Auto Density Control. On the other hand, an Electrostatic
Latent Image consisting of -XV area and -YV area exists on the Drum. The relationship among -XV,
-YV and the exposed part of the Drum (about -50V) are as follows.
-XV (White image area of Drum) < -YV (Developer Bias) < -50V (Black image area of Drum)
Seen from the voltage of Developer Roller Bias (-YV), the -50V area on the Drum that was
exposed to the light from the LED is relatively “positive”, so the toner moves from the Developer
Roller to the -50V area of Drum. On the other hand, the -XV area is relatively “negative” seen from
the Developer Roller, so the toner does not move to the -XV area but stays on the Developer
Roller. A visible toner image is formed on the Drum as a result.
The value of Developer Bias “-YV” is not constant. The Auto Density Control automatically
changes the Developer Bias to the most appropriate level according to the information from the
Density Sensor. (Refer to [3.4.1 Auto Density Control] on page 3-23 for more detail.)
Drum Drum
-50V
-YV
-XV
Developer Roller
Developer Roller Density Sensor
Before Development After Development

(Toner moves only to -50V area)
-50V -XV
(Invisible Electrostatic Latent Image) (Visible toner image)
3-9 K115sm3e1.doc
Reference
Very small amount of toner may be remaining on “white image area” (corresponds to -XV
area) of Drum if Drum Cleaning process could not remove the toner completely. Such
unnecessary toner in white image area can be removed surely by the Developer Roller
because of the relationship of potential between Drum and Developer Roller.
-XV [Drum] < -YV [Developer Roller]
So there is no possibility that such unnecessary toner will appear on the print as a black spot.
(Toner removed by Developer Roller is returned to the Developer Unit and reused.)
1. Toner remained on the white image area (-XV) of Drum

2. When the toner contacts on the Developer Roller, it moves from Drum (-XV) to
Developer Roller (-YV) as the potential of Developer Roller is relatively “positive” against
Drum.
3. Developer Roller transports the toner toward the Toner Supply Roller
4. Toner Supply Roller returns the toner to the inside of Developer Unit.
5. Toner is used again for development.
1
-XV
2
-YV
5
3
Before Development After Development

(Toner is remaining on the white area.) (Toner is removed from the white area.)
Toner
3-10 K115sm3e1.doc
3. 2. 6 Pre-transfer LED
The potential of non-toner area of the Drum is -XV even after the Development process, which is
so high that the print media may not be separated smoothly from the Drum on later Separation
Process as it is strongly attracted to -XV area by the static force, and may result in a jam in the
worst case. To reduce the static force in advance before Separation Process, the Pre-transfer LED
throws light onto the Drum to remove the negative electric charges some degree from non-toner
area. The potential of non-toner area is increased from -XV to about -80V by Pre-Transfer Process.
-XV
-80V -80V
Pre-transfer LED
3-11 K115sm3e1.doc
3. 2. 7 Transfer
The Transfer Corona takes positive discharging to charge the printing media positively. As the
toner existing on negative Drum surface is attracted to the positive printing media, the toner image
can be transferred onto the media.
The voltage supplied to the Transfer Corona Wire is as follows.
Transfer Corona Wire : +520V +/-30V (When the Insulated Drum is used.)
Positive electric charges
Drum
-50V
-50V -50V -50V
Printing media Transfer Corona
Transfer Guide Plate
Reference
The Transfer Guide Plate in front of the Transfer Corona is grounded through the Varistor
which keeps only the necessary positive electric charges while dismissing excess charges to
the ground.
1. If the Transfer Guide Plate is directly grounded, the positive electric charges given to the
printing media will escape to the ground through the Transfer Guide Plate. As the printing
media is not enough charged positive, much toner remains on the Drum without being
transferred onto the media. The image looks very light in this case.
2. If the Transfer Guide Plate is completely floated from the ground so as to block the
escape route of the positive electric charges, it collects too much positive charges
because the Transfer Corona exists nearby it. As the Transfer Guide Plate is more
strongly charged positive than required, it attracts the toner flying inside the machine. This
toner attracted onto the Transfer Guide Plate will cause the dirt on the back of the print.
3-12 K115sm3e1.doc
3. 2. 8 Separation
The printing media is stuck to the Drum after the Transfer being attracted by the static force. It is
necessary for avoiding the jam to separate the media from the Drum smoothly removing the static
force. The Separation Corona takes AC discharge being supplied with the AC voltage and the DC
voltage.
AC voltage : 11KVp-p
DC voltage : -250V for plain paper
-300V for tracing paper
- 10V for film)
As the AC voltage is compensated by the negative DC voltage, the negative charges are provided
to the printing media more than positive ones. The positive charges on the printing media are
offset by these negative charges. On the other hand, the Separation Lamp throws light from under
the Separation Corona to remove the negative charges of the Drum. The static force between
media and Drum is removed, and the media is naturally removed from the Drum.
Negative charges on the Drum are removed

by the light from the Separation Lamp.
Separation Corona Separation Lamp Positive charges on the media are

removed by AC discharging.
NOTE
The main purpose of Separation Lamp is to assist to separate the media from Drum. But
sometimes the Separation Lamp may become a solution for getting a better transfer result
when some specific type of media is used. If the printed image looks not clear or not enough
dark when printed with some king of unsupported type of printing media for example, it will be
valuable to try to turn ON the Separation Lamp for such media. It can be turned ON/OFF per
media type in the Service Mode and User Mode. See the following each pages.
• [(17) Separation Lamp ON / OFF (PPC) (No.17)] on page 8-60

• [(18) Separation Lamp ON / OFF (Tracing) (No.18)] on page 8-61
• [(36) Separation Lamp ON / OFF (Film) (No.C6)] on page 8-76
• [8.2.6 User Mode 6 (Transfer Support LED ON/OFF [Film])] on page 8-174
3-13 K115sm3e1.doc
3. 2. 9 Fusing
After Transfer / Separation Processes, the Inner Transportation Unit carries the printing media to
the Fuser Unit. The Fuser Unit mainly consists of the Fuser Roller and the Pressure Roller. The
toner is firmly fused onto the printing media by the heat and the pressure when the media passes
through between the Fuser Roller and Pressure Roller.
Fuser Roller
Inner Transportation Unit Pressure Roller
3-14 K115sm3e1.doc
3. 3 Controlling the Movement of Toner
in the Developer Unit
Developer Unit is provided with 3 rollers “Developer Roller”, “Regulation Roller” and “Toner Supply
Roller”, which are provided with their own Bias respectively as the following table. The voltage of
the Developer Roller (-YV) is measured against the ground, and the voltages for other items are
the difference against the Developer Roller Bias (-YV).
Name of roller Supplied voltage

Developer Roller -Y +/-3V against the ground
Regulation Roller (Center) -100 +/-5V against the Developer Roller Bias
Regulation Roller (Sides) +365 +/-3V against the Developer Roller Bias
Toner Supply Roller -350 +/-3V against the Developer Roller Bias
Regulation Roller : Side Insulator Regulation Roller : Center

(+365V against Developer Roller Bias) (-100V against Developer Roller Bias)
Developer Roller
(-YV against GND)
Toner Supply Roller

(-350V against Developer Roller Bias)
NOTE
The insulator divides the Regulation Roller into “Centrer” and “Side”. Different voltage is
provided to them respectively.
3-15 K115sm3e1.doc
Taking advantage of the difference of potentials among these rollers, the movement of toner is
controlled in the Developer Unit as follows.
1. The Toner Supply Roller carries the toner toward the Developer Roller.
2. The voltage of the Toner Supply Roller is 350V lower than that of Developer Roller. When
the toner reaches the contact point of these rollers, it moves onto the Developer Roller. Then
the Development Roller carries the toner toward the Regulation Roller.
3. The Regulation Roller is strongly pressed to the Developer Roller by the spring, and these
2 rollers move to the opposite direction each other at the contact point. The Developer Roller
carries much toner, but the Regulation Roller limits the amount of toner that can pass
through between 2 rollers. As a result very small amount of toner can pass through between
rollers and the rest is returned back to the inside. As the voltage of Developer Roller is 100V
higher than that of Regulation Roller (Center), the toner passed through between rollers is
surely attracted to the Developer Roller. Very thin layer of toner is evenly formed on the
surface of Developer Roller as a result.
4. Much toner sticks onto the Regulation Roller when it is returned back to the inside. This
toner is scraped off by the Scraper which is contacted to the Regulation Roller.
Scraper Regulation Roller : Center

Toner Supply Roller Developer Roller

(-350V against Developer Roller Bias) (-YV against GND)
3-16 K115sm3e1.doc
5. The voltage of both sides of Regulation Roller is 365V higher than the Developer Roller Bias.
When the toner reaches the contact point of these rollers, it moves onto the Regulation
Roller. The side areas of the Developer Roller are not covered with the toner as a result,
which can prevent the toner drops into the machine from the side.
Regulation Roller : Center

(+365V against Developer Roller Bias)
Developer Roller
(-YV against GND)
Regulation Roller : Center

Toner area
Regulation Roller : Side Non-toner area

(+365V against Developer Roller Bias)
Developer Roller
(-YV against GND)
3-17 K115sm3e1.doc
3. 4 Toner Collection Process
As explained in [3.2.2 Drum Cleaning] on page 3-6, the Cleaning Roller removes and collects the
remained toner on the Drum using +800V of voltage supplied to it in the print cycle. KIP9000 takes
an operation to return the collected toner to the Developer Unit in the following 3 cases. (This
process to return the toner is called “Toner Collection Process”.)
(1) When the KIP9000 is going to stop after printing out all the accumulated print jobs.
(2) When the used roll media is ended and changed with another one.
(3) When the used roll media is changed from one to another because of the change of print size.
When the trailing edge of the last sheet passes over the Separation Area, the KIP9000 performs
Toner Collection Process as follows rotating the Drum for 2 revolutions.
1. The Eraser Lamp throws light onto the Drum to remove the negative electric charges from the
Drum. The potential of Drum becomes 0V.
2. The voltage supplied to the Cleaning Roller is changed to -500V in the Toner Collection
Process. As the potential of Drum becomes relatively positive against the Cleaning Roller, the
toner moves from Cleaning Roller to Drum. This toner is transported to the Developer Roller.
Toner
Cleaning Roller
0V
0V
0V
0V
-500V
0V
0V
Drum
Eraser Lamp
3-18 K115sm3e1.doc
3. The voltage supplied to the Developer Roller is also changed to +350V (+/-3V) in the Toner
Collection Process.
As the potential of Developer Roller becomes higher than that of Drum, toner on the Drum
moves onto the Developer Roller.
Then the toner is carried into the Developer Unit by both the Developer Roller and the Toner
Supply Roller.
Toner
0V Drum
0V
0V
0V
+350V
Developer Roller
3-19 K115sm3e1.doc
Reference
Voltages supplied to Regulation Roller and Toner Supply Roller are changed also as follows.
Name of roller Supplied Voltage Supplied voltage

(Against the ground) (Against the Developer Roller Bias)
Developer Roller +350V +/-3V -
Toner Supply Roller - -350V +/-3V
Regulation Roller - -100V +/-3V
(Center)
Regulation Roller - +365V +/-5V
(Sides)
Regulation Roller : Sides Regulation Roller : Center

(+365V against the Developer Roller Bias) (-100V against the Developer Roller Bias)
Developer Roller Toner Supply Roller

(+350V against GND) (-350V against the Developer Roller Bias)
3-20 K115sm3e1.doc
3. 5 Automatic Controls
3. 5. 1 Auto Density Control

If the temperature of installation site varies while the Developer Bias is always fixed to a constant
level, the print image may become lighter or darker than expected. Especially when the
temperature falls, the print image tends to become lighter.
The Auto Density Control is able to get rid of such effect by the temperature variation and realizes
to have always expected density in any temperature condition.
Without Auto Density Control With Auto Density Control
Target density
Resulting density
(Look different from “target”) (Look same with “target”)
The Density Lock process performed in the factory (in most of cases) provides a “Target Density”
to KIP9000. When the Auto Density Control is set to ON, it automatically changes the Developer
Bias flexibly to have the same density with the Target Density in any situation.
3-21 K115sm3e2.doc
3. 5. 1. 1 Density Lock
Density Lock is a process to provide “Target Density” to KIP9000, which is performed in the factory
in most of cases. (This may have to be done in the field very rarely.) This process is very important
as the Target Density specified here will continue to be the expected density applied on all
print/copy afterward.
Density Lock is performed in the factory in the following method. (Do as the same if you will set the
Target Density again in the field.)
1. Set the Auto Density Control to OFF on the Service Mode 5-AA to get rid of any effect by the
variation of temperature during the Density Lock process.
2. Print out any solid black image (Test Pattern #2 for example), and measure its density with a
densitometer.
3. If the solid black needs to be much darker, increase the value of Developer Bias in the Service
Mode 4-19. (Or decrease the value if the solid black needs to be much lighter.)
4. When the density of solid black is successfully adjusted to “expected density” level, perform the
Density Lock immediately in the Service Mode 9-0b.
NOTE
The Developer Bias adjusted in the former procedure 3 can produce the “expected
density” only in the limited temperature situation. If time passes and the room
temperature changes, this Bias may no more be able to produce “expected density”.
Therefore the Density Lock must be performed immediately after the adjustment of
Developer Bias before the room temperature changes.
5. When Density Lock is started, the LED of Density Sensors

throw light onto the bare Drum surface, and the reflection from
the Drum is detected. If the reflection does not satisfy the
specified level, the light intensity of LED is automatically
calibrated. The Density Sensor is initialized by this process.
Density Sensor
6. After the initialization of LED, some calibration target images (solid black) are created on the
Drum with the current Developer Bias setting, and the Density Sensors detect the density of
these images.
Calibration target images
Drum Density Sensor
7. KIP9000 takes average for the densities of those calibration target images and converts it into
a hexadecimal data. This is hexadecimal data is memorized as “Target Density” in the Service
Mode 5-Ab.
3-22 K115sm3e2.doc
3. 5. 1. 2 Auto Density Control
The Auto Density Control is a process to adjust the actual density to the same level with “Target
Density” in any temperature condition by increasing or decreasing the Developer Bias flexibly.
The Auto Density Control can work when it is set to ON (ON1 or ON2) in the Service Mode 5-AA
(or User Mode E). The Auto Density Control takes Bias adjustment when;
• the Fuser is colder than 50 degrees centigrade at power on.
• the inside temperature changes more than 3 degrees since the last Auto Density Control.
• 24 hours has passed with the machine turned on since the last Auto Density Control.
• any parameter concerned with the Auto Density Control is changed.
• the Auto Density Control is newly activated or inactivated.
• the Target Density is changed.
And the Bias adjustment is performed as follows.
1. Some calibration target images (solid black) are created on the Drum, and the Density Sensor
detects the density of these images.
Calibration target images
Drum Density Sensor
2. KIP9000 takes average for the densities of those calibration target images, and converts it into
a hexadecimal data (Actual Density).
3. The above “Actual Density” is compared with the “Target Density”.
4. If the difference between “Actual Density” and “Target Density” is not within the acceptable
range, the Auto Density Control sets another Developer Bias and starts from the procedure 1
again. (Refer to the following [Reference] for the acceptable range.)
5. The adjustment will be finished if the difference of them comes to be within the acceptable
range. If not within the acceptable range, Auto Density Control will try the above procedures
1 to 4 several times.
6. If the density still can not be adjusted to within the acceptable range even after 6 time trials,
KIP9000 will show the Service Call Error E-28.
Reference
Acceptable range depends on the setting on User Mode E (or Service Mode 5-AA).
• When User Mode E (or Service Mode 5-AA) is set to “ON1”, error check is performed
with 5 times of “strict check level” then 1 time of “normal check level”.
• When User Mode E (or Service Mode 5-AA) is set to “ON2”, error check is performed
with 6 times of “strict check level”.
Error check level Acceptable range (Unit : Hex.) Densitometer value
Normal check level +/-20 +/-0.3
Strict check level +/-1 +/-0.05
3-23 K115sm3e2.doc
3. 5. 2 Auto SP Control
A proper voltage gap must be maintained between [Bias] (Developer Bias) and [SP; white]
(Surface Potential for white) for avoiding a foggy background problem.
GND
SP black
Bias
SP white
But if the Auto Density Control increases (adjusts to more negative side) the [Bias], the voltage gap
between [Bias] and [SP: white] may become so small. Especially the Auto Density Control tends to
increase the [Bias] greatly when in a cold environment as bigger voltage gap is required between
[SP: black] (Surface Potential for Black) and [Bias] to have enough density. The foggy background
problem tends to occur in such case because of small voltage gap between [Bias] and [SP: white].
GND GND
SP black SP black
Bias
Bias
SP white SP white
In normal environment In a cold environment

(Gap between [Bias] and [SP: white] is very
small.)
If [SP: white] is adjusted to more negative side accompanying to the increment of [Bias], it is
possible to have enough voltage gap between [SP: white] and [Bias] so the foggy background can
be avoided. The Auto SP Control is thus a process to adjust the [SP: white] automatically to have
enough voltage gap against [Bias].
GND GND
SP black SP black
Bias Bias
SP white
SP white
Before the adjustment by Auto SP Control After the adjustment by Auto SP Control
(Between [Bias] and [SP: white] is small.) (Between [Bias] and [SP: white] is enough
large.)
3-24 K115sm3e2.doc
The value of [SP: white] adjusted by the Auto SP Control relies on the “Target Surface Potential”
that is specified on the following service modes to each setting points (5 to 30oC by every 5oC
step) respectively.
Service Mode 5-A3 : Target Surface Potential at 5oC

5-A4 : Target Surface Potential at 10oC
If the current temperature condition is 15 oC and the Target Surface Potential specified to 15oC is
set to “-400V” for example, the Auto SP Control tries to adjust the [SP: white] to -400V.
Reference
(1) The Target Surface Potential can be specified only to the setting points of 5 degrees step.
Between 2 setting points are plotted with linear curve, and necessary [SP: white] is
automatically calculated.
-450V
-400V
-350V
-300V
5 10 15 20 25 30 oC
(2) Normally a higher value (more negative value) is specified to lower temperature
expecting the Auto Density Control will increase the Bias greatly for low temperature.
The Auto SP Control can work when it is set to ON in the Service Mode 5-A2 (or User Mode D).
The Auto SP Control takes potential adjustment when;
• the Fuser is colder than 50 degrees centigrade at power on.
• the inside temperature changes more than 3 degrees since the last Auto SP Control.
• 24 hours has passed since the last Auto SP Control.
• any parameter concerned with the Auto SP Control is changed.
• the Auto SP Control is newly activated or inactivated.
• the Target Surface Potential is changed.
Auto SP Control adjusts the density as follows.
1. The Surface Potential Sensor detects the surface

potential of Drum, which is given with the current
setting of “Grid Plate Current”.
Surface Potential Sensor
3-25 K115sm3e2.doc
2. On the other hand, the Auto SP Control calculates the necessary [SP: white] based on the
temperature detected by the Temperature Sensor.
3. The actual surface potential detected by Surface Potential Sensor is compared with the
calculated [SP: white].
4. If the difference between actual potential and required [SP: white] is not within the acceptable
range, the Auto SP Control sets another “Grid Plate Current” and starts from the procedure 1
again. (The acceptable range of surface potential can be specified in the service Mode 5-A9.)
5. The adjustment will be finished if the difference of them comes to be within the acceptable
range. If not within the acceptable range, Auto SP Control will try the above procedures 1 to 4
several times.
6. If the surface potential still can not be adjusted to within the acceptable range even after 6 time
trials, KIP9000 will show the Service Call Error E-26.
3-26 K115sm3e2.doc
Chapter 4
Electrical Systems
Page
4. 1 Summary 4- 2
4. 2 Location of Electrical Components 4- 3

4. 2. 1 Printed Circuit Board 4- 3
4. 2. 2 High Voltage Power Supplies & Transformer 4-15
4. 2. 3 DC Power Supplies 4-18
4. 2. 4 Motors 4-21
4. 2. 5 Blowers & Fans 4-25
4. 2. 6 Clutches & Brakes 4-31
4. 2. 7 Solenoids 4-34
4. 2. 8 Heaters & SSR 4-37
4. 2. 9 Terminal Block, Switches, Breaker & Counters 4-41
4. 2.10 Relays 4-46
4. 2.11 Micro Switches 4-48
4. 2.12 Paper Sensors, Thermistor, Thermostat, Toner Sensors & SPS 4-51
4. 2.13 Sensors in Roll Decks 4-60
4. 2.14 Sensors in Bypass Feeder 4-62
4. 2.15 Fuses 4-63
4. 3 Checking & Adjustment of Analog Output from HVP & BIAS 4-67
4. 3. 1 Situations necessary to check the analog output 4-67
4. 3. 2 Checking & Adjustment of HVP1 (Image Corona) 4-68
4. 3. 3 Checking & Adjustment of HVP3 (Transfer Corona) 4-70
4. 3. 4 Checking & Adjustment of HVP4 (Separation Corona) 4-73
4. 3. 5 Checking & Adjustment of HVP5 (Cleaning Roller) 4-76
4. 3. 6 Checking & Adjustment of HVP6 (Grid Plate of Image Corona) 4-79
4. 3. 7 Checking & Adjustment of BIAS (For Developer Unit) 4-83
4. 3. 7. 1 Negative Developer Bias adjustment (Print Cycle) 4-84
(1) Negative Developer Bias for Development Roller 4-84
(2) Negative Developer Bias for Toner Supply Roller 4-87
(3) Negative Developer Bias for Regulation Roller (Center) 4-90
(4) Negative Developer Bias for Regulation Roller (Side) 4-93
4. 3. 7. 2 Positive Developer Bias adjustment (Toner Collection Process) 4-96
(1) Positive Developer Bias for Development Roller 4-96
(2) Positive Developer Bias for Toner Supply Roller 4-98
(3) Positive Developer Bias for Regulation Roller (Center) 4-100
(4) Positive Developer Bias for Regulation Roller (Side) 4-102
4. 4 Compensation of Analog Outputs by Service Mode 4-0d

(Necessary after replacing the DCP2) 4-104
4. 5 Location of Connectors 4-105

4. 5. 1 Process Unit 4-105
4. 5. 2 Base of machine 4-106
4. 5. 3 Back of machine 4-107
4. 5. 4 Top of machine 4-108
4. 5. 5 Left side of machine 4-109
4. 5. 6 Right side of machine 4-110
4. 5. 7 Bypass Feeder Unit 4-111
4. 5. 8 Top Drawer Unit 4-112
4. 5. 9 Middle Drawer Unit 4-113
4. 5.10 Bottom Drawer Unit 4-114
4-1 K115sm4e1.doc
4. 1 Summary
The microcomputer on DC Controller controls the operation of KIP9000. It reads the input signals
from sensors, controls the loads of motors, SSRs, solenoid, clutches and blowers on
programmed timing.
Sensor Micro Computer Driver DC Load

(CPU & ROM)
DC Controller has an LED, meaning that 5Vdc is applied on this DC Controller safely.
Generally the color of wiring is separated depends on the voltage.

0Vdc: blue Signal in to DC Controller (sensors): purple
5Vdc: yellow Signal out from DC Controller: gray
24Vdc: orange
36Vdc: pink
CAUTION
There are batteries on the Main Control PCB (PW11520).
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.

Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
Waste disposal method of battery:
As for the waste disposal of battery, dispose in accordance with local state and federal
relations.
4-2 K115sm4e1.doc
4. 2 Location of Electrical Components
4. 2. 1 Printed Circuit Board
1
(Inside of Bypass Feeder)
Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function

1 PW7771 Indication PCB B PW7771 Offers several operations and
(Operation Panel PCB) information.
2 PW7770 Indication PCB A PW7770 Indicates media size and media
(Media Indicator PCB) type on each Roll.
3 PW7170 Deck Indicator PW7170-01 Upper Deck “in use” indication
4 PW7170 Deck Indicator PW7170-01 Medium Deck “in use” indication
5 PW7170 Deck Indicator PW7170-01 Bottom Deck “in use” indication
6 LCD Touch Screen LCD R10L200- Offers several user operations.
KPU1 (Touch screen)
7 PW7790 Paper Size PCB PW7790 Detects the size of cut sheet media.
4-3 K115sm4e1.doc
(Top side)
11 12 13
8 9 10

8 PW7758 LED Driver PCB PW7758 Driver of Pre-Transfer LED
9 PW7755 DC Driver PCB PW7755 Driver of Motors, HVPs, Bias, Fans,
Solenoid and Clutches
10 PW3590 DC Translation PCB PW3590-01 Junction of LED Head
(DC Terminal PCB)
11 PW11250 DC Regulator PCB PW11250 Power Supply of LCD Unit
(12VDC)
12 PW7757 Transmission Driver PCB PW7757 Driver of the Transmission PCB
(Toner Quantity Sensor used for toner quantity check
LED Driver PCB)
13 PW10257 Driver PCB PW10257 Driver of Web Motor
4-4 K115sm4e1.doc
14

14 Surface Potential Sensor ES2A-4102 Detects the potential on Drum
PCB (600mm) surface. (Always replace with SPS
Sensor)
4-5 K115sm4e1.doc
(Right side)
15
18
16
17
4-6 K115sm4e1.doc
15 PW11520 Main Control PCB PW11520 Controls overall sequence of
KIP9000 being related with the
Interface.
16 PW10780 Temperature & Humidity PW10780 Detects temperature and
Sensor PCB humidity inside of machine
17 PW3599 Signal Terminal PCB PW3599 Signal Junction
18 PW7772 DCP Indication PCB PW7772 Indicating the output conditions
of DC Power Supplies.
CAUTION
There are batteries on the Main Control PCB (PW11520).
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.

Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
Waste disposal method of battery:
As for the waste disposal of battery, dispose in accordance with local state and federal
relations.
4-7 K115sm4e1.doc
(Right side)
21
20

20 PW7750 Transmission PCB PW7750 Detects the toner remaining
level in the Toner Cartridge.
(Throws the light)
21 PW7751 Receiver PCB PW7751 Detects the toner remaining
level in the Toner Cartridge.
(Receives the light
4-8 K115sm4e1.doc
(Right side of Roll Decks)
22
23
24 25

22 PW3575UA Paper Choice PCB U PW3575 Size and type selector of Roll 1
23 PW3575UB Paper Choice PCB U PW3575 Size and type selector of Roll 2
24 PW3575UC Paper Choice PCB U PW3575 Size and type selector of Roll 3
25 PW3575UD Paper Choice PCB U PW3575 Size and type selector of Roll 4
4-9 K115sm4e1.doc
(Left side)
26
27
30
28
29
32 31

26 TP0362 FUMTR Motor Controller PCB TP0362 Fuser Motor Controller
27 TP1142 DRMTR Motor Controller PCB TP1142 Drum Motor Controller
28 PW7756 CUTMTR Motor Controller PCB A PW7756 Cutter Motor Controller
29 PW6125 Phase Control PCB 2 PW6125 Reduces “flicker”.
30 PW4210 AC Circuit Board 2 PW4210 Terminal of AC
31 TP0362 PFMTR Motor Controller PCB TP0362 Paper Feed Motor Controller
32 PW7740 Temperature Detect PW7740 Monitoring abnormal
PCB temperature of IR Lamps.
4-10 K115sm4e1.doc
(Rear side)
37
38
35
33 34 36

33 PW2215 Filter PCB C PW2215 AC line filter
34 PW2215 Filter PCB C PW2215 AC line filter
35 PW6624 PC Controller PCB 2 PW6624 Shuts down the controller PC
36 PW4211 Filter PCB PW4211 Noise filter of the controller
37 PW5490 Reception PCB PW5490 Communicates with optional
device.
38 PW5491 Transmission PCB PW5491 Communicates with optional
device.
4-11 K115sm4e2.doc
(Process frame)
39 40

39 PW7730 E_LAMP Eraser Lamp PCB A PW7730 Removes the electric charges from
the Drum.
40 PW7731 E_LAMP Eraser Lamp PCB B PW7731 Removes the electric charges from
the Drum.
4-12 K115sm4e2.doc
42
41

41 PW1034 S_LAMP Eraser PCB C PW1034 Removes the electric charges to help
(Separation Lamp) paper separation
42 PW1034 S_LAMP Eraser PCB I PW1034 Removes the electric charges to help
(Separation Lamp) paper separation
4-13 K115sm4e2.doc
(Backside of each Roll Deck)
43
→
* E NTER
RE SET
44 45 46

43 PW3597 DC Translation PCB P PW3597 Roll Deck 1 Roll Size Sensor
PCB
PCB
PCB
PCB
4-14 K115sm4e2.doc
4. 2. 2 High Voltage Power Supplies & Transformer
(Top side)

1 HVP1 HV1 High Voltage Power KHKG-063 Supplies the high voltage to the
Supply Image Corona.
2 HVP5 HV5 High Voltage Power AHKG-067 Supplies the high voltage to the
Supply Cleaning Roller.
4-15 K115sm4e2.doc
(Left side)

3 HVP3 HV_TR High Voltage Power BHKG-070 Supplies the high voltage to the
Supply Transfer Corona.
4 HVP4 HV_AC High Voltage Power FHKG-046 Supplies the high voltage AC to
Supply the Separation Corona.
5 HVP6 HV6 High Voltage Power KHKG-065 Supplies the high voltage to the
Supply Grid Plate.
6 BIAS Bias Power Supply KHKG-062 Supplies the Developer Bias to each
roller in the Developer Unit.
Output 1 : Toner Supply Roller
Output 2 : Developer Roller
Output 3 : Regulation Roller
(Center)
Output 4 : Regulation Roller
(Both sides)
4-16 K115sm4e2.doc
(Rear side)

7 T1 Insulation Transformer KCT-01B Converts the inputted AC into
(EUR & USA) 24VAC for Dehumidify Heater of
Roll 1 and 2
4-17 K115sm4e2.doc
4. 2. 3 DC Power Supplies
(Right side)

1 DCP1 DC Power Supply ZWS240PAF- Supplies +24VDC (240W).
24/J
4-18 K115sm4e3.doc
(Top side)

2 DCP2 DC Power Supply LEA150F-5 Supplies +5VDC (150W) to sensors,
LED Head, DC Controller and so on.
4-19 K115sm4e3.doc
(Rear side)
3 5

3 DCP3 DC Power Supply ZWS150PAF- Supplying +36VDC (150W) to the
36/J Drum Motor (M1).
4 DCP4 DC Power Supply ZWS150PAF- Supplying +36VDC (150W) to Paper
36/J Feed Motor (M2), Cutter Motor (M3)
and Fuser Motor (M5).
5 DCP5 DC Power Supply ZWS5-5/J Supplying +5VDC (5W) to the
PC Controller PCB 2.
4-20 K115sm4e3.doc
4. 2. 4 Motors
(Left side)
5
1

1 M1 DRMTR DC Motor TL1142 Drives both the Drum and the
(Drum Motor) Developer Unit.
2 M2 PFMTR DC Motor TL0314 Drives the roll feeding mechanism.
(Paper Feed Motor)
3 M3 CUTMTR Stepping Motor KT56LM4G- Drives the Cutter Unit.
(Cutter Motor) 004
4 M4 DPMTR DC Motor DU2422-1 Presses the Developer Unit to
(Developer Positioning the Drum, and also separates
Motor) the Developer from the Drum.
5 M5 FUMTR DC Motor TL0314 Drives the Fuser Roller.
(Fuser Motor)
6 M10 T_MTR DC Motor DME37B6H30 Drives the cut sheet media
(Bypass Feeding Motor) B feeding mechanism.
(Fuser unit)

7 M11 W_MTR Synchronous Motor D125J45-34 Drives the Web. (This is an
(Web Motor) optional part.)
4-21 K115sm4e3.doc
9

8 M6 HOP_MTR2 DC Motor DU2711-3 Drives the Toner Hopper to
Toner Supply Motor 2 supply the toner to the
Developer Unit.
9 M8 DC Motor LA20-282BD Drives the Cleaning Pad to
(LED Cleaning Motor) clean the LED Head.
4-22 K115sm4e3.doc
(Image Corona)
10

10 M9 DC Motor LA20-282BD Drives the Cleaning Pad to
(Wire Cleaning Motor) clean the Image Corona Wire.
4-23 K115sm4e3.doc
(Right side)
11

11 M7 HOP_MTR1 DC Motor DME34B50G Drives the Toner Cartridge to
(Toner Supply 96B supply the toner to the Toner
Motor 1) Hopper.
4-24 K115sm4e3.doc
4. 2. 5 Blowers & Fans
(Rear side)
3 1

1 BL1 SEPBLW Sirocco Fan TA0409 Inhales the air from the bottom of
(Separation Fan) Internal Transportation Unit to help
paper separation. 4 Ozone Filters
are provided.
2 BL17, 18 & EXBLW3 Fan Motor CNDC24B7- Exhausts the inside air. An Ozone
19 (Exhaust Fan 3) 027 Filter is provided to each of them.
3 FM2 Fan Motor FBA09A24H Cools down both the DCP3 and the
(Cooling Fan 2) DCP4.
4-25 K115sm4e4.doc
(Rear side : Fuser section)
4 4

4 BL2 & BL3 EXBLW_L Sirocco Fan FAL-14C4RH Cools down the top of the
EXBLW_H (Exhaust Blower) Fuser.
4-26 K115sm4e4.doc
(Inside of Rear Upper Cover)
5 5 5 5

5 BL4 A-D PRESBLW_L Fan D04R24TH33 Blows the air from the top so
BL5 A-D PRESBLW_H (Pressure Blowers) as to help the paper goes into
BL6 A-D the Fuser Area easily.
BL7 A-D
4-27 K115sm4e4.doc
6 6 7 7

6 BL8 A-D COOL_FAN1 Fan D04R24TH33 Cools down the LED Head.
BL9 A-D (LED Cooling Fans 1)
7 BL10 A-D COOL_FAN2 Fan D04R24TH33 Cools down the LED Head.
BL11 A-D (LED Cooling Fans 2)
4-28 K115sm4e4.doc
(Process frame)
10 9 8 9 10

8 BL14 SEPBLW2 Sirocco Fan E0515H24B7AZ- Helps paper’s separation from the
(Separation Assist Blower 2) 13 Drum. It works always during print
regardless of the paper size.
9 BL13 & BL15 SEPBLW3 Sirocco Fan E0515H24B7AZ- Helps paper’s separation from the
(Separation Assist Blower 3) 13 Drum. They work if the paper is
364mm (17") or wider.
10 BL12 & BL16 SEPBLW4 Sirocco Fan E0515H24B7AZ- Helps paper’s separation from the
(Separation Assist Blower 4) 13 Drum. They work if the paper is
841mm (30") or wider.
4-29 K115sm4e4.doc
(Right side)
11

11 FM1 Fan Motor FBA09A24H Cools down the DCP1.
(Cooling Fan 1)
(Left side)
13
12

12 FM3 Fan Motor FBA06T24H Cools down the Cutter Motor
(Cooling Fan 3) Controller PCB (PW7756).
13 FM4 Fan Motor FBA06T24H Cools down the Cutter Motor (M3)
(Cooling Fan 4)
4-30 K115sm4e4.doc
4. 2. 6 Clutches & Brakes
(Left side)
5 1 2
6
7
4 3
8

1 MC1 RP_CL Electromagnetic Clutch BJ-3.5-160
(Roll Paper Feed Clutch 1)
2 MC2 RP_CL2 Electromagnetic Clutch BJ-3.5-160
5 MC5 P_GATE Electromagnetic Clutch BJ-3.5-160
(Paper Gate Clutch)
6 MC10 PG_BK Electromagnetic Brake BB-3.2-E01
(Paper Gate Brake)
7 MC6 RP_FEED Electromagnetic Clutch AMC20
(Paper Feed Clutch)
8 MC9 PF_BK Electromagnetic Brake BB-3.2-E01
(Paper Feed Brake)
4-31 K115sm4e5.doc
9 10

9 MC7 MF_CL Electromagnetic Clutch 2 BJ-3.5-E06
(Bypass Feed Clutch)
(Roll Deck 1 Feed Clutch)
4-32 K115sm4e5.doc
(Right side)
11

11 MC11 HOPPER Electromagnetic Clutch 1 BJ-3.5-E07
(Toner Supply Clutch)
4-33 K115sm4e5.doc
4. 2. 7 Solenoids
(Fuser Unit)

1 SL1 FU_SL Solenoid G1247 G1247 Moves the Fuser Entrance Guide
(Fuser Solenoid) Plate up and down.
This solenoid is locked and does
not function presently.
(Cutter Unit)

2 SL2 CT0_SL Solenoid G1253-K7 Moves the oil pad to lubricate the
(Cutter Oil Supply Solenoid) Cutter Blade.
4-34 K115sm4e5.doc
3

3 SL3 T_SL1 Solenoid G-1053-K12 Moves the Bypass Feeding Roller up
(Bypass Feeding Roller and down.
Down Solenoid)
4-35 K115sm4e5.doc
(Inside of Bypass Feeder)

4 SL4 T_SL2 Solenoid G-1053-K12 Moves the Bypass Reversal Roller
(Bypass Reversal Roller up and down.
Down Solenoid)
4-36 K115sm4e5.doc
4. 2. 8 Heaters & SSR
(Fuser Unit)

1 H1 F_LAMP1 IR Lamp QIR220- Heats up the center of the Fuser
1750KIC Roller.
(EUR & USA)
2 H2 F_LAMP2 IR Lamp QIR220- Heats up both sides of the Fuser
1350KIAG Roller.
(EUR & USA)
4-37 K115sm4e6.doc
(Left side)

3 SSR1 Solid State Relay S5N-225HV Turns on and off the IR Lamp (H1).
4 SSR2 Solid State Relay S5N-225HV Turns on and off the IR Lamp (H2).
4-38 K115sm4e6.doc
7 8
5 6

5 H3 Heater Dehumidifies the roll media in the
(Dehumidify Heater) Roll 3 (Left side).
15W (3.5 kilo ohm)
(Dehumidify Heater) Roll 3 (Right side).
15W (3.5 kilo ohm)
(Dehumidify Heater) Roll 4 (Left side).
15W (3.5 kilo ohm)
(Dehumidify Heater) Roll 4 (Right side).
15W (3.5 kilo ohm)
4-39 K115sm4e6.doc
(1st Roll Deck)
10
(2nd Roll Deck)

(Dehumidify Heater) Roll 2.
15W (38 ohm)
(Dehumidify Heater) Roll 1.
15W (38 ohm)
4-40 K115sm4e6.doc
4. 2. 9 Terminal Block, Switches, Breaker & Counters
(Left side)

1 TB1 Terminal Block UF1005-30A-
2P
2 CB1 Circuit Protector IEG-6-11-62-
20A-M
4-41 K115sm4e6.doc
3

3 S1 Power Supply Switch AJ8R2004ZZ Turns on the printer.
(Main Switch) C01
4-42 K115sm4e6.doc
4

4 S2 Power Supply Switch SDDJE1 Turns on the Dehumidify Heaters.
(Dehumidify Heater Switch)
4-43 K115sm4e6.doc
(Right side)

5 CNT B CPY_CNT Electromagnetic Counter 2 SCM-2470SK Counts the number of prints.
(Counter B) (Counting unit is changeable in the
Service Mode.)
It has 3 pins on the junction
connector.
6 CNT A LNG_CNT Electromagnetic Counter 1 SCM-2470SK Counts the length of total print.
(Counter A) (Counting unit is changeable in the
Service Mode.)
It has 2 pins on the junction
connector.
4-44 K115sm4e6.doc
4. 2.10 Relays
(Rear side)
1 2 3
4

1 RY1 Relay G7L-2A-BUB Supplies the power to DCP1, DCP2
(Relay 1) AC200-240 and Filter PCB (PW2215) of H2.
(Does not shut it off even if the
Interlock is open.)
2 RY2 Relay G7L-2A-BUB Supplies the power to Filter PCB
(Relay 2) DC24 (PW2215) of H1.
(Shuts it off if the Interlock is open.)
3 RY3 Relay G7L-2A-BUB Supplies the power from Filter PCB
(Relay 3) DC24 (PW2215) to H2.
(Shuts it off if the Interlock is open.)
4 RY6 Relay G7L-2A-BUB Supplies the power to DCP3 and
(Relay 6) DC24 DCP4.
(Shuts it off if the Interlock or any
Roll Deck is open.)
5 RY7 Relay G2R-1-T-DC5 Supplies the power to DCP1.
(Relay 7) (Shuts it off when in the Cold Sleep.)
4-46 K115sm4e7.doc
(Right side)

6 RY4 Relay JC2aF-TM- Supplies the DC power to the
(Relay 4) DC24V following parts.
It is shut off if the Interlock or any
Roll Deck is open.
(1) HVP1, 3, 4 & 6
(2) BIAS
(3) M10
(4) BL4, 5, 6 & 7
(5) FM3 & FM4
(6) Pre-transfer LED
7 RY5 Relay JC2aF-TM- Supplies the DC Power to the
(Relay 5) DC24V following parts.
It is shut off if the Interlock is open.
(1) HVP5
(2) M6 & 7
(3) MC1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9 & 10
(4) BL1, 2, 3, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13,
14, 15, 16, 17, 18 & 19
(5) SL1, 2, 3 & 4
(6) CNT1 & 2
(7) Surface Potential Sensor PCB
(8) Eraser PCB C & I
(Separation Lamp)
4-47 K115sm4e7.doc
4. 2.11 Micro Switches
(Right side)

1 DS1 RIGHT_SW1 Door Switch D2VW-5L3- Opens RY2, RY3, RY4, RY5 and
(Right Side Door Switch) 1HS-191 RY6 when DS1 is open.
(Interlock Switch)
2 DS2 RIGHT_SW1_ Door Switch D2VW-01L3- Status signal of “Right Door Open”
Status (Right Side Door Switch) 1HS
4-48 K115sm4e7.doc
(Right side)
4
3

3 DS5 RIGHT_SW2 Door Switch D2VW-5L3- Shuts of the power for Toner
(Toner Cover Switch) 1HS-191 Supply Motor 1 (M7), Toner
Supply Motor 2 (M6), Toner
Supply Clutch (MC11) and
Transmission PCB (PW7750)
when DS8 is open.
4 DS6 RIGHT_SW2_ Door Switch D2VW-01L3- Status signal of “Toner Cover Open”
Status (Toner Cover Switch) 1HS
4-49 K115sm4e7.doc
(Rear side)

5 DS3 EXIT_SW Door Switch D2VW-5L3- Opens RY2, RY3, RY4, RY5 and
(Exit Cover Switch) 1HS-191 RY6 when DS3 is open.
6 DS4 EXIT_SW_ Door Switch D2VW-01L3- Status signal of “Exit Cover Open”
Status (Exit Cover Switch) 1HS
4-50 K115sm4e7.doc
4. 2.12 Paper Sensors, Thermistor, Thermostat,
Toner Sensors & SPS

1 SPS1 Surface Potential Sensor ES2A-6007 Detecting the potential of the Drum
2 PH44 Density Sensor GP2Y40010KOF Detects the density of toner image
on Drum for Automatic Density
Control.
4-51 K115sm4e8.doc
3

3 PH22 CUTHP_O Cutter Home Position PW2285 Detects the Home Position of the
Sensor Cutter Blade
4 PH24 PFUNIT_ST Photo Interrupter GP1A73 Detects whether the Internal
(Internal Transportation Transportation Unit is closed or not.
Unit Set Sensor)
4-52 K115sm4e8.doc
(Process Unit)

5 PH25 DEVE_HP Photo Interrupter LG283 Detects the position of the Developer
(Developer Unit Position Unit (Pressed or released)
Sensor)
6 TLS1 DEV_TNR1 Toner Sensor TS15D20-37 Detects the existence of the toner in
(Hopper Toner Sensor) the Hopper
4-53 K115sm4e8.doc
(Developer Unit)
7
8

7 PH42 TNR_LED Toner Sensor (Illuminator) KB876- Detects the existence of toner in the
KD12LF Developer Unit. This throws light.
8 PH43 TNR_SENSOR Toner Sensor (Receiver) KB874- Detects the existence of toner in the
KD22LF Developer Unit. This receives light.
4-54 K115sm4e8.doc
(Right side)

8 PH45 RFID IC Tag Reader & ARWBT-RF01 Detects the Toner Cartridge.
Writer PCB
4-55 K115sm4e8.doc
(On the Internal Transportation Unit)
10
PAPER
WIRE-CLEAN DECK
EXP-CLEAN 1 23 MF
4
CUT D1
SELECT EXIT
D2
D3 PF
D4 COPY DENSITY
MENU ←
→
*
ENTER
RESET

9 PH12 PA_ENT Photo Interrupter GP2A25 Places the roll media to the print start
(Leading Edge Sensor) position.
10 PH18 P_SEPR Actuator 2 Assy GP1S74P Detects the Separation Jam.
(Separation Sensor)
4-56 K115sm4e8.doc
(Fuser Unit)
13 11 12

11 TH1 Thermistor NC-F1B Controls the temperature of the
Fuser Roller (Non-contacting type)
12 TH2 Thermistor ES2U1.3B6- Shuts off the RY2 and RY3 before
20031 the Thermostat opens when over
temperature is detected.
(Contacting type)
13 TS1 INT1 Thermostat Assy Protects the Fuser from over heating
4-57 K115sm4e8.doc
(Fuser Unit)
14

14 LS2 P_EXIT Lead Switch RS-801EA Detects the Exit Jam.
(Exit Sensor)
15 PH40 Web Sensor GP1A73 Detects the feeding of web
4-58 K115sm4e8.doc
(Rear side)
15

15 PH40 Web Sensor GP1A73 Detects the feeding of web
4-59 K115sm4e8.doc
4. 2.13 Sensors in Roll Decks
(Roll Deck 1)
9 5 7 8
→
*
ENT R
R EST
2
6
4
3 1 10

1 PH1 RP_SET1 Photo Interrupter GP2A25 Detects the existence of roll media.
(Roll Set Sensor 1) Detects 210mm, 9” & 8.5” roll media
also
2 PH5A SZDATA0 Photo Interrupter GP2A25 Detects 880mm, 890mm & 900mm
(Paper Size Sensor 0) roll media
3 PH6A SZDATA1 Photo Interrupter GP2A25 Detects 420mm, 18” and 17” roll
(Paper Size Sensor 1) media
4 PH7A SZDATA2 Photo Interrupter GP2A25 Detects 515mm & 22” roll media
(Paper Size Sensor 2)
8 PH11A SZDATA6 Photo Interrupter GP2A25 Detects 36” roll media
9 PH41 Photo Interrupter GP2A25 Detects 15” roll media
(Paper Size Sensor)
10 PH13 RF_CLK1 Photo Interrupter GP1A73 Detects the clock pulse generated by
(Paper Feed Clock Sensor Roll 1(No pulse : Roll end)
1)
4-60 K115sm4e8.doc
(Roll Decks 2, 3 & 4)
2 3 1
→
*
ENTE R
RESE T
B
D
C
11
6 4
12
13
5 7 8 9 10

also
also
also
4 PH5B, C & D SZDATA0 Photo Interrupter GP2A25 Detects 297mm, 12” & 11” roll media
(Paper Size Sensor 0) PH5B : Roll Deck 2
PH5C : Roll Deck 3
PH5D : Roll Deck 4
5 PH6B, C & D SZDATA1 Photo Interrupter GP2A25 Detects 420mm, 18” & 17” roll media
PH6C : Roll Deck 3
PH6D : Roll Deck 4
6 PH7B, C & D SZDATA2 Photo Interrupter GP2A25 Detects 515mm & 22” roll media
PH7C : Roll Deck 3
PH7D : Roll Deck 4
PH8C : Roll Deck 3
PH8D : Roll Deck 4
PH9C : Roll Deck 3
PH9D : Roll Deck 4
9 PH10B, C & SZDATA5 Photo Interrupter GP2A25 Detects 841mm & 34” roll media
D (Paper Size Sensor 5)
PH10B : Roll Deck 2
PH10C : Roll Deck 3
PH10D : Roll Deck 4
10 PH11B, C & SZDATA6 Photo Interrupter GP2A25 Detects 36” roll media
D (Paper Size Sensor 6)
PH11B : Roll Deck 2
PH11C : Roll Deck 3
PH11D : Roll Deck 4
(Paper Feed Clock Sensor 2) Roll 2 (No pulse : Roll end)
(Paper Feed Clock Sensor 3) Roll 3 (No pulse : Roll end)
(Paper Feed Clock Sensor 4) Roll 4(No pulse : Roll end)
4-61 K115sm4e8.doc
4. 2.14 Sensors in Bypass Feeder
(Bypass Feeder & Roll 1)
2 3 4

1 PH20 MP_SRT Photo Interrupter GP2A25 Places a large cut sheet media at the
(Bypass Start Sensor) print start position. (Large means
841mm, 30”, 34” and 36”.)
2 PH31 Photo Interrupter GP2A25 Detects the existence of cut sheet
(Cut Sheet Set Sensor) (GP2A28) media on the Bypass Feeder
It also detects 8.5”.
3 PH32, 33 & T_SIZE0 Photo Interrupter GP2A25 Detects the size of the cut sheet
34 (Cut Sheet Size Sensor 0) (GP2A28) media
PH32 : 297mm & 9”
PH33 : 420mm & 17”
PH34 : 18”
4 PH35, 36 & T_SIZE1 Photo Interrupter GP2A25 Detects the size of the cut sheet
37 (Cut Sheet Size Sensor 1) (GP2A28) media
PH35 : 22”
PH36 : 594mm & 24”
PH37 : 841mm, 30”, 34” & 36”
4-62 K115sm4e8.doc
4. 2.15 Fuses
(Left side)
(Left side)
2 1
F101 and F102 are on the AC Circuit Board B (PW4210).
Item Symbol Name Rate Type Caution for replacement

1 F101 Fuse 250V / 2A 218002 When fuse (F101) is to be replaced,
use the following specified one.
Manufacturer : LITTEL FUSE INC.

Type : 218002 (250V / 2A)
CAUTION : DOUBLE POLE /

NEUTRAL FUSING

Type : 218002 (250V / 2A)
CAUTION : DOUBLE POLE /

NEUTRAL FUSING
4-63 K115sm4e9.doc
(Rear side)


Type : 218002 (250V / 2A)
4 F241 Fuse 250V / 3.15A 2153.15 Protects the outlet for controller
When fuse (F241) is to be replaced,


Type : 2153.15 (250V / 3.15A)
4-64 K115sm4e9.doc
(Top side)
6 8
7
5
F551 and F552 are on the DC Driver PCB (PW7755).


Type : 215005 (250V / 5A)
6 F551 Fuse 250V / 0.5A 215.500
7 F552 Fuse 250V / 0.25A 215.250
8 F571 Fuse 250V / 3.15A
9 F572 Fuse 250V / 3.15A
4-65 K115sm4e9.doc
(Right side)
(Left side)
10 11 12 13

10 F5 Fuse 250V / 4A 215004 Protects 24VDC from DCP1.
11 F6 Fuse 250V / 4A 215004
12 F7 Fuse 250V / 4A 215004 When fuses (F3 to F6) are to be
replaced, use the following specified
13 F8 Fuse 250V / 4A 215004
one.

Type : 215004 (250V / 4A)
4-66 K115sm4e9.doc
4. 3 Checking & Adjustment of Analog
Output from HVP & BIAS
4. 3. 1 Situations necessary to check the analog

output
After replacing High Voltage Power Supplies (HVP) or Bias PCB (BIAS), or when abnormal image
is printed out, check if each PCB outputs correct voltage or current. The followings are the items
need to be checked and readjusted. See each “Reference page” for the operation procedure.
Checking Item Reference page

HVP1 (Image Corona) 4-68
HVP3 (Transfer Corona) 4-70
HVP4 (Separation Corona) 4-73
HVP5 (Cleaning Roller) 4-76
HVP6 (Grid Plate) 4-79
BIAS (Developer Unit) 4-83
4-67 K115sm4ea.doc
4. 3. 2 Checking & Adjustment of HVP1
(Image Corona)
The standard value of current supplied from the HVP1 is -2.0mA +/-0.05mA.
Check and adjust the HVP1 in the following way.
1. Remove the Drum from the machine for the safety.

The Drum will be damaged if not removed!
2. Find “OUTPUT MONITOR” pins on the HVP1, and connect “+” of multi-meter to the “+” pin and
“-” to the “COM.” pin. Select the DC volt range on the multi-meter.
VR1
VR2 VR3
COM. +
OUTPUT
MONITOR
Multi-meter
(DC volt range)
3. Enter the Service Mode, select the Function Checking Mode (Sub Mode No.3), and select the
Signal Code “A0” (HV1 : Image Corona Control Signal).
MENU ENTER ONLINE
4-68 K115sm4ea.doc
4. Press the [ENTER] Key to output from the HVP1.
Measure the voltage with multi-meter.
Press the [ENTER] Key again to stop outputting when measurement is finished.
Standard value of current is -2.0mA +/-0.05mA.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
NOTE
If the multimeter shows “2.0V”, it means “-2.0mA”. (Replace “+” with “-“, and replace “V” with
“mA”.)
5. If the current from HVP1 does not satisfy -2.0mA +-/0.05mA, readjust it to satisfy the
requirement.
To adjust the HVP1 current, select the Adjustment Mode 0 (Sub Mode No.4) and select the
Item No.1A (Current setting for the Image Corona Wire).
MENU ENTER ONLINE
• Refer to [8.1.5.3 Operation] on the page 8-36 for how to change the setting value.
• Refer to [(20) Current setting for the Image Corona Wire (No.1A)] on the page 8-62 for the
detail of this setting.
CAUTION
Do not adjust the HVP1 current by rotating the VR on HVP1 positively as it is properly
adjusted before shipment!
4-69 K115sm4ea.doc
(Transfer Corona)
The standard values of current supplied from the HVP3 are specified for each media type as
follows.
Plain paper 1.4mA +/-0.02mA

Tracing paper 1.4mA +/-0.02mA
Film 1.4mA +/-0.02mA
NOTE
A DC Current Meter must be connected directly to the HVP3 to measure the HVP3 output
current. (Multimeter is not able to measure the intensity.)
CAUTION
It is very dangerous to check the Transfer Current as the DC Current Meter muse be
connected directly to the HVP3.
For the safety, put a thick insulation pad such as urethane form under the DC Current Meter,
and also use a high voltage lead wire.

2. Disconnect the connector that exists on the cable between HVP3 and Socket for the Transfer /
Separation Corona. Connect “+” of the DC Current Meter to the cable from HVP3, and connect
“-” to the cable from the Socket.
Put a Urethane Pad under the DC Current Meter for your safety!
mA
VR1
DC Current Meter
Transfer Corona
Socket VR2 VR3
4-70 K115sm4ea.doc
Signal Code “A2” (HV_TR : Transfer Corona Control Signal).
MENU ENTER ONLINE
4. Press the [ENTER] Key to output from the HVP3.

Measure the voltage with DC Current Meter. (It is required to be careful about the “target media
type” of output current at this time. See the following NOTE.)
Standard values of Transfer Current are as follows.
Plain paper 1.4mA +/-0.02mA

Tracing paper 1.4mA +/-0.02mA
Film 1.4mA +/-0.02mA
MENU ENTER ONLINE
NOTE
As known generally, the transfer current (HVP3 output current) can be set separately to each
media type (plain paper, tracing paper and film). The transfer current output by Service Mode
3-A2 will target one of 3 media types that was selected at the latest print opportunity. (If tracing
paper was used in the latest printing, the transfer current will target the tracing paper if
outputted by Service Mode 3-A2.) The target media type can not be changed even if you
change the switch selection of Media Type Selector.
To change the target media type, do as follows.
(1) Select the Adjustment Mode 0 (Sub Mode No.4), and select any of Item No.1C, 1d and 1E
according to the necessity. (Select “1C” if you will check the transfer current for plain paper
for example.)
1C : Current setting for the Transfer Corona Wire (PPC)
1d : Current setting for the Transfer Corona Wire (Tracing)
1E : Current setting for the Transfer Corona Wire (Film)
(2) Change and decide the setting value by usual way in the selected Item No. The target
media type is changed according to the “target media type” of selected setting item
if the value is decided. (If any new value is decided in item “1d” (for tracing paper) for
example, the target media type applied in Service Mode 3-A2 will change to tracing paper.)
(3) Select the Service Mode 3-A2 and output from the HVP3. The HVP3 will output the
transfer current for proper media type.
4-71 K115sm4ea.doc
5. If the current from HVP3 does not satisfy the following values, readjust it to satisfy the
requirement.
To adjust the HVP3 current, select the Adjustment Mode 0 (Sub Mode No.4) and select the
Item No.1C, 1d and 1E.
1C : Current setting for the Transfer Corona Wire (PPC)

1d : Current setting for the Transfer Corona Wire (Tracing)
1E : Current setting for the Transfer Corona Wire (Film)
MENU ENTER ONLINE
• Refer to [(22) Current setting for the Transfer Corona Wire (No.1C to 1E)] on the page 8-
63 as for the contents of the setting.
CAUTION
4-72 K115sm4ea.doc
(Separation Corona)
The standard values of DC Component outputted from HVP4 are as follows.
DC Component : Plain paper -250V +/-3V

Tracing paper -300V +/-3V
Film -10V +/-3V

2. To check the DC Component, connect “+” of multi-meter to “R42” or “R43” (either one is OK)
and “-” the ground.
Select the DC volt range on the multi-meter.
VR1
VR3
blue
blue
VR2
white
R42 Connect to either R42 or R43.

R43
CURRENT
CHECK
GND
Multi-meter
(DC volt range)
Signal Code “A1” (HV_AC : Separation Corona Control Signal).
MENU ENTER ONLINE
4-73 K115sm4ea.doc
4) Press the [ENTER] KEY to output from the HVP4.
Measure the voltage with multi-meter. (It is required to be careful about the “target media type”
of DC Component at this time. See the following NOTE.)
Standard value of DC Component for each media type is as follow.
Plain paper -250V +/-3V

Tracing paper -300V +/-3V
Film -10V +/-3V
MENU ENTER ONLINE
NOTE
As known generally, the DC Component (HVP4 output voltage) can be set separately to each
media type (plain paper, tracing paper and film). The DC Component current output by Service
Mode 3-A1 will target one of 3 media types that was selected at the latest print opportunity. (If
tracing paper was used in the latest printing, the DC Component will target the tracing paper if
outputted by Service Mode 3-A1.) The target media type can not be changed even if you
change the switch selection of Media Type Selector.
To change the target media type, do as follows.
(1) Select the Adjustment Mode 0 (Sub Mode No.4), and select any of Item No.1F, 20 and 21
according to the necessity. (Select “1F” if you will check the DC Component for plain paper
for example.)
1F : Separation Corona DC component (PPC)
20 : Separation Corona DC component (Tracing)
21 : Separation Corona DC component (Film)
(2) Change and decide the setting value by usual way in the selected Item No. The target
media type is changed according to the “target media type” of selected setting item
if the value is decided. (If any new value is decided in item “20” (for tracing paper) for
example, the target media type applied in Service Mode 3-A1 will change to tracing paper.)
(3) Select the Service Mode 3-A1 and output from the HVP4. The HVP4 will output the DC
Component for proper media type.
4-74 K115sm4ea.doc
5. If the voltage from HVP4 does not satisfy the following values, readjust it to satisfy the
requirement.
To adjust the HVP4 voltage, select the Adjustment Mode 0 (Sub Mode No.4) and select the
Item No.1F, 20 and 21.
1F : Separation Corona DC component (PPC)

20 : Separation Corona DC component (Tracing)
21 : Separation Corona DC component (Film)
MENU ENTER ONLINE
• Refer to [(23) Separation Corona DC component (No.1F to 21)] on the page 8-64 as for
the contents of the setting.
4-75 K115sm4ea.doc
(Cleaning Roller)
The standard value of positive/negative Cleaning Roller Bias outputted from the HVP5 are as
follows.
Positive Cleaning Roller Bias +800V +/-3V

Negative Cleaning Roller Bias -500V +/-3V
1. Connect “+” of the multi-meter to “OUTPUT” pin on the HVP5 and “-” to the ground.
CN502
OUTPUT
1
VR1
CN501
VR2
1
GND
Multi-meter
(DC volt range)
4-76 K115sm4ea.doc
2. Output both positive Cleaning Roller Bias (outputted during Print Cycle) and negative one
(outputted during Toner Collection Process).
Measure both positive and negative voltages with multi-meter. (Refer to the following NOTE for
the way to output both Bias.)
The standard value of positive Cleaning Roller Bias and negative one are as follows.
Positive Cleaning Roller Bias +800V +/-3V
Negative Cleaning Roller Bias -500V +/-3V
NOTE
The polarity of Cleaning Roller Bias is “positive” normally.
(1) To output the positive Cleaning Roller Bias, enter the

Service Mode, select the Function Checking Mode (Sub
Mode No.3), and then select the Signal Code “74” MENU ENTER ONLINE
(HV5 : Cleaning Roller Bias Control Signal).

Press the [ENTER] Key to output the positive Bias.
(2) It is impossible to output the negative Cleaning Roller Bias for checking purpose as the
Service Mode does not have such item.
Make a print (including test print) and measure the negative Cleaning Roller Bias that is
outputted for a short period when the printer is in almost final stage of print cycle. (This is
only the way to measure the negative bias.)
3. If the negative Cleaning Roller Bias does not satisfy -500V +-/3V, readjust it to satisfy the
requirement.
To adjust the negative Cleaning Roller Bias, rotate the VR1 on the HVP5 with a screwdriver.
CN502
OUTPUT
1
VR1
CN501
VR2
1
GND
Multi-meter
(DC volt range)
4-77 K115sm4ea.doc
4. If the positive Cleaning Roller Bias does not satisfy +800V +-/3V, readjust it to satisfy the
requirement.
To adjust the positive Cleaning Roller Bias, rotate the VR2 on the HVP5 with a screwdriver.
CN502
OUTPUT
1
VR1
CN501
VR2
1
GND
Multi-meter
(DC volt range)
4-78 K115sm4ea.doc
(Grid Plate of Image Corona)
The standard value of the Grid Bias outputted from HVP6 is -780V +/-20V (About 12.2V on the
Test Pin). Check and adjust the HVP6 in the following way.

2. There is a connector “CN501” on the HVP6.

Connect “+” of the multi-meter to the white cable (Test Pin) of CN501, which is the 2nd cable
from the top of CN501.
Connect “-” to the ground.
VR1
White cable
(Test Pin)
CN501
OUT
VR2 PUT
GND
Multi-meter
(DC volt range)
Signal Code “A6” (HV6 : Grid Bias Control Signal).
MENU ENTER ONLINE
4-79 K115sm4ea.doc
4. Press the [ENTER] Key to output the Grid Bias from HVP6.
Standard value on the Test Pin is about 12.2V.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
5. If the voltage on the test pin (2nd pin on CN501) does not show about 12.2V, readjust it to
satisfy the requirement.
To adjust it, select the Adjustment Mode 0 (Sub Mode No.4) and select the Item No.1b
(Current setting for the Grid Plate).
MENU ENTER ONLINE
• Refer to [(21) Current setting for the Grid Plate (No.1b)] on the page 8-63 as for the
contents of the setting.
CAUTION
4-80 K115sm4ea.doc
6. After re-adjustment, it is necessary to confirm the actual voltage outputted from the “OUTPUT”
Pin on the HVP6.
To confirm it, connect “+” of the multi-meter to “OUTPUT” and “-“ to the ground.
VR1
CN501
OUT
VR2 PUT
GND
Multi-meter
(DC volt range)
7. Select the Function Checking Mode (Sub Mode No.3), and select the Signal Code
“A0” (HV1 : Image Corona Control Signal).
MENU ENTER ONLINE
NOTE
Do not select the Signal Code “A6” (Grid Bias Control Signal) this time as it outputs only
analog voltage WITHOUT outputting high voltage from “OUTPUT” to the Grid Plate.
Signal Code “A0” (HV1 : Image Corona Control Signal) is suitable for measurement as it
outputs the high voltage to both Image Corona Wire and Grid Plate.
8. Press the [ENTER] Key to output from HVP6.

Standard value of output voltage on “OUTPUT” is -780V +/-20V.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
4-81 K115sm4ea.doc
9. If the voltage from HVP6 does not satisfy -780V +/-20V, readjust it to satisfy the requirement.
To adjust the HVP6 voltage, select the Adjustment Mode 0 (Sub Mode No.4) and select the
Item No.1b.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
• Refer to [(21) Current setting for the Grid Plate (No.1b)] on the page 8-63 as for the
contents of the setting.
4-82 K115sm4ea.doc
4. 3. 7 Checking & Adjustment of BIAS
(For Developer Unit)
Each roller in the Developer Unit is supplied with its own necessary voltage respectively in the
Print Cycle. These kinds of voltage supplied in the Print Cycle are called “Negative Developer
Bias”. The following list shows the value of “Negative Developer Bias” to each roller.
Supplied to ; Voltage Voltage Output Pin on Adjustment VR

(Against the (Against the voltage of the BIAS on the BIAS
ground) Developer Roller)
Developer Roller -250V +/-3V - Output 2 -
(Service Mode)
Toner Supply Roller - -350 +/-3V Output 1 VR8
Regulation Roller (Center) - -100V +/-3V Output 3 VR6
Regulation Roller (Side) - +365V +/-3V Output 4 VR4
On the other hand, each of these rollers is supplied with its own necessary voltage respectively in
the Toner Collection Process, which is different from the voltage supplied in the Print Cycle. These
voltages supplied in the Toner Collection Process are called “Positive Developer Bias”. The
following list shows the value of “Positive Developer Bias” to each roller.
Supplied to ; Voltage Voltage Supplied from ; Adjustment VR

(Against the (Against the voltage of (Output Pin on (VR on the
ground) Developer Roller) the BIAS) BIAS)
Developer Roller +350V +/-3V - Output 2 VR1
Toner Supply Roller - -350V +/-3V Output 1 VR7
Regulation Roller (Center) - -100V +/-3V Output 3 VR5
Regulation Roller (Side) - +365V +/-5V Output 4 VR3
Regulation Roller (Side) Regulation Roller (Center)
Developer Roller Toner Supply Roller
4-83 K115sm4ea.doc
4. 3. 7. 1 Negative Developer Bias adjustment (Print Cycle)
(1) Negative Developer Bias for Developer Roller
The standard value of Negative Developer Bias outputted to the Developer Roller is -250V +/-3V
against the ground when the Auto Density Control is set to OFF.
Developer Roller
Check and adjust it in the following way.
1. Connect “+” of the multi-meter to “Output 2” on the BIAS and “-“ to the ground.
CN401 CN402 CN403

1 1 1
VR4 VR3 VR6 VR5 VR1 VR8 VR7

VR2
Output 2
Output 4 Output 1
Output 3
GND
Multi-meter
(DC volt range)
4-84 K115sm4ea.doc
2. Enter the Service Mode, select the Adjustment Mode 0 (Sub Mode No.4), and select the Item
No.CA (Constant / Variable control of Developer Bias).
If this item is set to “1” (Variable control), set it to “0” (Constant control) before starting the
adjustment.
NOTE
If No.CA is set to “1”, the Bias is occasionally adjusted to the best value according to the
temperature detected by the temperature sensor. (between 10 to 20 degrees centigrade)
This situation is not suitable when the output from the BIAS PCB is to be checked.
The Bias will be always same regardless of the temperature if No.CA is set to “0”, which is
suitable for checking.
3. Select the Special Mode (Sub Mode No.9), and select the Item No.8 (Developer Bias
[Negative] Adjustment Mode).
MENU ENTER ONLINE
4. Press the [ENTER] Key to output the Negative Developer Bias from BIAS to each roller of
Developer Unit.
Standard value of the Negative Developer Bias to the Developer Roller is -250V +/-3V.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
4-85 K115sm4ea.doc
5. If the Negative Developer Bias from BIAS to Developer Roller does not satisfy -250V +/-3V,
readjust it to satisfy the requirement.
To adjust it, select the Adjustment Mode 0 (Sub Mode No.4) and select the Item No.19
(Developer Bias).
MENU ENTER ONLINE
• Refer to [(19) Developer Bias (applied when Auto Density Control is set to OFF) (No.19)]
on the page 8-62 as for the contents of the setting.
CAUTION
Do not adjust the Negative Developer Bias by rotating the VR2 on BIAS positively as it is
properly adjusted before shipment!
4-86 K115sm4ea.doc
(2) Negative Developer Bias for Toner Supply Roller
The standard value of Negative Developer Bias outputted to the Toner Supply Roller is -350V
+/-3V against the Negative Developer Bias of Developer Roller.
Toner Supply Roller
1. Connect “+” of the multi-meter to “Output 1” on the BIAS and “-“ to the “Output 2”.
CN401 CN402 CN403

1 1 1

VR2
Output 2
Output 4 Output 1
Output 3
Multi-meter
(DC volt range)
4-87 K115sm4ea.doc
adjustment.
NOTE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
Developer Unit.
Standard value of the Negative Developer Bias to the Developer Roller is -350V +/-3V.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
4-88 K115sm4ea.doc
5. If the Negative Developer Bias from BIAS to Toner Supply Roller does not satisfy -350V +/-3V,
To adjust it, rotate the VR8 on the BIAS with a screwdriver.
CN401 CN402 CN403

1 1 1

VR2
Output 2
Output 4 Output 1
Output 3
Multi-meter
(DC volt range)
4-89 K115sm4ea.doc
(3) Negative Developer Bias for Regulation Roller (Center)
The standard value of Negative Developer Bias supplied to the Regulation Roller (Center) is
-100V +/-3V against the Negative Developer Bias of Developer Roller.
Regulation Roller (Center)
CN401 CN402 CN403

1 1 1

VR2
Output 2
Output 4 Output 1
Output 3
Multi-meter
(DC volt range)
4-90 K115sm4ea.doc
adjustment.
NOTE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
Developer Unit.
Standard value of the Negative Developer Bias to the Regulation Roller (Center) is -100V
+/-3V.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
4-91 K115sm4ea.doc
5. If the Negative Developer Bias from BIAS to Regulation Roller (Center) does not satisfy -100V
+/-3V, readjust it to satisfy the requirement.
CN401 CN402 CN403

1 1 1

VR2
Output 2
Output 4 Output 1
Output 3
Multi-meter
(DC volt range)
4-92 K115sm4ea.doc
(4) Negative Developer Bias for Regulation Roller (Side)
The standard value of Negative Developer Bias supplied to Regulation Roller (Side) is
+365V +/-3V against the Negative Developer Bias of the Developer Roller.
Regulation Roller (Side)
CN401 CN402 CN403

1 1 1

VR2
Output 2
Output 4 Output 1
Output 3
Multi-meter
(DC volt range)
4-93 K115sm4ea.doc
adjustment.
NOTE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
Developer Unit.
Standard value of the Negative Developer Bias to the Regulation Roller (Side) is +365V +/-3V.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
4-94 K115sm4ea.doc
5. If the Negative Developer Bias from BIAS to the Regulation Roller (Side) does not satisfy
+365V +/-3V, readjust it to satisfy the requirement.
CN401 CN402 CN403

1 1 1

VR2
Output 2
Output 4 Output 1
Output 3
Multi-meter
(DC volt range)
4-95 K115sm4ea.doc
4. 3. 7. 2 Positive Developer Bias adjustment
(Toner Collection Process)
(1) Positive Developer Bias for Developer Roller
The standard value of Positive Developer Bias supplied to the Developer Roller is +350V +/-3V
against the ground.
Developer Roller
1. Connect “+” of the multi-meter to “Output 2” on the BIAS and “-“ to the ground.
CN401 CN402 CN403

1 1 1

VR2
Output 2
Output 4 Output 1
Output 3
GND
Multi-meter
(DC volt range)
4-96 K115sm4ea.doc
2. Enter the Service Mode, select the Special Mode (Sub Mode No.9), and select the Item No.7
(Developer Bias [Positive] Adjustment Mode).
MENU ENTER ONLINE
3. Press the [ENTER] Key to output the Positive Developer Bias from BIAS to each roller of
Developer Unit.
Standard value of the Positive Developer Bias to the Developer Roller is +350V +/-3V.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
4. If the Positive Developer Bias from BIAS to Developer Roller does not satisfy +350V +/-3V,
CN401 CN402 CN403

1 1 1

VR2
Output 2
Output 4 Output 1
Output 3
GND
Multi-meter
(DC volt range)
4-97 K115sm4ea.doc
(2) Positive Developer Bias for Toner Supply Roller
The standard value of Positive Developer Bias supplied to the Toner Supply Roller is -350V +/-3V
against the Positive Developer Bias of the Developer Roller.
Toner Supply Roller
CN401 CN402 CN403

1 1 1

VR2
Output 2
Output 4 Output 1
Output 3
Multi-meter
(DC volt range)
4-98 K115sm4ea.doc
MENU ENTER ONLINE
Developer Unit.
Standard value of the Positive Developer Bias to the Toner Supply Roller is -350V +/-3V.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
4. If the Positive Developer Bias from BIAS to Toner Supply Roller does not satisfy -350V +/-3V,
CN401 CN402 CN403

1 1 1

VR2
Output 2
Output 4 Output 1
Output 3
Multi-meter
(DC volt range)
4-99 K115sm4ea.doc
(3) Positive Developer Bias for Regulation Roller (Center)
The standard value of Positive Developer Bias supplied to the Regulation Roller (Center) is -100V
+/-3V against the Positive Developer Bias of the Developer Roller.
Regulation Roller (Center)
CN401 CN402 CN403

1 1 1

VR2
Output 2
Output 4 Output 1
Output 3
Multi-meter
(DC volt range)
4-100 K115sm4ea.doc
MENU ENTER ONLINE
Developer Unit.
Standard value of the Positive Developer Bias to the Regulation Roller (Center) is -100V +/-3V.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
4. If the Positive Developer Bias from BIAS to the Regulation Roller (Center) does not satisfy
-100V +/-3V, readjust it to satisfy the requirement.
CN401 CN402 CN403

1 1 1

VR2
Output 2
Output 4 Output 1
Output 3
Multi-meter
(DC volt range)
4-101 K115sm4ea.doc
(4) Positive Developer Bias for Regulation Roller (Side)
The standard value of Positive Developer Bias supplied to the Regulation Roller (Side) is +365V
+/-5V against the Positive Developer Bias of the Developer Roller.
Regulation Roller (Side)
CN401 CN402 CN403

1 1 1

VR2
Output 2
Output 4 Output 1
Output 3
Multi-meter
(DC volt range)
4-102 K115sm4ea.doc
MENU ENTER ONLINE
Developer Unit.
Standard value of the Positive Developer Bias to the Regulation Roller (Side) is +365V +/-5V.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
4. If the Positive Developer Bias from BIAS to the Regulation Roller (Side) does not satisfy +365V
+/-5V, readjust it to satisfy the requirement.
CN401 CN402 CN403

1 1 1

VR2
Output 2
Output 4 Output 1
Output 3
Multi-meter
(DC volt range)
4-103 K115sm4ea.doc
4. 4 Compensation of Analog Outputs by
Service Mode 4-0d
(Necessary after replacing DCP2)
This operation is needed only after replacing the DC Power Supply 2 (DCP2).
[Technical operation]
The Main Controller PCB needs to be supplied with 5Vdc from the DC Power Supply 2 (DCP2), but
in actual case there are many cases that the power from DCP2 to Main Controller PCB is lower
than 5Vdc (as “4.99Vdc” or “4.98Vdc”). In such case the Analog Outputs from the High Voltage
Power Supplies (HVP1-6) and Bias Power Supply (BIAS) are very slightly smaller than what they
are needed to be.
The Service Mode 4-0d (Compensation of Analog Outputs) compensates those Analog Outputs to
the needed levels automatically. For example if the current actual input to Main Control PCB is
“4.98V” and it is input to the Service Mode 4-0d, the KIP9000 firmware takes an internal process to
“increase” the actual input (4.98Vdc) to the needed input (5Vdc), and the Analog Outputs from
HVP (1-6) and BIAS are increased as well consequently.
The input voltage to Main Control PCB has been measured and correctly input to the Service
Mode 4-0d before shipment. If the DC Power Supply 2 (DCP2) is replaced in the field, it is required
to measure the actual input and input to the Service Mode 4-0d. (KIP9000 firmware takes
necessary compensation automatically if only the actual value of input voltage is set on 4-0d.)
[Operation]
1. Find J-201 on the Main Controller PCB, and measure the DC voltage between J201-3 (yellow)
and J201-4 (blue) with multi-meter. This is the actual input voltage to Main Controller PCB.
J-201
J201-3
J201-4
2. Enter the Service Mode, select the Adjustment Mode 0 (Sub Mode No.0), and select the Sub
Mode No.0d.
Input the actual value input voltage to Main Controller PCB.
4-104 K115sm4ea.doc
4. 5 Location of Connectors
4. 5. 1 Process Unit
J303 J302 J311 J312 J313 J314
J301
J92 J181
J178 J182
J183
J179
J56 J46
J180
4-105 K115sm4eb.doc
4. 5. 2 Base of machine
J7 J17 J18
J8 J15 J16
4-106 K115sm4eb.doc
4. 5. 3 Back of machine
J52
J341C
RY2-0 RY3- 0
J 901A J 911
RY1- 1 RY2- 1 RY3-1
J 137 J134 CN2G

J 136 J 135
CN 1G
RY1- 0
CN1D CN2D TB151B TB151A RY1- 2 RY2- 2

J 72 RY3- 8
TB150B TB150A RY1- 4 RY2- 4
J3- 1B RY1- 6 RY2- 6 RY3- 6
RY1- 8 RY2- 8 RY3- 4
J 3- 2B RY3- 2
CN1E CN2E J 172 J6 J 241 J 27
J 3- 2A J242
J 127 RY6- 6 RY6- 8 J 155 J 244
TB154B TB154A
J 3- 1A RY6- 0
J13 J 19 J 9
RY7- 3 RY7- 4 RY6- 1
RY7-1 RY7- 5 TB153B TB153A TB113 TB110

RY6- 4 RY6- 5 TB152B TB152A TB112 TB111
4-107 K115sm4eb.doc
4. 5. 4 Top of machine
J29 J125 J30 J126
J28
J91
J31
J66 CN3F CN2F CN1F CN1A
J58
J60 J97
J551 J552 J59
CN1Z
J94 J571A
J87
J84 J85 J86
J63 J571 J573A
J902 OUT
J554
J558 J572A
J158A CN502A CN501A
J555 J67
TB581 J901
CN2C
CN1J J557 CN3C CN1C
J556
J581 J138
J710
CN2Z
4-108 K115sm4eb.doc
4. 5. 5 Left side of machine
S2-2 S2-1
M10- 1 M10-2
J12 CN2I
CN501 CN2
CN1I
CN3
CN1
J24 J154
CN401 CN403
CN402
J173 J56
J2 J3 J51 J53 J26

J1 J21
J62
J160 J44
J45 J35
SSR2- 1
CN1B
SSR2- 2
J562
SSR2- 3 J40 J41
J36 J37
SSR2- 4
SSR1- 4
SSR1- 3 J561
SSR1- 1
SSR1- 2 J47
J159
J402
CN301 J563
J252
J39 J38
CB1- 1b
CB1- 2b J253
J102 CN1H CN2H
CB1- 2a J103 J251
CB1- 1a TB101
J101 J107
TB1-N
J106
J158 J8
TB1-L
J104
J7
4-109 K115sm4eb.doc
4. 5. 6 Right side of machine
177A
177
DS5- COM DS6- COM J174

DS5- NO DS6- NO
J700
DS3-COM
J25 DS3-NO
J70 DS4-COM
J96
DS4- NO
J98 J99 J501
J5 J4
J208
J701A J156 J207 J209 J210 J161

J95
J65 J211
J206 J54 DS1-COM
DS1- NO
J205 DS2- COM J32
J55 J216
J157 DS2-NO J176A
J204 J49
J701B
J803
J203
J215 J71
J33
J64 J212
J202 J34 J176
J701C J201 J48
J214 J801 J802
- 2 -2 -2 -2
RY5-6 F5 F6 F7 F8
RY5- 1 - 1 -1 -1 -1
RY5-5 RY5- 2
J158
J991 J993 RY5-4 RY5- 3
J69
J801A J994 J992 J721 UI-OUT UI-IN
RY4-6
RY4- 1
RY4-2
RY4-3
RY4- 5 RY4-4
4-110 K115sm4eb.doc
4. 5. 7 Bypass Feeder Unit
J67
J142 J902 J901

J140
J143 J144 J145 J146 J147 J148
4-111 K115sm4eb.doc
4. 5. 8 Top Drawer Unit
J70
J88A J92A J90A J89A J68 J73 J175 J91A J93A J972A J94A
J971A
J43 J42 J11
J74
J751A
4-112 K115sm4eb.doc
4. 5. 9 Middle Drawer Unit
J71
J90B J88B J76 J89B J91B J92B J93B J94B
J972B J971B
J10 J751B
J77
4-113 K115sm4eb.doc
4. 5.10 Bottom Drawer Unit
J971D J972D J72
J971C J972C
J75D
J83
J90D J88D J82 J89D J91D J92D J93D J94D
J90C J88C J79 J89C J91C J92C J93C J94C
J80
J751C
4-114 K115sm4eb.doc
Chapter 5
Mechanical Systems
Page
5.1 Process Unit 5- 3
5.1.1 Drawing out the Process Unit 5- 3
5.1.2 Removing Image Corona, Drum Assembly, Toner Hopper & Developer Unit 5- 6
5.1.3 Replacing Eraser Lamp A & B 5-11
5.1.4 Replacing Separation Assist Blowers (BL12 to BL16) 5-12
5.1.5 Replacing Developer Unit Position Sensor (PH25) 5-13
5.2 Image Corona 5-15

5.2.1 Replacing each Periodical Replacement Part of the Image Corona
(Corona Wire 1 Assembly, Grid Plate & Wire Cleaning Units) 5-15
5.2.2 Replacing Wire Cleaning Motor (M9) 5-20
5.3 Drum Assembly 5-21

5.3.1 Replacing each Periodical Replacement Part of the Drum Assembly
(Photo Conductive Drum & 178T Gear) 5-21
5.4 Toner Hopper 5-23

5.4.1 Replacing Hopper Toner Sensor (TLS1) 5-23
5.5 Developer Unit 5-24

5.5.1 Replacing each Periodical Replacement Part of the Developer Unit 5-24
5.5.2 Replacing Toner Sensor (Illuminator) 5-43
5.5.3 Replacing Toner Sensor (Receiver) 5-46
5.6 Cutter Unit 5-47

5.6.1 Removing Cutter Unit 5-47
5.6.2 Replacing Cutter Oil Supply Solenoid (SL2) 5-49
5.6.3 Lubrication / Replacement of Stay Assembly 5-51
5.6.4 Adjusting Home Position of Cutter Blade 5-53
5.6.5 Adjusting angle of Cutter Unit 5-56
5.7 Fuser 5-58

5.7.1 Removing Fuser Unit 5-58
5.7.2 Replacing IR Lamps & Fuser Roller 5-62
5.7.3 Replacing Pressure Roller 5-70
5.7.4 Replacing Exhaust Blowers (BL2 & BL3) 5-75
5.7.5 Replacing Thermistor 5-78
5.7.6 Replacing Thermostat 5-81
5.7.7 Replacing Stripper Finger Assemblies 5-84
5.7.8 Replacing Separation Fingers 5-86
5.7.9 Replacing Exit Sensor (LS2) 5-90
5.7.10 Replacing Pressure Blowers (BL4 to BL7) 5-92
5.8 Roll Decks 5-95

5.8.1 Removing each Roll Deck 5-95
5.8.2 Replacing Bypass Feed Clutch (MC7) &
Roll Deck 1 Feed Clutch (MC8) (1st Roll Deck) 5-96
5.8.3 Replacing Roll Set Sensor 1 (PH1), Paper Size Sensors (PH5A to PH11A) &
Bypass Start Sensor (PH20) (1st deck) 5-97
5.8.4 Replacing Roll Set Sensor 2 (PH2) &
Paper Size Sensors (PH5B to PH11B) (2nd deck) 5-100
5-1 K115sm5e1.doc
Paper Size Sensors (PH5C to PH11C) (3rd deck) 5-103
Paper Size Sensors (PH5D to PH11D) (4th deck) 5-107
5.8.7 Replacing Paper Feed Clock Sensors (PH13 to PH16) (Common for all decks) 5-112
5.8.8 Replacing 501-3M Belt (Common for all decks) 5-115
5.8.9 Replacing Dehumidify Heaters (1st & 2nd decks) 5-117
5.8.10 Replacing Dehumidify Heaters (3rd & 4th decks) 5-119
5.8.11 Replacing Spool Brake 5-121
5.9 Bypass Feeder 5-122

5.9.1 Removing Bypass Feeder Unit 5-122
5.9.2 Replacing Bypass Reversal Roller Down Solenoid (SL4) 5-123
5.9.3 Replacing Cut Sheet Set Sensor (PH31) &
Cut Sheet Size Sensors (PH32 to PH37) 5-125
5.9.4 Replacing Bypass Feeding Roller Down Solenoid (SL3) 5-128
5.10 Internal Transportation Unit 5-132

5.10.1 Replacing Belt 2 5-132
5.10.2 Replacing Separation Sensor (PH18) 5-136
5.10.3 Removing Internal Transportation Unit 5-140
5.11 Transfer / Separation Corona 5-151

5.11.1 Removing Transfer / Separation Corona 5-151
5.11.2 Replacing Corona Wire 2 Assemblies 5-153
5.11.3 Replacing Mylar 5-158
5.11.4 Adjustment of gap between Drum & Corona Housing 5 5-159
5.12 LED Head 5-165

5.12.1 Removing LED Head 5-165
5.12.2 Replacing Pad Assembly 2 5-170
5.12.3 Replacing LED Cleaning Motor (M8) 5-171
5.13 Main Frame 5-172

5.13.1 Replacing Drum Motor (M1) & Timing Belt 565-5GT-40 5-172
5.13.2 Replacing Paper Feed Motor (M2) 5-181
5.13.3 Replacing Fuser Motor (M5) 5-183
5.13.4 Replacing Developer Positioning Motor (M4) 5-187
5.13.5 Replacing Cutter Motor (M3), Cutter Home Position Sensor (PH22) &
Internal Transportation Unit Set Sensor (PH24) 5-188
5.13.6 Replacing Bypass Feeding Motor (M10) 5-195
5.13.7 Replacing Toner Supply Motor 2 (M6) 5-201
5.13.8 Replacing Paper Gate Clutch (MC5) & Paper Gate Brake (MC10) 5-203
5.13.9 Replacing Paper Feed Clutch (MC6) & Paper Feed Brake (MC9) 5-206
5.13.10 Replacing Roll Paper Feed Clutches (MC1 to MC4) 5-210
5.13.11 Replacing SSR1 and SSR2 5-212
5.13.12 Replacing LED Cooling Fans (BL8 to BL11) 5-215
5.13.13 Replacing Leading Edge Sensor (PH12) 5-217
5.13.14 Replacing Pre-transfer LED 5-220
5.13.15 Adjustment of gap between Drum & Transfer Guide Plate 5-223
5.13.16 Replacing Ozone Filters 5-229
5.13.17 Replacing Separation Fan (BL1) 5-231
5.14 Toner Cartridge Driving Part 5-234

5.14.1 Replacing Transmission PCB (PW7750) & Receiver PCB (PW7751) 5-234
5.14.2 Replacing Toner Supply Motor 1 (M7) & Toner Supply Clutch (MC11) 5-238
5.15 Web (Option) 5-247

5.15.1 Replacement of Web Roll 5-247
5.15. 2 Installation of Web Kit 5-254
5-2 K115sm5e1.doc
5.1 Process Unit
5.1.1 Drawing out the Process Unit
1) Open the Toner Cover (1) and the Toner Cartridge
Cover (2).
2) Rotate the Toner Cartridge (3) half revolution to move the opening (4) to the top position.
Then, close both Toner Cover (1) and Toner Cartridge Cover (2).
NOTE
There is a Shutter under the opening (4).
Even if you draw out the Process Unit without moving the opening (4) to the top, it will catch
the spilt toner.
But if too much toner is caught, it will spill into the machine in the end.
Please do not forget to move the opening to the top.
5-3 K115sm5e2.doc
3) Open the Right Side Door (5).
4) Unlock the Internal Transportation Unit (6) rotating the Internal Transportation Unit Lever (7)
counter-clockwise, bring down the unit and then lock the shaft of lever with the Hook (8).
5) Remove 4 pieces of black M4x14 screws (9) which are inside of Sponges.
NOTE
Even if you remove black M4x14 screws (9), sponges will hold them so as not to lose.
5-4 K115sm5e2.doc
6) Hold both Handles (10) firmly, and draw out the Process Unit (11) from the machine.
11
10
5-5 K115sm5e2.doc
5.1.2 Removing Image Corona, Drum Assembly,
Toner Hopper & Developer Unit
1) Draw out the Process Unit (1) from the machine
making reference to [5.1.1 Drawing out the Process 1
Unit] on the page 5-3.
2) Disconnect the connector (2), remove 2 pieces of bind head screw (3), and then remove the
Image Corona (4) holding both plastic corona heads (5).
2 3
5-6 K115sm5e2.doc
3) Catch the shaft of Cleaning Roller (6), bring it up (bring up driving side first then driven side) to
remove the bearings (7) from the brackets.
As there are notches (8) near the setting position, fit the bearings (7) to put the Cleaning Roller (6)
temporarily.
(Driving side) (Driven side)
8 6 6 8
7
7
NOTE
Please put back the Cleaning Roller to the setting position before you close the Process Unit.
If you close the unit without putting back the roller, roller will touch the plate and its surface will
be broken!
5-7 K115sm5e2.doc
4) Catching both sides, move the Drum Assembly (9) upward along the Drum Guide in the Process
Unit and remove from the machine.
Keep the Drum Assembly in the Package Box if it should be out of the machine for a long time.
Or stand it on the attached Drum Stand (10) temporarily if you put it back within a short time.
10
5) Disconnect the connector (11) of the Hopper Toner Sensor.
11
5-8 K115sm5e2.doc
6) Remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screws (12), and then bring up and remove the Toner
Hopper (13).
12
13
12
13
NOTE
There are many holes on the bottom of the Toner Hopper and the toner will spill out.
Please lay a large paper under the Process Unit before you remove the Toner Hopper.
7) Disconnect the connector (14) of the Developer

Toner Sensor.
14
5-9 K115sm5e2.doc
8) Remove 2 pieces of Developer Release Brackets (15) removing 1 tooth washer screw (16) for
each one.
16
15
9) Holding black side plates (17) on both sides, bring up and remove the Developer Unit (18).
17 18
18
5-10 K115sm5e2.doc
5.1.3 Replacing Eraser Lamp A & B
1) Remove each Image Corona (1), Cleaning Roller (2) and Drum Assembly (3) from the Process
Unit making reference to [5.1.2 Removing Image Corona, Drum Assembly, Toner Hopper &
Developer Unit] on the page 5-6.
1 3
NOTE
Do not put the Cleaning Roller (2) temporarily on the Process Unit, but please remove it
completely and put it on the paper.
2) Disconnect 2 connectors (4), remove 6 pieces of bind head screws (5) and remove both
Eraser Lamps A & B (6).
Replace Eraser Lamps A & B (6) with the new ones.
4 5 5 4 6
5-11 K115sm5e2.doc
5.1.4 Replacing Separation Assist Blowers
(BL12 to BL16)
1) Remove each Image Corona (1), Cleaning Roller (2) and Drum Assembly (3) from the Process
Unit making reference to [5.1.2 Removing Image Corona, Drum Assembly, Toner Hopper &
Developer Unit] on the page 5-6.
1 3
NOTE
Do not put the Cleaning Roller (2) temporarily on the Process Unit, but please remove it
completely and put it on the paper.
2) Disconnect the connector (4), remove 2 pieces of bind head screws (5) and remove each
Separation Assist Blower (6).
Replace the Separation Assist Blower (6) with the new one.
5 6
5-12 K115sm5e2.doc
5.1.5 Replacing Developer Unit Position Sensor (PH25)
1) Remove each Image Corona (1), Drum Assembly (2), Toner Hopper (3) and Developer Unit (4)
from the Process Unit making reference to [5.1.2 Removing Image Corona, Drum Assembly,
Toner Hopper & Developer Unit] on the page 5-6.
2 1
3 4
2) Disconnect the connector (5) in the Process Unit.
3) Remove 2 pieces of tooth washer screws (6) out of the Process Unit to remove the Bracket 102
(7) with the sensor.
7
7 6
5-13 K115sm5e2.doc
4) Press and release the Stoppers (8), and then remove the Developer Unit Position Sensor (9).
Replace the Developer Unit Position Sensor (9).
5-14 K115sm5e2.doc
5.2 Image Corona
5.2.1 Replacing each Periodical Replacement Part of the
Image Corona (Corona Wire 1 Assembly, Grid Plate
& Wire Cleaning Units)
NOTE
Image Corona has the following Periodical Replacement parts.
Corona Wire 1 Assembly (2 pieces) 100,000m

Grid Plate (1 piece) 100,000m
Wire Cleaning Unit (2 pieces) 100,000m
This section instructs you to replace all of these parts as one sequent work.
1) Remove the Image Corona (1) from the Process Unit making reference to [5.1.2 Removing Image
Corona, Drum Assembly, Toner Hopper & Developer Unit] on the page 5-6.
1 1
5-15 K115sm5e2.doc
2) Pick the lever of each Wire Cleaning Unit (2) to release, move the unit as the arrow mark and
remove from the Image Corona.
Replace the Wire Cleaning Units (2) with the new ones.
NOTE
After installing the new Wire Cleaning Unit, confirm
the Corona Wire is caught between pads of Wire
Cleaning Unit, and also the Corona Wire is straight.
If the Corona Wire is out of pads or if it is bent, it will
exert a bad effect on the image quality as the height
of Corona Wire is not correct.
Pads
5-16 K115sm5e2.doc
3) Loosen 5 pieces of screws (3) to remove each Bracket 220 (4).
3
4
4) Remove 2 pieces of bind head screws (5) on the motor side to remove the Electrode Plate (6).
6
6
5) Remove the Grid Spring (7) to remove the Hook (8).
5-17 K115sm5e2.doc
6) Remove the Grid Plate (9) and replace it with the
new one
NOTE
Grid Plate has flat plate areas at both sides, and one side is wider than the other side.
This wider side must be installed on the spring side of the Image Corona.
(You do not have to care about front / back.)
Wide Narrow
7) Remove the Pan Head Screw (10) to remove the Front Housing Cover (11) on the motor side.
10 11
11
5-18 K115sm5e2.doc
8) Remove the Pan Head Screw (12) to remove the Rear Housing Cover (13).
12 13
13
9) Remove Springs (14), and then remove each Corona Wire 1 Assembly (15).
Replace the Corona Wire 1 Assemblies (20) with the new ones.
14 15 15
NOTE
When you stretch the new Corona Wire 1 Assembly, make sure to fit its anti-vibration bead
(16) into the necessary space in the Corona Heads, and also make sure to fit the wire into the
grooves (17).
17
17
16
5-19 K115sm5e2.doc
5.2.2 Replacing Wire Cleaning Motor (M9)
1) Remove the Image Corona (1) from the Process Unit making reference to [5.1.2 Removing Image
Corona, Drum Assembly, Toner Hopper & Developer Unit] on the page 5-6.
1 1
2) Expanding the Hooks (2) outward, remove the Motor Cover (3).
3 3
3) Remove the Wire Cleaning Motor (4).

4
NOTE
Please direct the label face outward when you put back the Wire Cleaning Motor.
5-20 K115sm5e2.doc
5.3 Drum Assembly
Drum Assembly
(Photo Conductive Drum & 178T Gear)
NOTE
Drum Assembly has the following Periodical Replacement parts.
Photo Conductive Drum (1 piece) 200,000m

178T Gear (1 piece) 500,000m
1) Remove the Drum Assembly (1) from the Process Unit making reference to [5.1.2 Removing
Image Corona, Drum Assembly, Toner Hopper & Developer Unit] on the page 5-6.
Stand the removed Drum Assembly on the attached Drum Stand (2) with its gear side down.
2) Remove 3 pieces of hexagon head bolt (3) to remove the Flange B (4).
4
3
5-21 K115sm5e2.doc
3) Turn over the Drum Assembly to make the gear side up.
4) Pull out the Stay Assembly (5) from the Photo Conductive Drum (6).
Replace the Photo Conductive Drum (6) with the new one.
6
5
5) Remove 3 pieces of each hexagon head cap screw (7) and spring washer (8) to remove the
178T Gear (9).
Replace the 178T Gear with the new one.
9
7
9
7
5-22 K115sm5e2.doc
5.4 Toner Hopper
5.4.1 Replacing Hopper Toner Sensor (TLS1)
1) Remove the Toner Hopper (1) from the Process Unit making reference to [5.1.2 Removing
2) Remove 2 pieces of bind head screw (2) to remove the Hopper Toner Sensor (3).
Replace the Hopper Toner Sensor (3) with the new one.
2
3
5-23 K115sm5e2.doc
5.5 Developer Unit
Developer Unit
NOTE
(1) The following Periodical Replacement Parts are included in the Developer Unit.
Developer Roller 1 piece

Bracket 581 1
Counter Roller 2
Side Seal 4
Side Seal 12 3
Seal 13 2
Seal 14 2
Seal 19 2
Seal 555 2
Seal 18 1
Seal 17 1
Seal 15 1
Seal 16 1
(2) Remove all the toner from the Developer Unit before replacing the above parts.
1) Remove the Developer Unit (1) from the Process Unit seeing [5.1.2 Removing Image Corona,
Drum Assembly, Toner Hopper & Developer Unit] on the page 5-6.
1 1
5-24 K115sm5e3.doc
2) Remove 4 M4x8 tooth washer screws (2) to remove the Stay 1 (3).
2 2
NOTE
When installing the Stay 1 (3), tighten the screws (2) with pressing Stay 1 in the direction of
arrow to contact the cleaning blade surely to the Regulation Roller.
5-25 K115sm5e3.doc
3) Remove 7 M4x6 tooth washer screws (4) to remove the Bracket 581 (5) and the Holder Spring (6).
Replace the Bracket 581 (7) with the new one.
4 4
Rubber plate
5
NOTE
(1) The rubber plate of the Bracket 581 (5) touches the Regulation Roller and scrapes off the
toner.
Please provide a little toner onto the edge of rubber plate when you install the new
Bracket 581 (5), as it can reduce the friction between rubber plate and Regulation Roller.
If you do not, the rubber plate may be turned over by the friction and may be broken.
(2) Screw holes of the Bracket 581 (5) are oval.

Please tighten the screws (4) at the center of each oval hole.
If not tightened at the center (Bracket 581 is shifted to either side), the rubber plate may be
bent because it touches the Developer Side Plate, which results in a poor cleaning.
(3) Before putting back the Developer Unit to the Process Unit, please confirm that the rubber
plate of Bracket 581 (5) surely scrapes off the toner from the Regulation Roller.
Also, please confirm the rubber plate is not turned over by the friction even if you rotate the
Regulation Roller.
5-26 K115sm5e3.doc
4) Remove 7 M4x6 tooth washer screws (7) to remove the Guide Plate 1 (8).
5-27 K115sm5e3.doc
5) Remove 3 M4x6 bind screws (9) to remove the Terminal Cover (10).
10
6) Remove 2 M4x10 bind screws (11), Insulation Collars (12), Insulation Collars 3 (13), and
Bracket 500 (14).
12
14
13
11 11
7) Remove 3 M3x12 bind screws (15), Bias Terminal 4 (16), Bias Terminal 3 (17), 3 Collars (18) and
3 Collars (19)
17
19
16
18
15
NOTE
Install the Collars (18) and (19) as the right.
19
17
16
18
5-28 K115sm5e3.doc
8) Remove the C Ring (20), 56T Gear (21), Parallel Pin (22) and Counter Roller (23).
Replace the Counter Roller (23) with the new one.
20
23
22
21
NOTE
When reassemble, install Counter Roller in proper direction. The face with 6 bosses should be
installed inside of Developer Unit.
Bosses Bosses
9) Remove the Stud (24), M4x10 screw (25), M4x12 screw (26) to remove the Guide Bracket (27).
24
27
25
26
5-29 K115sm5e3.doc
10) Remove the Thrust Washer (28), C Ring (29), 22T Gear (30) and Sliding Key (31).
29
30
31
30
29
28
28
11) Remove the C Ring (32), 33T Gear (33), Parallel Pin (34) and Collar (35).
32
35
34
33
12) Remove the Thrust Washer (36), 2 Ball Bearings (37) and Double Gear 39-33 (38).
38
37
38
36
5-30 K115sm5e3.doc
13) Remove the C Ring (39) and Counter Roller (40).
Replace the Counter Roller (40) with the new one.
39
40
NOTE
Bosses Bosses
14) Remove 2 M4x6 tooth washer screws (41) and Plate (42).
41 42
5-31 K115sm5e3.doc
15) Remove the Thrust Washer (43), Double Gear 34-18 (44) and 2 Ball Bearings (45) & (46).
43
46
44
44 45
43
16) Remove M5x12 Hexagon Bolt (47), 29T Gear (48) and Thrust Washers (49).
43
49
48
48
17) Remove the E Ring (50), 30T Gear (51) and Parallel Pin (52).
50
52
51
51
18) Remove the Spring 2 (53), M4x8 tooth washer screws (54), M3x5 bind screw (55), Stud (56) and
2 M4x6 tooth washer screws (57).
55
56
54 53 57
5-32 K115sm5e3.doc
19) Remove both Blade Arm B (58) and Bracket 9 (59) together.
58
59
58
59
20) Replace the Seal 555 (60) with the new one, which is
on the Bracket 9 (59).
60
21) Remove the Stud (61) to make the Bias Terminal Lead (62) free.
62
62
61
22) Remove 3 M4x6 bind screws (63) and Bracket 8 (64) together with its inside bearing.
63
64
63
5-33 K115sm5e3.doc
23) Replace the Seal 555 (65) with the new one, which is
on the Bracket 6 (64).
65
24) Remove the Spring 1 (66), C Ring (67) and Thrust Washer (68).
67
66
68 66
67
25) Remove the M4x16 bind screw (69), M4x6 bind screw (70) and Plate 2 (71).
70
69
71
71
26) Remove the M3x5 bind screw (72), M4x6 bind screw (73), Collar 4 (74) and Blade Arm A (75).
72
73
75
75
74
5-34 K115sm5e3.doc
27) Holding the shafts on both sides, move each Developer Roller (76) and Regulation Roller (77)
along the guides, and remove them from the unit. Replace the Developer Roller (76) with the new
one.
77
76
77
76
NOTE
(1) When installing the Developer Roller (76) and Regulation Roller back to the developer unit,
place their longer shaft to the driving side (left side) of unit.
(See next page as some more notes are described.)
5-35 K115sm5e3.doc
NOTE
If the Development Roller or Regulation Roller is installed incorrectly, the Seal 13 and Seal 14
on the Developer Side Plate may be deformed abnormally, which will cause spilling out of the
toner from the unit. To avoid spilling out of toner, place each roller to its own installation
position then bring it up and down once to get rid of the deform of seals.
Seal 13
Seal 14
Wrong installation (Seals are deformed.) Good installation
5-36 K115sm5e3.doc
28) Strip off each seal from the inside of Developer Left Side Plate, clean the surface, and paste new
seals. See NOTE on page 5-39 as there are some points you need to take care.
Seal 16 (78) Seal 19 (79)

Seal 17 (80) Seal 13 (81)
Seal 14 (82) Side Seal (83)
78 79 80
83
81
82
78 79 80
83
81
82
5-37 K115sm5e3.doc
29) Strip off each seal from the inside of Developer Right Side Plate, clean the surface, and paste new
seals. See NOTE on page 5-39 as there are some points you need to take care.
Seal 15 (84) Seal 19 (85)

Seal 18 (86) Seal 13 (87)
Seal 14 (88) Side Seal (89)
86 85 84
89
87
88
86 85 84
89
87
88
5-38 K115sm5e3.doc
NOTE
(1) There is a projection beside the installation position of Regulation Roller. Align the edge of
this projection with the ends of Seal 13 and Seal 14. It is no problem even if another ends
of Seal 13 ad Seal 14 are not aligned with each other.
Align here.
Projection
Not necessary to align here.
(2) When pasting the Seal 13, put it on the Seal 14 without stripping off the protection paper,
place it at its correct position, strip off the protection paper to reveal the sticky face, and
firmly paste it onto the Seal 14. (There is very small space between “triangle” and Seal 14.
If you strip off the protection paper first then try to set the Seal 13, it will be very difficult to
place the Seal 13 correctly as the “triangle” forces the sticky side of Seal 13 to contact on
the Seal 14.)
Place the Seal 13 at the correct position

first. After that strip off the protection paper.
Triangle
Seal 13
Seal 14
5-39 K115sm5e3.doc
NOTE
(3) Paste the Seal 13 and Seal 14 first, and paste the Seal 19 with taking care not to have any
space between Seal 13 and Seal 19.
Have no space
Seal 19
Seal 13
Have no space
Seal 14
(4) Do not paste the new Side Seals (83 & 89) at this point of time. It will be better to paste
them after reassembling the Developer Unit completely.
89 83
(5) When pasting the Side Seals (83 & 89), align their short edges with each inside faces of
the roller guide.
83 & 89
Align here
83 & 89
5-40 K115sm5e3.doc
30) Remove the Ball Bearing (90) and 2 pieces of Side Seal 12 (91) on the left.
Replace the Side Seals 12 (91) with the new ones.
91
90
90
NOTE
(1) 2 pieces of Side Seal 12 are used on the left of unit.
(2) Push in the 1st one to the deepest position using something like a stick.
(3) Then fit the 2nd one.
(4) After fitting the 2nd one, move the roller shaft
up and down several times. The Side Seals 12
are automatically placed into their correct
installation positions.
5-41 K115sm5e3.doc
31) Remove the C Ring (92), Ball Bearing (93) and 1 piece of Side Seal 12 (94) on the right.
Replace the Side Seal 12 (94) with the new ones.
92
94
93
NOTE
(1) 1 piece of Side Seal 12 is used on the right of unit.
(2) After fitting the Side Seal 12, move the roller
shaft up and down several times. The Side
Seal 12 is automatically placed into its correct
installation positions.
5-42 K115sm5e3.doc
5.5.2 Replacing Toner Sensor (Illuminator)
1) Remove the Developer Unit (1) from the Process Unit making reference to [5.1.2 Removing
1 1
2) Remove 3 M4x6 bind screws (2) to remove the Terminal Cover (3).
3) Remove 2 M4x10 bind screws (4), Insulation Collars (5), Insulation Collars 3 (6), and
Bracket 500 (7).
7
6
4 4
5-43 K115sm5e3.doc
4) Remove 3 M3x12 bind screws (8), Bias Terminal 4 (9), Bias Terminal 3 (10), 3 Collars (11) and
3 Collars (12)
10
12
11
8
NOTE
Install the Collars (18) and (19) as the right.
12
10
9
11
5) Remove the C Ring (13), 56T Gear (14), Parallel Pin (15) and Counter Roller (16).
13
16
15
14
NOTE
Bosses Bosses
5-44 K115sm5e3.doc
6) Remove the Stud (17), M4x10 screw (18), M4x12 screw (19) to remove the Guide Bracket (20).
17
20
18
19
7) Remove 2 M3x5 bind screws (21) and disconnect the connector (22)
21
22
8) Remove the M3x8 flush head screw (23), and replace

the Toner Sensor (24) with the new one.
24
23
5-45 K115sm5e3.doc
5.5.3 Replacing Toner Sensor (Receiver)
1) Remove the Developer Unit (1) from the Process Unit making reference to [5.1.2 Removing
1 1
2) Remove 2 M3x5 bind screws (2) to remove the Sensor Bracket (3).
3) Remove the M3x8 flush head screw (4), and replace the Toner Sensor (5) with the new one.
5-46 K115sm5e3.doc
5.6 Cutter Unit
5.6.1 Removing Cutter Unit
1) Open the Right Side Door.
2) Remove the Bolt (2) which fixes the Cutter Unit from the bottom, and also remove Washer (3),
Collar (4) and Spring (5).
5-47 K115sm5e4.doc
3) Disconnect the connector (6) of the Solenoid.
4) Catching the Cutter Handle (7), bring up the Cutter Unit (8) a little and pull it out from the machine.
5-48 K115sm5e4.doc
5.6.2 Replacing Cutter Oil Supply Solenoid (SL2)
1) Remove the Cutter Unit (1) from the machine making reference to [5.6.1 Removing Cutter Unit]
on the page 5-47.
2) Remove 2 pieces of bind head screw (2), release the wire from the Mini Clamp (3), and remove
the Stopper (4).
NOTE
When you put back the Stopper (4), tighten the
screws (2) pressing the Stopper (4) toward the arrow
mark.
5-49 K115sm5e4.doc
3) Remove 2 pieces of tooth washer screw (5) to remove the Solenoid Mount Plate (6).
4) Remove 2 pieces of bind head screw (7) to remove the Cutter Oil Supply Solenoid (8).
Replace the Cutter Oil Supply Solenoid (8) with the new one.
NOTE
Fit the boss (9) of the Cutter Oil Supply Solenoid to the hole (10) of the Solenoid Mount Plate.
10 9
Fit the boss to the hole.
5-50 K115sm5e4.doc
5.6.3 Lubrication / Replacement of Stay Assembly
NOTE
Lubricate the Stay Assembly every 6 months.
Use the sewing machine oil for lubrication.
on the page 5-47.
2) Remove 2 pieces of bind head screw (2) to remove the Lower Paper Guide Plate (3).
2 3 3 2
5-51 K115sm5e4.doc
3) Remove 1 piece of E Ring (E3) (4) on the handle side.
Remove E Ring (E5) (5) and Oilless Metals (6) at both sides to remove the Supporting Shaft 1 (7).
As you will find the Stay Assembly, lubricate it at this time.
If you will replace the Stay Assembly, go to the next step.
5 5
6
7
6
7 5
5 4
4) Remove E Ring (E5) (8) and Oilless Metals (9) at both sides, remove the Spring (10) on the
handle side, and then remove the Stay Assembly (11).
Replace the Stay Assembly (11) with the new one.
NOTE
Do not remove the Side Plates of Cutter Unit when you remove the Stay Assembly.
If you remove Side Plates, it is necessary to re-adjust the home position of Cutter Blade.
5-52 K115sm5e4.doc
5.6.4 Adjusting Home Position of Cutter Blade
NOTE
If you have “Cutter Jam” frequently, please check whether the home position of Cutter Blade is
properly adjusted or not.
And if necessary, please adjust in the following way.
You need the following exclusive tools to check and adjust.
HP Adjustment Assembly (3508560021)

HP Adjustment tool 2 (3108500020)
on the page 5-47.
2) Remove 2 pieces of bind head screw (2) to remove

the Lower Paper Guide Plate (3). 2 2
Remove a screw (4) on the pin side to remove the
Paper Exit Guide Plate 2 (5).
5 3
5-53 K115sm5e4.doc
3) Remove the Stay Assembly (6) making reference to
[5.6.3 Lubrication / Replacement of Stay Assembly] on
the page 5-51.
4) Loosen 2 pieces of Set Screw (7) which fix the

Joint A (8).
7
5) Fit the HP Adjustment Assembly (9) firmly to 3 Pins of the Cutter Side Plate.
Insert the HP Adjustment tool 2 (10) under the Cutter Blade and place it at the nearest position to
the Cutter Side Plate.
10 9 10
5-54 K115sm5e4.doc
6) Rotate the Cutter Handle until the cutting point (11) of Cutter Blade touches the HP Adjustment
tool 2 (10).
When the cutting point (11) touches the HP Adjustment tool 2 (10), fix the Joint A (8) tightening
Set Screws (7).
The gap between cutting point and base of Cutter Unit becomes 16mm by this operation.
When you have tightened the Set Screws (7), remove only the HP Adjustment tool 2 (10).
(Leave the HP Adjustment Assembly (9) as it is.)
11
16mm
10 9 8 10
7) Loosen 2 pieces of bind head screw (12) which fix the

Cutter Handle. 12
Rotate the Cutter Handle until the green area can be
seen in the notch (13).
When the green area can be seen in the notch (13),
tighten the bind head screws (12).
13
8) Remove the HP Adjustment Assembly (9).

Then, reassemble the Cutter Unit in the reversed order.
5-55 K115sm5e4.doc
5.6.5 Adjusting angle of Cutter Unit
NOTE
If you replace the Cutter Unit with the new one, make sure to check whether or not the paper
can be cut in a right angle.
If not, please adjust in the following way.
1) Print out an A0 paper, and then fold it at the central line.
2) Measure the difference of paper length between left

and right.
It must be 2.5mm or shorter.
Should be 2.5mm
or shorter
5-56 K115sm5e4.doc
3) It is necessary to adjust the angle of Cutter Unit if the difference is longer than 2.5mm.
If you loosen 2 pieces of screw (1), you can shift the Cutter Unit left or right.
If the right side of print is longer than left side, slide the whole Cutter Unit to the right.
If the left side of print is longer than right side, slide the whole Cutter Unit to the left.
5-57 K115sm5e4.doc
5.7 Fuser
5.7.1 Removing Fuser Unit
1) Open both the Rear Upper Cover (1) and Exit
Cover (2). 1
2) Loosen 3 pieces of tooth washer screw (3).
3) Close the Rear Upper Cover (1), and then remove the Cover 7 (4).
5-58 K115sm5e5.doc
4) Remove a tooth washer screw (5) to remove each Cover 3 (6) and Cover 4 (7).
7 5 5 6
5) Disconnect 3 connectors (8).
6) Remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screw (9) to remove the Cover 2 Assembly (10).
9 10 10 9
10
5-59 K115sm5e5.doc
7) Slide both the Shaft 4 (11) inward to release from the hole, and then remove the Exit Cover
Assembly (12)
11 12 12 11
12
8) Remove tooth washer screws (13) at both sides to remove the Frame Assembly (14).
13 13
14 14
5-60 K115sm5e5.doc
9) Remove Hexagon Head Bolts (15) at both sides which fix the Fuser Unit.
Also, disconnect 4 connectors (16).
15 15
16
16
10) Remove 7 pieces of tooth washer screw (17) which fix the Fuser Unit from the bottom.
17 17
11) Remove the Fuser Unit (18) from the machine.
18
18
5-61 K115sm5e5.doc
5.7.2 Replacing IR Lamps & Fuser Roller
NOTE
Fuser Roller is the Periodical Replacement Part, and its life is 200,000m.

Cover (2). 1
5-62 K115sm5e5.doc
7 5 5 6
9 10 10 9
10
5-63 K115sm5e5.doc
Assembly (12)
12 11
11 12
12
8) Remove a tooth washer screw (13) to remove each Lamp GP (14) with Lamp Mounts (15) at both
sides to make the IR Lamps free.
Also, disconnect 4 connectors (16) of IR Lamps.
14 14
13 13
16 16
15 14 14
15
5-64 K115sm5e5.doc
9) Pull out the IR Lamps (17) gently.
Replace the IR Lamps (17) with the new ones.
17
17
NOTE
(1) There are 2 kinds of IR Lamp.
One has a black wire and another has a white
one.
Make sure to install the black one to the upper
Black
position.
White
(2) There is a projection on the mid glass part of each IR Lamp.

When the projections of both IR Lamps touch each other, IR Lamps will be broken
because of the vibration.
Make sure to direct these projections to the other directions when you install the IR Lamps.
Projections OK OK NG
5-65 K115sm5e5.doc
18 18
19 19
5-66 K115sm5e5.doc
11) Pull the Levers L/R (20) at both sides to decompress the Fuser Roller.
Then, remove Spring Hooks 3 (21), Spring Hooks 1/2 Assembly (22) and Extension Springs A (23)
at both sides.
20
20
20 21 21 20
22 23 22 23
23
22
21
NOTE
When you pressurize the Fuser Roller, confirm the Levers L/R are fitted to the inside of Pin.
Pin Pin
No good (Lever is out of the Pin.) Good (Lever is inside of the Pin.)
5-67 K115sm5e5.doc
12) Remove 2 pieces of Pan Head Screw (24) to remove 50T Spur Gear (25), 3 pieces of Spacer (26),
2 pieces of Wave Washer (27) and 2 pieces of Collar (28).
27
28
26
25
24
26
25
27
13) Remove 2 pieces of Pan Head Screw (29) to remove 50T Spur Gear (30) and Collar 1 (31).
30
29
30
31
14) Remove 4 pieces (2 pieces on each side) of tooth washer screw (32) to remove Collars (33), Ball
Bearings (34) and Isolate Bushings (35) at both sides
32 32
34
33
35
5-68 K115sm5e5.doc
15) Remove the Fuser Roller (36) pulling out to your side.
Remove both the Collar E (37) and Collar 4 (38) from one side (driving side of machine) of the
Fuser Roller.
Replace both the Fuser Roller (36) and the Collar E (37) with the new ones.
33
NOTE
(1) You do not have to be care about the direction (left or right) of the Fuser Roller when you
install the new one.
However, please install the side having Collar E and Collar 4 to the driving side of
machine.
(2) Collar E (37) is not a Periodical Replacement Part, so basically you do not have to replace
if it is not broken.
But the Collar E will be strongly fixed to the Fuser Roller after a long term of usage, so it
will be broken in many cases if you try to remove from the Fuser Roller.
Please replace with the new one if it is broken.
5-69 K115sm5e5.doc
5.7.3 Replacing Pressure Roller
NOTE
Pressure Roller is the Periodical Replacement Part, and its life is 200,000m.

Cover (2). 1
5-70 K115sm5e5.doc
7 5 5 6
9 10 10 9
10
5-71 K115sm5e5.doc
Assembly (12)
12 11
11 12
12
13 13
14 14
5-72 K115sm5e5.doc
9) Pull the Levers L/R (15) at both sides to decompress the Fuser Roller.
15 15
NOTE
When you pressurize the Fuser Roller, confirm the Levers L/R are fitted to the inside of Pin.
Pin Pin
No good (Lever is out of the Pin.) Good (Lever is inside of the Pin.)
5-73 K115sm5e5.doc
10) Remove the Pressure Roller (16) pulling out to your side.
Remove C rings (17), Ball Bearings (18) and Isolate Bushing (19) from both sides of the Pressure
Roller.
Replace the Pressure Roller (16) with the new one.
16
16
17
19
18
NOTE
(1) You do not have to be care about the direction (left or right) of the Pressure Roller when
you install the new one.
(2) You can adjust the fusing pressure by adjusting the gap between Spring Hook 1 (20) and
Spring Hook 2 (21).
It is 2.5mm in usual case.
The width of “Nip” is 8 to 9mm at the center and 10 to 11mm at both sides (10mm from
side edges of A0 or 36” paper).
10mm 10mm
2.5mm
20
21 10 to 11mm 8 to 9mm 10 to 11mm
5-74 K115sm5e5.doc
5.7.4 Replacing Exhaust Blowers (BL2 & BL3)
Cover (2). 1
5-75 K115sm5e6.doc
7 5 5 6
9 10 10 9
10
5-76 K115sm5e6.doc
7) Open the Licking Wire Saddle (11) to release the wire, and then remove 3 pieces of tooth washer
screws (12) to remove each Exhaust Blower (13).
Replace the Exhaust Blower (13) with the new one.
12
12
11
13
5-77 K115sm5e6.doc
5.7.5 Replacing Thermistor
1) Remove the Fuser Unit from the machine making reference to [5.7.1 Removing Fuser Unit] on the
page 5-58.
2) Loosen 4 tooth washer screws (2), and then remove the Cover 5 (3).
3 3
5-78 K115sm5e6.doc
3) Remove 5 pieces of bind head screws to remove Nylon Clamps (4) which fix the wire of
Thermistor.
Pull out the connector (5) from the installation hole of plate, and then pull out the wire (6) from the
hole (7).
4
7
4 5
4) Remove the tooth washer screw (8) to remove the Fitting Plate 1 (9) with the Thermistor.
5-79 K115sm5e6.doc
5) Remove the tooth washer screw (10) to remove the Thermistor (11).
Replace the Thermistor (11) with the new one.
5-80 K115sm5e6.doc
5.7.6 Replacing Thermostat
Cover (2). 1
5-81 K115sm5e6.doc
7 5 5 6
9 10 10 9
10
5-82 K115sm5e6.doc
7) Remove the tooth washer screw (11), and then pull out the Fitting Plate 2 (12).
12
11
8) Remove 2 pieces of tooth washer screws (13) to remove the Thermostat (14).
Replace the Thermostat (14) with the new one.
14
13
5-83 K115sm5e6.doc
5.7.7 Replacing Stripper Finger Assemblies
Cover (2). 1
5-84 K115sm5e6.doc
7 5 5 6
Assembly (9)
8 9 9 8
6) Remove the screw (10) to remove each Stripper Finger Assembly (11).
Replace the Stripper Finger Assembly (11) with the new one.
11
10 11
5-85 K115sm5e6.doc
5.7.8 Replacing Separation Fingers
Cover (2). 1
5-86 K115sm5e6.doc
7 5 5 6
Assembly (9)
8 9 9 8
5-87 K115sm5e6.doc
10 10
11 11
5-88 K115sm5e6.doc
7) Remove 8 pieces of tooth washer screws (12) to remove the Frame (13).
12
12
13
9) Remove the Extension Spring (14) to remove each Separation Finger (15).
Replace the Separation Finger (15) with the new one.
14
15
5-89 K115sm5e6.doc
5.7.9 Replacing Exit Sensor (LS2)
Cover (2). 1
5-90 K115sm5e6.doc
4) Remove a tooth washer screw (5) to remove the
Cover 3 (6).
5 6
5) Remove 2 pieces of screw (7), disconnect the connector (8) and remove the Exit Sensor (9).
Replace the Exit Sensor with the new one.
5-91 K115sm5e6.doc
5.7.10 Replacing Pressure Blowers (BL4 to BL7)
1) Open the Rear Upper Cover (1). 1
2) Remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screws (2) to remove the Cover 2 Assembly (3).
3
2
5-92 K115sm5e6.doc
3) Remove 9 pieces of tooth washer screws (4) to remove the Cover 2 (5).
4) Disconnect each connector (6).
5-93 K115sm5e6.doc
5) Remove 4 pieces of screw (7) to remove each Pressure Blower (8).
Replace the Pressure Blower with the new one.
5-94 K115sm5e6.doc
5.8 Roll Decks
5.8.1 Removing each Roll Deck
NOTE
You can remove all Roll Decks in the same way.
1) Draw out the necessary Roll Deck (1).
2) Remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screws (2) which fix the Roll Deck to the Rails.
2 2
3) Remove the Roll Deck (3).
5-95 K115sm5e7.doc
5.8.2 Replacing Bypass Feed Clutch (MC7) &
Roll Deck 1 Feed Clutch (MC8) (1st Roll Deck)
1) Draw out the Top Roll Deck (1).
2) Disconnect each connector (2).
3) Expanding the stopper lever (3) outward, pull out each Roll Deck 1 Feed Clutch (4) and
Bypass Feed Clutch (5) from the shaft.
Replace each Roll Deck 1 Feed Clutch (4) and Bypass Feed Clutch (5) with the new one.
3 5
5 4
5-96 K115sm5e7.doc
5.8.3 Replacing Roll Set Sensor 1 (PH1),
Paper Size Sensors (PH5A to PH11A) &
Bypass Start Sensor (PH20) (1st deck)
1) Remove the Top Roll Deck (1) from the machine
making reference to [5.8.1 Removing each Roll Deck]
on the page 5-95.
2) Remove 2 pieces of tooth washer screw (2) to remove the Harness Cover (3).
2 3
3) Remove the bind head screw (4), disconnect the connector (5) and remove the Bypass Start
Sensor (6).
Replace the Bypass Start Sensor (6) with the new one.
4 5 6
5-97 K115sm5e7.doc
4) Loose 2 pieces of tooth washer screws (7) to remove the Cover 370 (8).
7 8
5) Remove 3 pieces of tooth washer screws (9), and then turn over the Stay 344 (10).
10
10
5-98 K115sm5e7.doc
6) Remove the bind head screw (11), disconnect the connector (12), and remove each Roll Set
Sensor 1 and Paper Size Sensors (13).
Replace each Roll Set Sensor 1 and Paper Size Sensors (13) with the new one.
12
12
11
13
5-99 K115sm5e7.doc
Paper Size Sensors (PH5B to PH11B) (2nd deck)
1) Draw out the Middle Roll Deck (1).
2) Remove 2 pieces of tooth washer screw (2) to remove the Sensor Cover (3).
5-100 K115sm5e7.doc
3) Remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screw (4).
4 4
4) Turn over the Bracket (5), and you will find the sensors.
5-101 K115sm5e7.doc
5-102 K115sm5e7.doc
Paper Size Sensors (PH5C to PH11C) (3rd deck)
1) Draw out the Bottom Roll Deck (1).
2) Remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screws (2) to remove the Lower Cover (3).
2 2
5-103 K115sm5e7.doc
5-104 K115sm5e7.doc
4) Turn over the Stay 346 (5), and you will find the sensors.
5-105 K115sm5e7.doc
5-106 K115sm5e7.doc
Paper Size Sensors (PH5D to PH11D) (4th deck)
1) Remove the Bottom Roll Deck (1) from the machine
making reference to [5.8.1 Removing each Roll Deck]
on the page 5-95.
2) Remove 2 pieces of tooth washer screw (2) to remove the Lower Harness Cover (3).
2 3
5-107 K115sm5e7.doc
3) Remove 2 pieces of tooth washer screw (4) and 2 pieces of Hexagon Head Bolt (5).
5-108 K115sm5e7.doc
4) Remove 3 pieces of tooth washer screw (6) to remove the Rear Cover (7).
5-109 K115sm5e7.doc
5) Remove 2 pieces of tooth washer screw (8), and then turn over the Stay 346 (9).
8 9 9 8
5-110 K115sm5e7.doc
Replace each Roll Set Sensor 4 and Paper Size Sensors (12) with the new one
10
11
12
5-111 K115sm5e7.doc
5.8.7 Replacing Paper Feed Clock Sensors
(PH13 to PH16)
(Common for all decks)
NOTE
You can remove the Paper Feed Clock Sensor in each Roll Deck in almost same way.
This section shows you how to remove the Paper Feed Clock Sensor 1 in the Top Roll Deck
as an example.
1) Draw out the Top Roll Deck 1 (1).
2) Remove 2 pieces of tooth washer screw (2) to remove the Heater Cover (3).
2 2
5-112 K115sm5e7.doc
3) Remove 2 pieces of tooth washer screw (4) to remove the Cover 1 (5).
6) Remove 3 pieces of tooth washer screw (6) to remove the Upper Sensor Mount (7).
5-113 K115sm5e7.doc
7) Disconnect the connector (8), and then press the stopper hooks (9) inward to remove the
Paper Feed Clock Sensor 1 (10) from the Mount.
Replace the Paper Feed Clock Sensor 1 (10) with the new one.
9
8 10
5-114 K115sm5e7.doc
5.8.8 Replacing 501-3M Belt (Common for all decks)
NOTE
You can remove the 501-3M Belt in each Roll Deck in almost same way.
This section shows you how to remove the 501-3M Belt in the Top Roll Deck as an example.
2) Remove 2 pieces of tooth washer screw (2) to remove the Gear Cover 384 (3).
5-115 K115sm5e7.doc
3) Remove 2 pieces of tooth washer screw (4) to remove the Pulley (5) with its plate.
Then, remove the 501-3M Belt (6).
Replace the 501-3M Belt (6) with the new one.
6 5
NOTE
Tighten the tooth washer screws (4) pressing down
the Pulley (5) to give a tension to the 501-3M Belt (6).
5-116 K115sm5e7.doc
5.8.9 Replacing Dehumidify Heaters (1st & 2nd decks)
NOTE
You can remove both the Dehumidify Heaters (H8 : Roll 1 & H7 : Roll 2) in the same way.
This section shows you how to remove the Dehumidify Heater (H8) for the Top Roll Deck as
an example.
2) Remove 2 pieces of tooth washer screw (2) to remove the Heater Cover (3).
2 2
5-117 K115sm5e7.doc
3) Disconnect the connector (4), remove 2 pieces of screw (5), and then remove the
Dehumidify Heater (6).
Replace the Dehumidify Heater (6) with the new one.
5 4
5-118 K115sm5e7.doc
5.8.10 Replacing Dehumidify Heaters (3rd & 4th decks)
1) Remove both the Middle Roll Deck and the Bottom Roll
Deck making reference to [5.8.1 Removing each Roll
Deck] on the page 5-95.
2) Remove 2 pieces of tooth washer screw (1) to remove each Cover 341 (2).
1 2 1
5-119 K115sm5e7.doc
3) Disconnect the connector (3), remove 2 pieces of screw (4), and then remove each
Dehumidify Heater (5).
Replace the Dehumidify Heater (5) with the new one.
3
4
4
5-120 K115sm5e7.doc
5.8.11 Replacing Spool Brake
1) Remove the Roll Spool (1) from each Roll Deck.
1
2) Remove E Ring (2), Gear 454 (3), Thrust Washer (4) and Oil-less Bearing (5).
3
2
5
2 4
3) Remove E Ring (6) and Spool Brake (7).

Replace the Spool Brake (7) with the new one.
7
6
6
5-121 K115sm5e7.doc
5.9 Bypass Feeder
5.9.1 Removing Bypass Feeder Unit
1) Draw out the Bypass Feeder Unit (1).
2) Remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screw (2) which fix the Bypass Feeder Unit from the bottom.
2 2
3) Slide the Bypass Feeder (1) along the Rails and remove it.
5-122 K115sm5e8.doc
5.9.2 Replacing Bypass Reversal Roller Down Solenoid
(SL4)
1) Remove the Bypass Feeder Unit (1) from the machine making reference to [5.9.1 Removing
Bypass Feeder Unit] on the page 5-122.
2) Loosen 5 pieces of tooth washer screws (2), and then slide and remove the Cover 2 (3).
5-123 K115sm5e8.doc
3) Disconnect the connector (4).
4) Remove 2 pieces of screw (5) to remove the Bypass Reversal Roller Down Solenoid (6).
Replace the Bypass Reversal Roller Down Solenoid (6) with the new one.
NOTE
Tighten the screws (5) at the center of oval holes.
5-124 K115sm5e8.doc
5.9.3 Replacing Cut Sheet Set Sensor (PH31) &
Cut Sheet Size Sensors (PH32 to PH37)
1) Remove the Bypass Feeder Unit (1) from the machine making reference to [5.9.1 Removing
Bypass Feeder Unit] on the page 5-122.
2) Loosen 5 pieces of tooth washer screws (2), and then slide and remove the Cover 2 (3).
5-125 K115sm5e8.doc
3) Remove the screw (4) to remove the Bracket 239 (5), and also remove 2 pieces of screw (6) to
remove the Bracket 232 (7).
3 4
5-126 K115sm5e8.doc
4) Remove the screw (8) and disconnect the connector (9) to remove each Cut Sheet Set Sensor
and Cut Sheet Size Sensors (10).
Replace each Cut Sheet Set Sensor and Cut Sheet Size Sensors (10) with the new one.
8 10 9
10
10
5-127 K115sm5e8.doc
5.9.4 Replacing Bypass Feeding Roller Down Solenoid
(SL3)
1) Open both the Top Roll Deck (1) and the Bypass Feeder Unit (2).
(They are removed in the later procedure.)
2) Loosen the tooth washer screw (3) on the bottom, and remove 3 pieces of tooth washer screw (4)
to remove the Cover (5).
5 3
5-128 K115sm5e8.doc
3) Remove the Tension Spring (6).
As the Spring (7) easily drops off, remove it for the safety.
5-129 K115sm5e8.doc
4) Disconnect the connector (8), remove 2 pieces of screw (9), and remove the Bracket 557 (10) with
the solenoid.
9 9 8
10
5-130 K115sm5e8.doc
5) Remove the E Ring (E5) (11) and 2 pieces of screw (12) to remove the Bypass Feeding Roller
Down Solenoid (13) from the Bracket.
Replace the Bypass Feeding Roller Down Solenoid (13) with the new one.
11
12
13
5-131 K115sm5e8.doc
5.10 Internal Transportation Unit
5.10.1 Replacing Belt 2
1) Draw out the Process Unit making reference to
[5.1.1 Drawing out the Process Unit] on the page 5-3.
Remove the Drum Assembly and keep it in the box to
avoid the light.
2) Remove the Fuser Unit from the machine making

reference to [5.7.1 Removing Fuser Unit] on the
page 5-58.
3) Open the Rear Upper Cover (1), and disconnect the connector (2).
1 1 2
5-132 K115sm5e9.doc
3 4
3
6 7
5-133 K115sm5e9.doc
6) Remove 6 pieces of tooth washer screw (8) which fix the Belt Unit.
7) Slide the Belt Unit (9) from the driving side to the driven side to pull out both the roller shaft (10)
and Duct (11), and then remove the Belt Unit (9) from the machine.
11
9 10
5-134 K115sm5e9.doc
8) Remove 2 pieces of each E Ring (E10) (12) and Ball Bearing (13), and then remove 2 pieces of
tooth washer screw (14) to remove the Bracket 1 (15).
13
12
12
14 13 15
14
9) Remove 2 pieces of each E Ring (E7) (16), Washer (17) and Ball Bearing (18), and then remove
4 pieces of tooth washer screw (19) to remove the Bracket 2 (20).
16 17 18
17
18
19 20
10) Slide each Belt 2 (21) outward to remove from the unit.
Replace the Belt 2 (21) with the new one. 21
5-135 K115sm5e9.doc
5.10.2 Replacing Separation Sensor (PH18)
1) Draw out the Process Unit making reference to
[5.1.1 Drawing out the Process Unit] on the page 5-3.
avoid the light.
2) Remove the Fuser Unit from the machine making

reference to [5.7.1 Removing Fuser Unit] on the
page 5-58.
3) Open the Rear Upper Cover (1), and disconnect the connector (2).
1 1 2
5-136 K115sm5e9.doc
3 4
3
6 7
5-137 K115sm5e9.doc
6) Disconnect the connector (8), and then remove the wire from Wire Saddle (9) and Edge
Saddle (10).
9 8
10
7) Loosen the screw (11), and the remove the Bracket 228 (12) with the sensor.
11
12
5-138 K115sm5e9.doc
8) Pressing the Stopper Hooks (13) inward, remove the Separation Sensor (14) from the bracket.
Replace the Separation Sensor (14) with the new one.
14
13
13
5-139 K115sm5e9.doc
5.10.3 Removing Internal Transportation Unit
1) Remove the Drum Assembly (1) from the Process Unit
making reference to [5.1.2 Removing Image Corona, 1
Drum Assembly, Toner Hopper & Developer Unit] on
the page 5-6.
2) Remove the Transfer / Separation Corona (1) from the machine making reference to
[5.11.1 Removing Transfer / Separation Corona] on the page 5-151.
3) Remove 2 pieces of tooth washer screw (3), and then remove the Left Side Cover (4).
3 3
5-140 K115sm5eA.doc
4) Remove the Duct (5) removing 8 pieces of tooth
washer screw.
5-141 K115sm5eA.doc
7) Remove 2 pieces of tooth washer screw (8), and then remove
the Cover (9).

11
Remove 3 pieces of tooth screws (11) to remove the Gear
Assembly (12).
11
12
10
9) Open the Top Rear Cover (13), and then loosen 3 pieces of tooth washer screw (14).
14
13
5-142 K115sm5eA.doc
10) Close the Top Rear, and then remove the Fuser 15
Cover (15).
11) Remove a tooth washer screw (16) from each Cover, and then remove Cover 3 (17) and
Cover 4 (18).
17 18
16
16
19
19
5-143 K115sm5eA.doc
13) Remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screw (20), open the Exit Cover (21), and then remove the
Cooling Fan Unit (22).
20
20
22
21 22
14) Remove 5 pieces of tooth washer screw (23) which fix the Fuser Unit from the bottom.
23 23
23
5-144 K115sm5eA.doc
15) Remove Hexagon Head Bolts (24) at both sides which fix the Fuser Unit.
Also, disconnect 4 connectors (25).
24 24
25
25
16) Remove the Fuser Unit (26) from the machine.
26
17) Remove 2 pieces of bind head screw (27) and 7 pieces of tooth washer screw (28) to remove the
Rear Cover (29).
(Fixing Brackets inside the Rear Cover will be removed also.)
28
29 27
5-145 K115sm5eA.doc
18) Loosen 4 pieces of tooth washer screw inserting a screwdriver from the holes (30), and remove
each Base 2 (31) and Base 3 (32).
30 30
32 31
30 30
19) Remove Transmission PCB (33) and Reception PCB (34).

(Put them aside as the following right photo, otherwise you will break them when you remove the
Inner Transport Assembly.)
34 33
20) Disconnect 4 connectors (35) on the Left Side Plate.

Then, pull the harnesses from the windows (36) into the machine.
36 36
35
5-146 K115sm5eA.doc
21) Remove Retaining Ring K and Flat Washers (37) at both sides.
37 37
22) Prepare the Gas Spring Jigs (38).
Gas Spring Jigs : 7708560070
38 38
23) Fit the notch (39) of each Gas Spring Jig to the shaft of Inner Transport Lock Lever.
39
5-147 K115sm5eA.doc
24) Bring down the Inner Transport Assembly to shorten the Gas Spring Hinges (40), and then bring
up the Gas Spring Jigs (38) to cover the Gas Spring Hinges.
40
38
NOTE
Gas Spring Hinges will not extend more than required because the Gas Spring Jigs restrict
their extension, so it will be easy to set the hinges when you reassemble.
If you do not use the jigs, hinges will extend fully and it will be very hard to set them again.
25) Pull out each Gas Spring Hinge from the shaft while bringing up the Inner Transport Assembly a
little.
NOTE
Be careful not to make the Gas Spring Hinge come
out from the stopper plate (41) of Gas Spring Jig.
It will be very dangerous because the Gas Spring
Hinge extends momentarily.
41
5-148 K115sm5eA.doc
26) Remove the Retaining Ring E and Ball Bearing (42) on the Left Side Plate.
42
27) Remove the Retaining Ring E (43).
43
28) Remove Retaining Ring E (44).
44
5-149 K115sm5eA.doc
29) Shift the Shafts (45) inward until they are pulled out from the Side Plates.
45
45
30) Remove the Inner Transport Assembly (46) from the

machine.
46
5-150 K115sm5eA.doc
5.11 Transfer / Separation Corona
5.11.1 Removing Transfer / Separation Corona
4
3
5-151 K115sm5eB.doc
3) Rotate the Knob (5) counter-clockwise to unlock, and then pull out the Transfer / Separation
Corona (6) from the machine.
5-152 K115sm5eB.doc
5.11.2 Replacing Corona Wire 2 Assemblies
NOTE
Corona Wire 2 Assembly is the Periodical Replacement Part, and its life is 100,000m.
2) If you press down the Stopper Hooks (2), you can remove each Corona Guards A/B (3).
Remove all Corona Guards A/B (3) from the housing.
5-153 K115sm5eB.doc
3) Remove 2 pieces of screw (4) at both sides, and remove the Corona Housing 5 (5) and several
sheets of Spacers 1 (6) from both sides.
4 5 5 4
6 6
NOTE
As the Spacers 1 (6) adjust the height of Corona Housing 5 (5), the number of them used is
different among unit.
Do not lose or add them without any reason as the height will change.
Also, please remember how many sheets were used on each side because the number may
be different between both sides.
4) Remove the Flash Head Screw (7) to remove each Head Cover 3 (8) and Head Cover 4 (9).
9 8
7 7
5-154 K115sm5eB.doc
5) Removing the Extension Springs (10) on each Corona Block, remove each Corona Wire 2
Assembly (11).
Replace the Corona Wire 2 Assembly (11) with the new one.
11 11
10 10
NOTE
When you stretch the new Corona Wire 2 Assembly, make sure to fit its anti-vibration bead
(12) into the necessary space in the Corona Heads, and also make sure to fit the wire into the
grooves (13) of the Height Adjuster.
12
12
13
13
6) Put back both Cover 3 (8) and Cover 4 (9).
9 8
5-155 K115sm5eB.doc
7) Put back both Spacers 1 (6) and Corona Housing 5 (5).
6 5 5 6
NOTE
It is necessary to put back both Spacers 1 (6) and Corona Housing 5 (5) before adjusting the
height of Transfer Corona Wire.
5-156 K115sm5eB.doc
8) Measure the height of each Corona Wire 2 Assembly,
and compare with the values written in the
15.0mm
label which is pasted inside the Right Side Door. 14.0mm
(The values in the right figure are simply the standards.) (10.2mm)
9) If the height is not proper, adjust it rotating the screws (14) on the back of the Corona.
14 14
5-157 K115sm5eB.doc
5.11.3 Replacing Mylar
2) Strip off the Mylar (2) from the Corona Housing 5.

Replace the new Mylar (2) with the new one
NOTE
Align the edges of Mylar with the front face and side faces of TR Guides B (3).
Align the short edge with this side face. Align the long edge with these front faces.
5-158 K115sm5eB.doc
5.11.4 Adjustment of gap between Drum &
Corona Housing 5
NOTE
In case you have replaced the Transfer / Separation Corona Unit with the new one, make sure
to check the gap between Drum and Corona Housing 5 using an exclusive Jig.
And adjust the gap properly if necessary.
The proper gap between Drum and Corona Housing 5 is 0.4mm to 1.0mm.
0.4mm to 1.0mm
To measure the gap, use the exclusive Jig shown in

the right photo.
Drum Gauge for Transfer Corona (7708560021)

5-159 K115sm5eB.doc
3 2
4 5
NOTE
If you take checking or adjustment of gap without removing the Developer Unit, you may
damage the surface of Development Roller with the tip of Pin of the Drum Gauge
3) Open the Rear Upper Cover (6).

6
5-160 K115sm5eB.doc
4) Disconnect the connector (7), remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screw (8), and then remove the
Cover 305 Assembly (9).
9 9
8 8
5) Fit the “Drum Gauge for Transfer Corona” (10) into the Drum Shaft (11).
10
10
11
5-161 K115sm5eB.doc
6) Close the Process Unit, and then fix it with 4 pieces of screw (12).
12
12
7) Bring up the Internal Transportation Unit (13) and lock it at the operation position.
13
NOTE
Make sure to close and lock both the Process Unit and the Internal Transportation Unit before
measurement.
If these units are not locked at the correct positions, it is impossible to measure the gap
correctly.
5-162 K115sm5eB.doc
8) Swing the “Drum Gauge for Transfer Corona” forward and backward to check whether or not its
pins touch the Mylar (14) on the Corona Housing 5.
One of 2 pins marked with 0.4mm (15) should not touch the Mylar (14).
Another pin marked with 1.0mm (16) should touch the Mylar (14) slightly.
If the above conditions are satisfied, the gap is between 0.4mm and 1.0mm.
16
15
14
0.4mm pin
1.0mm pin 0.4mm pin
1.0mm pin
Diameter of Drum Diameter of Drum
Mylar Mylar
1.0mm pin should touch the Mylar slightly. 0.4mm pin should not touch the Mylar.
NOTE
Please check not at one point but entirely along the Drum Shaft.
5-163 K115sm5eB.doc
9) If the gap is out of the correct range, adjust the height of Corona Housing 5 by adding or removing
Spacer 1 (17).
If you add 1 sheet of Spacer 1, the height of Corona Housing 5 gets 0.2mm higher.
Spacer 1 (7705104090)
17 17
5-164 K115sm5eB.doc
5.12 LED Head
5.12.1 Removing LED Head
1
4 4
3 3
5-165 K115sm5eC.doc
avoid the light.
5) Remove 2 pieces of M4x10 black screws (7).

7
5-166 K115sm5eC.doc
6) Catch both sides of the LED Head, and then move the driven side of it as the arrow marks in the
photo show in order to make the Pin (8) comes out from the Slit (9) of the Side Plate.
8 9
7) Pull out the Positioning Pins on the driving side from the Positioning Slits (10), and then remove
the LED Head (11) from the machine.
10
11
NOTE
(1) The wire (12) of LED Cleaning Motor may be
broken if it is loaded.
Please put the LED Head on the table as the
right figure shows so as not to give a load to the
wire.
12
Please read the next page as some more notes are mentioned.
5-167 K115sm5eC.doc
NOTE
Make sure to close the Process Unit without 7
tightening the M4x10 screws (7).
The Positioning Bars of the LED Head are fitted into the slits of the Process Unit.
Slits Positioning Bars
These Positioning Bars are curved upward, and the LED Head is smoothly moved up when
the bars are fitted into the slits. By this, a proper gap can be kept between LED Head and
Drum.
Slit
LED Head
Proper gap
Bar
Drum
Process Unit
If you close the Process Unit when the LED Head is not movable being fixed with the M4x10
screws, the gap between LED Head and Drum is not adjusted properly. Or you may bend the
Positioning Bars in the worst case.
Gap is not
proper
Bar is bent.
Tightened
5-168 K115sm5eC.doc
NOTE
After installing the LED Head, please check the Ground Plates (13) are not deformed.
Because they easily hook somewhere on the LED Head and are deformed.
13 13
No Good (Ground Plate is bent.) Good
5-169 K115sm5eC.doc
5.12.2 Replacing Pad Assembly 2
NOTE
Pad Assembly 2 is the Periodical Replacement Part, and its life is 100,000m.
1) Remove the LED Head (1) from the machine making reference to [5.12.1 Removing LED Head]
on the page 5-165.
2) Loosen the screw (2) and remove the Pad Assembly 2 (3).
Replace the Pad Assembly 2 (3) with the new one.
3
2
5-170 K115sm5eC.doc
5.12.3 Replacing LED Cleaning Motor (M8)
on the page 5-165.
2) Remove the screw (2) and remove the Bracket 222 (3) with the motor.
3 2
3) Remove 2 pieces of screw (4) to remove the LED Cleaning Motor (5).
Replace the LED Cleaning Motor (5) with the new one.
5-171 K115sm5eC.doc
5.13 Main Frame
5.13.1 Replacing Drum Motor (M1) &
Timing Belt 565-5GT-40
1) Remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screw (1) to remove the Side Cover L (2).
2
1
2) Remove 2 pieces of tooth washer screw (3) to make the Bracket 316 (4) with PCB free.
As the Bracket 316 (4) is preventative for the later works, tape it as the photo shows.
Tape the Bracket 316.
5-172 K115sm5eD.doc
3) Remove 2 pieces of Nuts (5), remove 2 pieces of Hexagon Head Bolt (6), and remove 2 pieces of
Flat Washer (7), Tension Spring (8), Shaft 207 (9) and Bracket 217 (10).
8 7
9
7
6 10
NOTE
You can adjust the tension of Timing Belt
565-5GT-40 by measuring the distance between
both Flat Washers (7).
Keep 100mm between both inside of Flat 100mm
Washers (7). (Inside to
inside)
5-173 K115sm5eD.doc
4) Remove the tooth washer screw (11) to remove the Contact Plate (12).
11
12
5) Remove the C Ring (13), and then remove 4 pieces of Hexagon Head Bolt (14) to remove both
Ball Bearing (30x55x13) (15) and Holder (16).
Remove the E Ring (E9) (17) to remove the Ball Bearing (12x28x8) (18).
14 17
13
14
13 17
15
18
16
5-174 K115sm5eD.doc
6) Open 2 pieces of Locking Wire Saddle (19) to make the harness free, and then remove 7 pieces
of tooth washer screw (20) to remove the Bracket (21).
20 19 20
20 21
5-175 K115sm5eD.doc
7) Remove the E Ring (E8) (22), and remove the Idler Assembly (23).
22
23
5-176 K115sm5eD.doc
8) Remove 2 pieces of Hexagon Head Cap Screw (24), and then remove both 72T Pulley (25) and
Timing Belt 565-5GT-40 (26).
Replace the Timing Belt 565-5GT-40 (26) with the new one.
25
24 26
26
24
5-177 K115sm5eD.doc
9) Remove 2 pieces of Hexagon Head Cap Screw (27), and then remove the 24T Pulley (28).
Disconnect the connector (29).
27 28 29
27
NOTE
There may be the case that some abnormal sound
is generated during operation if the Drum Shaft or
Shaft 204 is short of grease.
If you feel they are not greased enough when you
re-assembly, please grease them.
Drum Shaft
Shaft 204
5-178 K115sm5eD.doc
10) Remove 8 pieces of tooth washer screw (30) to remove the Motor Bracket (31) with motor.
30
30 30
30
31
5-179 K115sm5eD.doc
11) Remove 3 pieces of Hexagon Head Bolt (32) and 1 piece of Flush Head Screw (33) to remove
the Motor Assembly.
33
32
12) Loosen 2 pieces of Set Screw (34), and then pull out the 50T Gear (35) from the shaft of
Drum Motor (36).
Replace the Drum Motor (36) with the new one.
34
35
34
36
35
5-180 K115sm5eD.doc
5.13.2 Replacing Paper Feed Motor (M2)
2
1
2) Disconnect the connector (3), and open the Wire Saddles (4) to make the wires free.
4 3
5-181 K115sm5eD.doc
3) Remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screw (5) to remove the Motor Base (6) with motor.
5 5
4) Loosen 2 pieces of Set Screw (7), and then pull out the 40T Gear (8).
5) Remove 3 pieces of Hexagon Head Bolt (9) to remove the Paper Feed Motor (10).
Replace the paper Feed Motor (10) with the new one.
10
9
5-182 K115sm5eD.doc
5.13.3 Replacing Fuser Motor (M5)
2
1
2) Remove 2 pieces of tooth washer screw (3) to make the Bracket 316 (4) with PCB free.
As the Bracket 316 (4) is preventative for the later works, tape it as the photo shows.
Tape the Bracket 316.
5-183 K115sm5eD.doc
3) Open 3 pieces of Wire Saddle (5) to make the wires free.
4) Disconnect the connector (6), and then remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screw (7) to remove the
Side Plate Assembly (8) with motor.
7
8
5-184 K115sm5eD.doc
5) Remove the E Ring (E7) (9) to remove the Ball Bearing (10).
Remove 4 pieces of Hexagon Head Bolt (11) to divide the Side Plate Assembly into Side
Plate 1 (13) and Side Plate 2 (14).
11
11
10
13
12
5-185 K115sm5eD.doc
6) Loosen 2 pieces of Set Screw (14), and remove the 26T Spur Gear (15).
Remove 3 pieces of tooth washer screw (16) to remove the Fuser Motor (17).
Replace the Fuser Motor (17) with the new one.
16
16
14
17 15
5-186 K115sm5eD.doc
5.13.4 Replacing Developer Positioning Motor (M4)
2
1
2) Disconnect the connector (3), and then remove 3 pieces of Pan Head Screw (4) to remove the
Developer Positioning Motor (5).
Replace the Developer Positioning Motor (5) with the new one.
5
3
5-187 K115sm5eE.doc
5.13.5 Replacing Cutter Motor (M3),
Cutter Home Position Sensor (PH22) &
Internal Transportation Unit Set Sensor (PH24)
2
1
Cooling Fan 4 (5) with its bracket.
4
5
5-188 K115sm5eE.doc
3) Loosen 2 pieces of screw (6), and put the Bracket (7) with PCB aside as it is preventative for later
works.
6 7
4) Remove the Spring 211 (8), and then remove 2 pieces of Hexagon Head Bolt (9) to remove the
15T Sprocket Assembly (10).
10
5-189 K115sm5eE.doc
NOTE
When reassembly, put back the 15T Sprocket
Assembly (10) with the Hexagon Head Bolts (9) 9
loosed, hook the Spring 211 (8) as it was, then
tighten the Hexagon Head Bolts (9).
You do not have to give any tension to the Roller
Chain especially but only the tension of Spring 211
(8) is enough.
8 10
5) Disconnect 3 connectors (11), and then remove 2 pieces of each tooth washer screw (12) and
Hexagon Head Bolt (13) to remove the 15T Sprocket Assembly (14).
14
11
12 12
13 13
5-190 K115sm5eE.doc
6) Remove 5 pieces of tooth washer screw (15) and 2 pieces of Hexagon Head Bolt (16) to remove
the Motor Bracket (17) with motor.
16
15
15
17
5-191 K115sm5eE.doc
7) Remove the tooth washer screw (18), disconnect the connector (19), and remove the
Bracket 14 (20) with sensor.
18 19
20
20
8) Pressing the Stopper Hooks (21) inward, remove the Internal Transportation Unit Set Sensor
(22) from the bracket.
Replace the Internal Transportation Unit Set Sensor (22) with the new one.
21
22
5-192 K115sm5eE.doc
9) Remove the tooth washer screw (23) to remove the Mount (24).
23
24
10) Disconnect the connector (25), and then remove 2 pieces of bind head screw (26) to remove the
Cutter Home Position Sensor (27).
Replace the Cutter Home Position Sensor (27) with the new one.
24 25
26
11) Loosen 2 pieces of Set Screw (27) to remove the Joint B (28).
27
28
NOTE
Lock the Set Screws (27) with the locking paint when you reassemble.
5-193 K115sm5eE.doc
12) Remove 4 pieces of Hexagon Head Bolt (29) to remove the Cutter Motor (30).
Replace the Cutter Motor (30) with the new one.
30
29
29
5-194 K115sm5eE.doc
5.13.6 Replacing Bypass Feeding Motor (M10)
1) Remove both the Top Roll Deck (1) and the Bypass Feeder Unit (2) making reference to
[5.8.1 Removing each Roll Deck] on the page 5-95 and [5.9.1 Removing Bypass Feeder Unit]
on the page 5-122.
1
2
Remove 6 pieces of tooth washer screw (5) to remove the Cover 324 (6).
5
3 4
5-195 K115sm5eE.doc
4) Remove 3 pieces of tooth washer screw (8) to remove the Drum Motor Controller PCB (9).
8
8
5-196 K115sm5eE.doc
5) Loosen the tooth washer screw (10) on the bottom, and remove 3 pieces of tooth washer
screw (11) to remove the Cover (12).
11
12 10
5-197 K115sm5eE.doc
6) Remove 2 pieces of tooth washer screw (13) to remove the Cover 308 (14).
13
14
5-198 K115sm5eE.doc
7) Disconnect 2 connectors (15), remove 4 pieces of screw (16), and then pull out the Bypass
Feeding Motor (17) to the inside of machine.
Replace the Bypass Feeding Motor (17) with the new one.
16
16
15
17
5-199 K115sm5eE.doc
NOTE
(1) When reinstalling the Bypass Feeding Motor,
tighten the screws while pressing the motor so
that there exists no space between Counter
Rollers of motor side and that of machine side.
Counter Roller
of machine side
Counter Roller
of motor side
(2) A red circular seal is pasted on the Bypass Feeding Motor.

Connect the connector of orange cable to this red seal side.
Red seal
Orange cable
5-200 K115sm5eE.doc
5.13.7 Replacing Toner Supply Motor 2 (M6)
1) Draw out the Process Unit (1) making reference to
[5.1.1 Drawing out the Process Unit] on the page 5-3. 1
avoid the light.
on the page 5-165.
3) Remove 3 pieces of tooth washer screw (3) to remove the Bracket 69 (4).
5-201 K115sm5eE.doc
4) Remove 3 pieces of tooth washer screw (5), disconnect the connector (6), and then take out the
Motor Bracket (7) with motor from the machine.
5
5
6
7
7
5) Remove 3 pieces of Pan Head Screw (8) to remove the Toner Supply Motor 2 (9).
Replace the Toner Supply Motor 2 (9) with the new one.
8
9
8
5-202 K115sm5eE.doc
5.13.8 Replacing Paper Gate Clutch (MC5) &
Paper Gate Brake (MC10)
2
1
2) Loosen 2 pieces of Set Screw (3), and remove the rotary side of Paper Gate Brake (4).
5-203 K115sm5eF.doc
3) Remove the connector (5), and then remove 3 pieces of screw (6) to remove the fixed side of
Paper Gate Brake (7).
Replace the Paper Gate Brake (both rotary side and fixed side) (4 &7) with the new one.
5 7
6 7
4 7
NOTE
When you install the new Paper Gate Brake, keep 0.2mm of space between rotary side and
fixed side.
Fixed side
Rotary side
Keep 0.2mm.
5-204 K115sm5eF.doc
4) Remove 4 pieces of tooth washer (8), disconnect the connector (9), and then remove the Clutch
Plate (10).
Pull out both the Thrust Washer (11) and Spacer (12) from the shaft.
8 11 10
9 8
12
11
10
5) Expanding the stopper lever (13) outward, pull out the Paper Gate Clutch (14) from the shaft.
Replace the paper Gate Clutch (14) with the new one.
14
14
13
5-205 K115sm5eF.doc
5.13.9 Replacing Paper Feed Clutch (MC6) &
Paper Feed Brake (MC9)
Draw out the Middle Roll Deck (3).
2 3
1
2) Loosen 2 pieces of Set Screw (4), and remove the rotary side of Paper Feed Brake (5).
5-206 K115sm5eF.doc
3) Disconnect the connector (5), and then remove 3 pieces of screw (6) to remove the fixed side of
Paper Feed Brake (7).
Replace the Paper Feed Brake (both rotary side and fixed side) (4 &7) with the new one.
7
6
7 4
NOTE
When you install the new Paper Feed Brake, keep 0.2mm of space between rotary side and
fixed side.
Fixed side
Rotary side
Keep 0.2mm.
5-207 K115sm5eF.doc
4) Remove 3 pieces of screw (8), disconnect the connector (9), and then remove the Mount 1 (10).
8
8
10
10
5) Pull out the Collar (11), and then pull out the Paper Feed Clutch Assembly (12) from the shaft and
remove the Sliding Key (13).
11 12
12
13
5-208 K115sm5eF.doc
6) Remove 3 pieces of screw (14) to remove the 50T Spur Gear (15) from the Paper Feed Clutch
(16).
Replace the Paper Feed Clutch (16) with the new one.
14
15
16
NOTE
Please check whether or not the Paper Feed Clutch is properly installed or not in the following
ways.
(1) Draw out the Middle Roll Deck, and then try to move the Paper Feed Roller left and right
by hand whether or not there is a play.
If there is a play, please put the Thrust Washer between Paper Feed Clutch and Paper
Feed Brake. (If you do not remove the play, it will cause improper cut length.)
(2) Rotate the Paper Feed Roller by hand. If you feel it is heavy to rotate, remove the Thrust
Washer.
Use the following kinds of Thrust Washer according to the necessity.
10.1 x 16 x 0.2
10.1 x 16 x 0.5
10.1 x 16 x 1.0 Paper Feed Roller
Thrust Washer
5-209 K115sm5eF.doc
5.13.10 Replacing Roll Paper Feed Clutches (MC1 to MC4)
2
1
2) If you will replace either Roll Paper Feed Clutch 3 or Roll paper Feed Clutch 4, loosen 2 pieces of
screw (3), and put the Bracket (4) with PCB aside as it is preventative for later works.
5-210 K115sm5eF.doc
3) Disconnect the connector (5), remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screw (6), and then remove each
Clutch Mount (7) with clutch.
6 7
7
4) Pull out the connector (8) from the Clutch Mount.

Expanding the stopper lever (9) outward, pull out the Roll Paper Feed Clutch (9) from the shaft.
Replace the Roll Paper Feed Clutch (10) with the new one.
10
5-211 K115sm5eF.doc
5.13.11 Replacing SSR1 and SSR2
2
1
2) Remove 8 pieces of tooth washer screw (3) to remove the Duct Assembly (4).
3 3
3 3
5-212 K115sm5eF.doc
3) Disconnect 4 connectors (5), remove 2 pieces of screw (6), and then remove each SSR (7).
Replace the SSR with the new one,.
7
6
5-213 K115sm5eF.doc
NOTE
Each connector of SSR is labelled independently.
Connect them to the correct position making reference to the following photo.
2-1 2-2
2-4 2-3
1-3 1-4
1-2 1-1
5-214 K115sm5eF.doc
5.13.12 Replacing LED Cooling Fans (BL8 to BL11)
1) Remove both the Top Roll Deck (1) and the Bypass Feeder Unit (2) making reference to
[5.8.1 Removing each Roll Deck] on the page 5-95 and [5.9.1 Removing Bypass Feeder Unit]
on the page 5-122.
1
2
2) Loosen the tooth washer screw (3) on the bottom, and remove 3 pieces of tooth washer screw (4)
to remove the Cover (5).
5 3
5-215 K115sm5eF.doc
3) Remove the connector (6), remove 4 pieces of screw (7), and then remove each LED Cooling
Fan (8).
Replace the LED Cooling Fan (8) with the new one.
8 7
7 6 7
5-216 K115sm5eF.doc
5.13.13 Replacing Leading Edge Sensor (PH12)
1
4 4
3 3
5-217 K115sm5eF.doc
avoid the light.
4) Loosen the screw (6) to make the Bracket 207 (7) free.
5-218 K115sm5eF.doc
5) Disconnect the connector (8), and remove the bracket with sensor.
6) Remove the screw (9) top remove the Slit Plate (10).
Remove the screw (11) to remove the Leading Edge Sensor (12).
Replace the Leading Edge Sensor (12) with the new one.
10 9
10 12
11
5-219 K115sm5eF.doc
5.13.14 Replacing Pre-transfer LED
5-220 K115sm5eG.doc
3) Rotate the Knob (5) counter-clockwise to unlock, and then pull out the Bracket (6) with
Pre-transfer LED.
4) Remove the Cover 6 (7), and then remove both screw (8) and nut (9) to make the wire (10) free.
7 8
10
7
8
5-221 K115sm5eG.doc
5) Remove both screw (11) and nut (12) to make one more wire (13) free.
13
12
11 11
6) Remove 6 pieces of each bind head screw (14) and Collar (15), and then divide the lamp into 2
pieces of Pre-Transfer LED PCB (16) disconnecting the connector (17).
Replace the Pre-transfer LED PCB (16) with the new one.
14 17 14
16 14
15
5-222 K115sm5eG.doc
5.13.15 Adjustment of gap between Drum &
Transfer Guide Plate
NOTE
In case you have replaced or removed the Transfer Guide Plate for some reason, make sure
to check the gap between Drum and Transfer Guide Plate using an exclusive Jig.
And adjust the gap properly if necessary.
The proper gap between Drum and Transfer Guide Plate is 0.75mm to 1.25mm.
0.75mm to 1.25mm
To measure the gap, use the exclusive Jig shown in

the right photo.
Drum Gauge for Transfer Guide (7708560011)

5-223 K115sm5eG.doc
3 2
4 5
NOTE
If you take checking or adjustment of gap without removing the Developer Unit, you may
damage the surface of Development Roller with the tip of Pin of the Drum Gauge

6
5-224 K115sm5eG.doc
9 9
8 8
10
10
5-225 K115sm5eG.doc
6) Fit the “Drum Gauge for Transfer Guide” (11) into the Drum Shaft (12).
11
11
12
7) Close the Process Unit, and then fix it with 4 pieces of screw (13).
13
13
8) Bring up the Internal Transportation Unit (14) and lock it at the operation position.
14
NOTE
Make sure to close and lock both the Process Unit and the Internal Transportation Unit before
measurement.
If these units are not locked at the correct positions, it is impossible to measure the gap
correctly.
5-226 K115sm5eG.doc
9) Swing the “Drum Gauge for Transfer Guide” forward and backward to check whether or not its
pins touch the Transfer Guide Plate (15).
One of 2 pins marked with 0.75mm (16) should not touch the Transfer Guide Plate (15).
Another pin marked with 1.25mm (17) should touch the Transfer Guide Plate (15) slightly.
If the above conditions are satisfied, the gap is between 0.75mm and 1.25mm.
16
15
17
Diameter of Drum Diameter of Drum
0.75mm pin
1.25mm pin 0.75mm pin
1.25mm pin
Transfer Guide Plate Transfer Guide Plate
1.25mm pin should touch the Transfer 0.75mm pin should not touch the Transfer
Guide Plate slightly. Guide Plate.
NOTE
Please check not at one point but entirely along the Drum Shaft.
5-227 K115sm5eG.doc
10) If the gap is out of the correct range, loosen 5 pieces of screw (18) one by one and move the
Transfer Guide Plate up or down.
18
5-228 K115sm5eG.doc
5.13.16 Replacing Ozone Filters
NOTE
Ozone Filters are Periodical Replacement Parts, and their life are 200,000m or 1 year.
1) Remove 14 pieces of tooth washer screw (1) and 2 pieces of bind head screw (2) to remove the
Cover 1 (3).
1
1
1
1
2 3
2
5-229 K115sm5eG.doc
2) Remove 2 pieces of screw (4) to remove the Cover 2 (5).
3) Remove 4 pieces of Ozone Filter (6).

Replace the Ozone Filters (6) with the new ones.
4) Remove 3 pieces of Ozone Filter (7).

Replace the Ozone Filters (7) with the new ones.
7 7
5-230 K115sm5eG.doc
5.13.17 Replacing Separation Fan (BL1)
1) Remove 14 pieces of tooth washer screw (1) and 2 pieces of bind head screw (2) to remove the
Cover 1 (3).
1
1
1
1
2 3
2
5-231 K115sm5eG.doc
2) Remove 2 pieces of each screw (4) and Flat Washer (5) to remove the Cover 1 (6).
4 6
4 5
5-232 K115sm5eG.doc
3) Disconnect the connector (7), and then remove 3 pieces of screw (8) to remove the
Separation Fan (9).
Replace the Separation Fan (9) with the new one.
5-233 K115sm5eG.doc
5.14 Toner Cartridge Driving Part
5.14.1 Replacing Transmission PCB (PW7750) &
Receiver PCB (PW7751)
Cover (2).
Then, remove the Toner Cartridge (3).
5-234 K115sm5eH.doc
4) Remove 4 pieces of screw (6) to remove the Cover (7).
7
6
5) Disconnect the connector (8), and then remove 4 pieces of Hexagon Screw (9) to remove the
Transmission PCB (10).
Replace the Transmission PCB (10) with the new one.
9
10
6) Remove 3 pieces of tooth washer screw (11) to remove the Toner Cover (1).
11
11
5-235 K115sm5eH.doc
13
12
12
8) Remove 2 pieces of tooth washer screw (14) to make the Switch (15) free.
14 14
15
5-236 K115sm5eH.doc
9) Remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screws (16), disconnect the connector (17), and remove the
Bracket (18).
17
16
16
18
18
10) Remove 4 pieces of screw (19) and 2 pieces of self-tapping screw (20) to remove the
Receiver PCB (21).
Replace the Receiver PCB (20) with the new one.
20 19
19 21
5-237 K115sm5eH.doc
5.14.2 Replacing Toner Supply Motor 1 (M7) &
Toner Supply Clutch (MC11)
Cover (2).
Then, remove the Toner Cartridge (3).
5-238 K115sm5eH.doc
Toner Cover (1).
6 7
8
8
5-239 K115sm5eH.doc
6) Remove the screw (10) to remove the Cover (11).
Disconnect 2 connectors (12).
10 11
12
5-240 K115sm5eH.doc
7) Remove 2 pieces of tooth washer screw (13) to remove the Cartridge Driving Unit (14).
13
14
5-241 K115sm5eH.doc
8) Remove 2 pieces of Set Screw (15).
15
NOTE
When reassemble, keep a 0.5mm of space between plastic part (16) of clutch and Pin (17),
and then tighten the Set Screw (15).
16 15
17
Keep 0.5mm of space.
5-242 K115sm5eH.doc
9) Remove the E Ring (E7) (18) to remove the Oilless Metal (19).
Remove the E Ring (E8) (20).
18
20
19 18
20
5-243 K115sm5eH.doc
10) Remove 2 pieces of each screw (21) and Stud (22), and remove the Toner Supply Motor 1 (23).
Replace the Toner Supply Motor 1 (23) with the new one.
21
22
23
21
5-244 K115sm5eH.doc
11) Remove the Bracket 511 (24) and the Oilless Metal (25).
24
25
24
12) Remove the E Ring (E10) (26).
26
26
13) Pull the Shaft (27) toward the arrow mark to pull out from the Pin (17).
17
27
5-245 K115sm5eH.doc
14) Expanding the stopper lever (28) outward, pull out the shaft from the Toner Supply Clutch (29).
Replace the Toner Supply Clutch (29) with the new one.
28
29
5-246 K115sm5eH.doc
5.15 Web (Option)
5.15. 1 Replacement of Web Roll

2. Open the Top Rear Cover (1)
3. Loosen 3 screws (2) then close the Top Rear

Cover (1).
1
4. Remove the Cover 5 (3).

3
5-247 K115sm5eJ.doc
5. Remove the screw (4), and remove the Cover 4 (5) on the right.
7. Remove 4 screws (8).
8
8
8. Remove the Web Unit (9).
5-248 K115sm5eJ.doc
9. Pulling out the Pins (10), remove both rolls of old
Web from the unit.
10
10. Install the large web roll (11) to its setting position.
(See the following photo)
11
NOTE
Install the large web roll pulling out the Pin (12).
12
5-249 K115sm5eJ.doc
11. Install the small web roll (13) of Web Roll to its setting position similarly.
13
NOTE
Install the small web roll pulling out the Pin (14).
14
5-250 K115sm5eJ.doc
12. Retrieve the small web roll until the printed number (15) is hidden.
15
5-251 K115sm5eJ.doc
13. Return the Web Unit (9) with new Web to the KIP9000 with 4 screws (8).
NOTE
Confirm there is no space between Web Unit and
Cover 2 Assy. The driving gears are not engaged
Is there is space.
5-252 K115sm5eJ.doc
14. Return both Cover 3 (7) and Cover 4 (5).
5 7
15. Return the Cover 5 (3) finally. 3
16. Turn on the KIP9000, and set the Web Operation Time to “0 hour 0 minute 0 second” in the
following Service Mode items.
• 5-9E : Web Operation Time (Hour)

• 5-9F : Web Operation Time (Minute)
• 5-A0 : Web Operation Time (Second)
17. After setting the Web Operation Time to “0 hour 0 minute 0 second”, press the CUT Key on
the operation Panel when in any of the above service modes (5-9E to 5-A0).
The Web End Error (and Web Near End Error) can be cleared by this operation.
5-253 K115sm5eJ.doc
5.15. 2 Installation of Web Kit
1. Confirm the following parts are included in the kit.
Item name Picture Item name Picture

Web Unit Cover 2 Assy
Web Motor Assy 56/22 Gear Assy
16T Gear Assy Ball Bearing
22T Gear E Ring
Web Oil Pan
5-254 K115sm5eJ.doc
Item name Picture Item name Picture
M4x6 tooth M4x8 tooth
washer screw washer screw
2 : for Oil Pan 4: for Web Unit

1 : for 56/22 4: for Cover 2
Gear Assy Assy
M3x6 bind
screw
2. Open the Top Rear Cover (1)
3. Loosen 3 screws (2) then close the Top Rear

Cover (1).
1
5-255 K115sm5eJ.doc
4. Remove the Cover 5 (3).
3
5-256 K115sm5eJ.doc
7. Open the Exit Cover (8). Disconnect 2 connectors (9) on the right and 1 connector (10) on the
left.
10
8. Remove 4 tooth washer screws (11).
11 11
9. Remove the Cover 2 Assy (12). (This Cover 2 Assy is no longer reused as it is to be replaced
with the one included in the kit.)
12
5-257 K115sm5eJ.doc
10. Remove the Brackets (13) on both sides removing 2 screws (14) for each one.
13
13
14
14
11. Remove 4 screws (15).
15 15
12. Remove the Reinforcement Plate (16). (Reinforcement Plate is no longer reused.)
16
5-258 K115sm5eJ.doc
13. Install the 56/22T Gear Assy (17) on the left with 1 piece of M4x6 tooth washer screw (18)
17 18
17
18
5-259 K115sm5eJ.doc
14. Prepare 16T Gear Assy (19), 2 Ball Bearings (20), 20 22
22T Gear (21) and E Ring (22).
Fit 1 Ball Bearing (20) to the shaft of 16T Gear

Assy (19), insert the shaft from inside to outside
fitting the 22T Gear (21) as the photo, and fix the
end of shaft with another Ball Bearing (20) and
E Ring (22).
19 21
19 20
20
22
19
21
5-260 K115sm5eJ.doc
15. Fix the 22T Gear (21) with the set screw (23).
23 21
NOTE
Fix the 22T Gear where the set screw (23) contacts on the inside step part (24) on the shaft.
24 23
Contact them
5-261 K115sm5eJ.doc
16. Install the Web Motor Assy (25) with 2 M3x6 bind screws (26).
25
26
25
26
26
5-262 K115sm5eJ.doc
17. Install the Oil Pan (27) with 2 M4x6 tooth washer screw (28). (Tighten the screws with pressing
the Oil Pan in the direction of arrow.)
27
28
28 27
Press to this side
28
27
Press to this side
5-263 K115sm5eJ.doc
18. Return the Brackets (13) on both sides and fix them with screws (14).
13 13
14 14
NOTE
2 Brackets (13) are the same parts.
5-264 K115sm5eJ.doc
19. Install the Cover 2 Assy (29) with 4 M4x8 tooth washer screws (30).
30
29
29
30
30
5-265 K115sm5eJ.doc
20. Connect the connector (10) on the left.
10
21. Connect 2 connectors (9) which were disconnected at the former procedure 7. And connect 1
“added” connector (31).
31
5-266 K115sm5eJ.doc
22. Prepare the Web Unit (32) and Web Roll (33).
32 33
23. Install the large web roll (34) to its setting position.
(See the following photo)
34
NOTE
Install the large web roll pulling out the Pin (35).
35
5-267 K115sm5eJ.doc
24. Install the small web roll (36) of Web Roll to its setting position similarly.
36
NOTE
Install the small web roll pulling out the Pin (37).
37
5-268 K115sm5eJ.doc
25. Retrieve the small web roll until the printed number (38) is hidden.
38
5-269 K115sm5eJ.doc
26. Install the Web Unit (32) with new Web to the 30
KIP9000 with 4 M4x8 screws (39).
32
39
39
NOTE
Confirm there is no space between Web Unit and
Cover 2 Assy. The driving gears are not engaged
Is there is space.
5-270 K115sm5eJ.doc
27. Return both Cover 3 (7) and Cover 4 (5).
5 7
28. Return the Cover 5 (3) finally. 3
5-271 K115sm5eJ.doc
Chapter 6
Maintenance / Checking
6-1 K115sm6e1.doc
KIP 9000 Preventative Maintenance Procedure
every 80,000 linear feet
Step #1 - Prepare Machine.
Ask user about printer performance / image quality.
Print internal test prints 1 & 3. Review Quality.
Locate the “KIP 9000 PM Schedule” Form and check off each item completed.
Replace noted items as this procedure progresses.
Remove drum and place into supplied box.
Remove top covers to remove process unit / assemblies.
Step #2 - Corona Units
Clean Grid Screen with Simple Green, and then rinse with water. Allow to dry on
paper towel.
Clean 1st charge wires and case with glass cleaner.
Clean transfer / separation wires and case with glass cleaner.
Step #3 - Clean interior of printer
Separation fans / air guides.
Transport belts.
Transfer guide plates etc.
Step #4 - Development Unit
Clean spacing rollers.
Vacuum toner dust from ends of developer unit.
Vacuum around toner hopper inlet.
Clean and lubricate gears as needed with G501 grease / Lithium grease.
Step #5 - LED Print Head.
Clean fiber optic lens with glass cleaner and a lint-free cloth.
Step #6 - Paper Decks
Vacuum paper dust.
Inspect media spools for damage.
Step #7 - Air Flow
Vacuum ozone filters.
Confirm that all fans and blowers are clean and operational.
Step #8 - Fuser Section
Clean upper nails.
Shift upper nails (left / right / center etc.)
Clean lower nails.
Clean and lubricate gears as needed with high temperature grease.
Step #9 - Cutter Assembly
Clean paper dust.
Periodically apply oil to cutter pad.
Step #10 Run test pattern #1 and #3 to verify print quality. Save copies.
Step #11 Clean panels and covers.
Step #12 Speak with key operator on your evaluation / status.
KIP 9000 - Maintenance Schedule
- Please keep this document with the printer Serial r1
- Denote when the maintenance / replacement is performed. Number
Description / Item Qty Part # Code Linear Feet X 1000
Complete
Complete
Complete
Complete
Complete
Complete
Complete
Complete
Complete
Complete
80 160 240 320 400 480 560 640 720 800
Corona Wire Kit (wires & pads) 1 Z158000010 R R
Charge Wires G C C C C C C C C C C
T / S Wires G C C C C C C C C C C
LED Head G C C C C C C C C C C
Grid Screen 1 7705100150 G C C C C C C C R C C
Development Unit 1 Z154690010 R
Developer Gears L L L L L L L L L L
Developer Spacer Discs G C C C C
Drum 1 SUP9000-101 R
Filter Kit 1 Z158000020 V C C C R C C C R C C
Fuser Kit (rollers, nails & bearings) 1 Z158000030 R
Upper Fuser Nail C/A C/A C/A C/A C/A C/A C/A C/A C/A
Lower Fuser Nails C C C C C C C C C
Fuser Gears L L L L L L L L L L
Knife V C C C C C
Knife Oil Pad I L L L L
Paper Supply Rollers C C
Paper Drive Gears ( metal collar ) L L L L L
Vacuum interior / paper decks V C C C C C C C C C C
Exterior Covers G C C C C C C C C C C
G = Clean with glass cleaner and wipe dry C = Clean R = Replace L = Lubricate
V = Clean carefully with vacuum I = Inspect A = Adjust
Page 1
KIP 9000 - Maintenance Schedule
- Please keep this document with the printer r1
- Denote when the maintenance / replacement is performed.
Description / Item Qty Part # Code Linear Feet X 1000
Complete
Complete
Complete
Complete
Complete
Complete
Complete
Complete
Complete
Complete
880 960 1040 1120 1200 1280 1360 1440 1520 1600
Corona Wire Kit (wires & pads) 1 Z158000010 R R R
Charge Wires G C C C C C C C C C C
T / S Wires G C C C C C C C C C C
LED Head G C C C C C C C C C C
Grid Screen 1 7705100150 G C C C C C R C C C C
Development Unit 1 Z154690010 R
Developer Gears L L L L L L L L L L
Developer Spacer Discs G C C C C
Drum 1 SUP9000-101 R
Filter Kit 1 Z158000020 V C R C C C R C C C R
Fuser Kit (rollers, nails & bearings) 1 Z158000030 R
Upper Fuser Nail C/A C/A C/A C/A C/A C/A C/A C/A C/A
Lower Fuser Nails C C C C C C C C C
Fuser Gears L L L L L L L L L L
Knife V C C C C C
Knife Oil Pad L L R L L
Paper Supply Rollers C C C C C
Paper Drive Gears ( metal collar ) L L L L L
Vacuum interior / paper decks V C C C C C C C C C C
Exterior Covers G C C C C C C C C C C
G = Clean with glass cleaner and wipe dry C = Clean R = Replace L = Lubricate
V = Clean carefully with vacuum I = Inspect A = Adjust
Page 2
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Page
7. 1 Error Codes 7- 3
7. 1. 1 Door Open Errors 7- 3
7. 1. 2 Operator Call Errors 7- 4
7. 1. 3 Service Call Errors 7- 6
7. 2 Measures against Errors 7- 8

7. 2. 1 Measures against Door Open Errors 7- 8
7. 2. 1. 1 “U-01” Top Roll Deck Open 7- 8
7. 2. 1. 2 “U-02” Middle Roll Deck Open 7- 8
7. 2. 1. 3 “U-03” Bottom Roll Deck Open 7- 8
7. 2. 1. 4 “U-04” Internal Transportation Unit Open 7- 8
7. 2. 1. 5 “U-06” Toner Cover Open 7- 9
7. 2. 1. 6 “U-11” Bypass Feeder Open 7- 9
7. 2. 1. 7 “U-12” Right Side Door Open 7- 9
7. 2. 1. 8 “U-13” Top Rear Cover Open 7- 9
7. 2. 1. 9 “U-14” Exit Cover Open 7- 9
7. 2. 2 Measures against Operator Call Errors 7-10
7. 2. 2. 1 “J-01” Roll 1 Jam 7-10
7. 2. 2. 2 “J-02” Roll 2 Jam 7-10
7. 2. 2. 3 “J-03” Roll 3 Jam 7-11
7. 2. 2. 4 “J-04” Roll 4 Jam 7-11
7. 2. 2. 5 “J-05” Bypass Feeder Jam 7-12
7. 2. 2. 6 “J-11” Cutter - Drum Area Jam 7-12
7. 2. 2. 7 “J-12” Separation Area Jam 7-13
7. 2. 2. 8 “J-13” Fuser Entrance Jam 7-14
7. 2. 2. 9 “J-14” Fuser Inside Jam 7-14
7. 2. 2.10 Toner Empty 7-15
7. 2. 2.11 Roll Empty 7-15
7. 2. 3 Measures against Service Call Errors 7-16
7. 2. 3. 1 “E-01” Fuser Temperature Rising Error 7-16
7. 2. 3. 2 “E-02” Fuser Over-heating Error 7-17
7. 2. 3. 3 “E-05” Drum Motor Error 7-18
7. 2. 3. 4 “E-06” Counter A/B Error 7-18
7. 2. 3. 5 “E-07” Cutter Motor Error 7-19
7. 2. 3. 6 “E-09” Web End Error 7-20
7. 2. 3. 7 “E-13” Paper Feed Motor Error 7-20
7. 2. 3. 8 “E-14” Fuser Motor Error 7-21
7. 2. 3. 9 “E-16” Wire Cleaning Error 7-21
7. 2. 3.10 “E-21” Fuser Thermostat Error 7-21
7. 2. 3.11 “E-23” LED Head Cleaning Error 7-22
7. 2. 3.12 “E-26” Surface Potential Control Error 7-22
7. 2. 3.13 “E-27” Density Sensor Error 7-22
7. 2. 3.14 “E-28” Density Control Error 7-22
7. 2. 3.15 “E-30” Developer Disconnection Error 7-23
7. 2. 3.16 “E-43” RFID (IC Tag) Error 7-23
7. 2. 3.17 “E-49” Developer Positioning Motor Error 7-23
7. 2. 3.18 “E-F0” Folder Error 7-23
7. 2. 3.19 “E-Fb” Flash ROM Error 7-24
7. 2. 3.20 “C-01” Toner Cartridge Error 7-24
7-1 K115sm7e1.doc
7. 3 Measures against Image Defects 7-25
7. 3. 1 Standard settings of image process items 7-25
7. 3. 2 Measures against each image defect 7-26
7. 3. 2. 1 Halftone is too light 7-26
7. 3. 2. 2 Halftone and solid black are too light 7-27
7. 3. 2. 3 Every image is too light 7-29
7. 3. 2. 4 Uneven density between left and right 7-31
7. 3. 2. 5 Foggy background 7-31
7. 3. 2. 6 Foggy thick black lines (from LE to TE) 7-32
7. 3. 2. 7 Clear thin black line (from LE to TE) 7-32
7. 3. 2. 8 White lines (from LE to TE) 7-33
7. 3. 2. 9 Image void 7-33
7. 3. 2.10 Dirt on the backside 7-34
7. 3. 2.11 Offset print 7-34
7. 3. 2.12 Weak fusing 7-35
7. 3. 2.13 Leading margin defect (No leading margin) 7-36
7. 3. 2.14 Jitter 7-36
7. 3. 2.15 Unsharpened image (Focus defect) 7-37
7. 3. 2.16 Uneven density between front and rear 7-37
7. 3. 2.17 Completely white 7-38
7. 3. 2.18 Completely black 7-38
7-2 K115sm7e1.doc
7. 1 Error Codes
7. 1. 1 Door Open Errors
KIP9000 will show the following Door Open Error when any door or unit is open or unlocked. The
user can fix them.
Error Error name Error condition

Codes
U-01 Top Roll Deck Open Top Roll Deck is open.
U-02 Middle Roll Deck Open Middle Roll Deck is open.
U-03 Bottom Roll Deck Open Bottom Roll Deck is open.
U-04 Internal Transportation Internal Transportation Unit is open unlocked.
Unit Open
U-06 Toner Cover Open Toner Cover is open.
U-11 Bypass Feeder Open Bypass Feeder is open.
U-12 Right Side Door Open Right Side Door is open.
U-13 Top Rear Cover Open Top Rear Cover is open.
U-14 Exit Cover Open Exit Cover is open.
1
2
7
3
5 4
1 : Top Roll Deck

2 : Middle Roll Deck
3 : Bottom Roll Deck
4 : Internal Transportation Unit
5 : Toner Cover
6 : Bypass Feeder
7 : Right Side Door
9
8 : Top Rear Cover
9 : Exit Cover
7-3 K115sm7e1.doc
7. 1. 2 Operator Call Errors
KIP9000 will show the following Operator Call Error when it has any error that can be fixed by the
user.

Codes
J-01 Roll 1 Jam 1. Roll Set Sensor 1 Signal (RP_SET1) does not change
from H to L within a decided time since the KIP9000
has started transporting the Roll 1 from the wait
position.
2. Roll Set Sensor 1 Signal (RP_SET1) does not change
from L to H within a decided time since the KIP9000
has started retrieving the Roll 1 back to wait position.
position.
position.
position.
J-05 Bypass Feeder Jam Bypass Start Sensor Signal (MPSRT) does not change
from H to L within a decided time since the KIP9000 has
started transporting the cut sheet media to the wait
position.
J-11 Cutter - Drum Area Jam 1. Leading Edge Sensor Signal (PA_ENT) does not
change from H to L within a decided time since the
KIP9000 has started transporting the media from the
wait position of each media source.
(Wait position of each media source means PH1,
PH2, PH3, PH4 and PH20).
2. Leading Edge Sensor Signal (PA_ENT) does not
change from L to H within a decided time since the
Cutter has started the cutting operation.
7-4 K115sm7e1.doc
Codes
J-12 Separation Area Jam 1. Separation Sensor Signal (P_SEPR) is L when
KIP9000 is turned on.
2. Separation Sensor Signal (P_SEPR) does not
change from H to L within a decided time since the
KIP9000 has started transporting the media from any
of wait positions.
(Wait positions mean any of PH1, PH2, PH3, PH4
and PH20).
J-13 Fuser Entrance Jam 1. Exit Sensor Signal (P_EXIT) is L when KIP9000 is
turned on.
2. Exit Sensor Signal (P_EXIT) does not change from H
to L within a decided time since the KIP9000 has
started transporting the media from any of wait
positions.
(Wait positions mean any of PH1, PH2, PH3, PH4
and PH20).
J-14 Fuser Inside Jam Exit Sensor Signal (P_EXIT) had changed from H to L
during printing, but it does not change to L within a
decided time although the Leading Edge Sensor Signal
(PA_ENT) has changed from L to H.
Toner empty The quantity of toner is smaller than the requirement.
LED is lighting : No more print is available.

LED is flashing : Some more print is available.
Roll empty 1. Roll media is not installed in the selected Roll Deck.
2. Selected roll media is emptied in the middle of
printing or when the KIP9000 is checking the roll size.
7-5 K115sm7e1.doc
7. 1. 3 Service Call Errors
KIP9000 will show the following Service Call Error when it has any significant error which the
service personnel only can fix. (User can not fit these errors.)

Codes
E-01 Fuser Temperature 1. Fusing temperature does not rise up to 120oC within a
Rising Error decided time after turning on.
2. Fusing temperature falls down to 70oC after once
getting ready.
E-02 Fuser Over-heating Fusing temperature is over 200oC.
Error
E-05 Drum Motor Error Drum Motor Control Signal (DRMTR) and Drum Motor
Synchronous Signal (DRMTR_LD) do not synchronize
with each other for a decided time.
E-06 Counter A/B Error 1. Counter Control Signal Feed Back (IN_CNT_A or
IN_CNT_B) continues to be L for 1 second or longer
when the Counter should count up.
2. Counter Control Signal Feed Back (IN_CNT_A or
IN_CNT_B) continues to be H for 1 second or longer
when the Counter is not counting up.
E-07 Cutter Motor Error 1. Cutter remains at its home position although 0.3
seconds has passed since the Cutter Motor has
started the operation.
2. Cutter does not arrive at its home position although
1 second has passed since the Cutter Motor has
started the operation.
3. Home position can not be detected for 2 seconds
during cutter cleaning.
E-09 Web End Error When Web End is detected.
E-13 Paper Feed Motor Error Paper Feed Motor Control Signal (PFMTR) and Paper
Feed Motor Synchronous Signal (PFMTR_LD) do not
synchronize each other for a decided time.
E-14 Fuser Motor Error Fuser Motor Control Signal (FUMTR) and Fuser Motor
Synchronous Signal (FUMTR_LD) do not synchronize
each other for a decided time.
E-16 Wire Cleaning Error Over-current can not be detected although 90 seconds
has passed since the Wire Cleaning Motor had started to
work.
E-21 Fuser Thermostat Error Thermostat is open-circuited.
E-23 LED Head Cleaning Over-current can not be detected although 90 seconds
Error has passed since the LED Cleaning Motor had started to
work.
E-26 Surface Potential When the Auto SP Control fails in adjusting the surface
Control Error potential to within the acceptable range.
E-27 Density Sensor Error When the initialization of Density Sensor could not be
achieved successfully during Density Lock process.
E-28 Density Control Error When the Auto Density Control fails in adjusting the
density to within the acceptable range.
E-30 Developer When the connector in Process Unit is disconnected.
Disconnection Error
E-43 RFID (IC Tag) Error When the FRID PCB is defective.
E-49 Developer Positioning Home position of Developer Unit can not be detected
Motor Error although 60 seconds has passed since the Developer
Positioning Motor had started the positioning operation.
7-6 K115sm7e1.doc
Codes
E-F0 Folder Error 1. Communication between KIP9000 and Folder is
abnormal.
2. Folder has any error other than jam.
E-Fb Flash ROM Error Writing to the Flash ROM is failed.
7-7 K115sm7e1.doc
7. 2 Measures against Errors
7. 2. 1 Measures against Door Open Errors
7. 2. 1. 1 “U-01” Top Roll Deck Open

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment
Setting condition of 1 Is the Top Roll Deck closed No Close it firmly.
Top Roll Deck firmly?
Top Roll Deck 2 Is the Connector J70 firmly Yes Check the connector pin J70-32.
Connector (J70) connected when Top Roll Deck is No Remove the deck and install the
closed? connector (J70) correctly.
Main Control PCB 3 Can the error be fixed by Yes OK
(PW11520) replacing the Main Control PCB?
7. 2. 1. 2 “U-02” Middle Roll Deck Open

Setting condition of 1 Is the Middle Roll Deck closed No Close it firmly.
Middle Roll Deck firmly?
Middle Roll Deck 2 Is the Connector J71 firmly Yes Check the connector pin J71-22.
7. 2. 1. 3 “U-03” Bottom Roll Deck Open

Setting condition of 1 Is the Bottom Roll Deck closed No Close it firmly.
Bottom Roll Deck firmly?
Bottom Roll Deck 2 Is the Connector J72 firmly Yes Check the connector pin J72-37.
7. 2. 1. 4 “U-04” Internal Transportation Unit Open

Setting condition of 1 Is the Internal Transportation Unit No Close it firmly. (Confirm the lock
Internal Transportation closed firmly? lever is clicked into place.)
Unit
Internal Transportation 2 Is the light from Photo Interrupter No Reinstall the sensor (PH24)
Unit Sensor (PH24) surely interrupted when the properly.
Internal Transportation Unit is Yes 1. Check if the sensor harness is
closed? damaged, or check if the
connector of sensor harness is
surely connected.
2. Replace the sensor (PH24) If the
harness is OK.
7-8 K115sm7e1.doc
7. 2. 1. 5 “U-06” Toner Cover Open
Setting condition of 1 Is the Toner Cover closed firmly? No Close it firmly.
Toner Cover
Toner Cover Switch 2 Check the voltage at J202-3 on No 1. Check if the harnesses between
(DS5 & DS6) the Main Control PCB. switch and Main Controller PCB
Is it 5VDC when the cover is open damaged or disconnected.
and 0VDC when it is closed? 2. Replace the switches (DS5 &
DS6) if the harness is OK.
7. 2. 1. 6 “U-11” Bypass Feeder Open

Setting condition of 1 Is the Bypass Feeder closed No Close it firmly.
Bypass Feeder firmly?
7. 2. 1. 7 “U-12” Right Side Door Open

Setting condition of 1 Is the Right Side Door closed No Close it firmly.
Right Side Door firmly?
Right Side Door 2 Check the voltage at J202-2 on No 1. Check if the harness between
Switch (DS1 & DS2) the Main Control PCB. switch and Main Control PCB
Is it 5VDC when the door is open damaged or disconnected.
7. 2. 1. 8 “U-13” Top Rear Cover Open

Setting condition of 1 Is the Top Rear Cover closed No Close it firmly.
Top Rear Cover firmly?
Top Rear Cover 2 Check the voltage at J202-1 on No 1. Check if the harness between
Connector (J91) the Main Control PCB. switch and Main Control PCB
and 0VDC when it is closed? 2. Replace the connector (J91) if
the harness is OK.
7. 2. 1. 9 “U-14” Exit Cover Open

Setting condition of 1 Is the Exit Cover closed firmly? No Close the Exit Cover firmly.
Exit Cover
Exit Cover Switch 2 Check the voltage at J204-16 on No 1. Check if the harness between
(DS3 & DS4) the Main Control PCB. switch and Main Control PCB is
7-9 K115sm7e1.doc
7. 2. 2 Measures against Operator Call Errors
7. 2. 2. 1 “J-01” Roll 1 Jam

Roll Set Sensor 1 1 Check the input signal from the No 1. Check if the sensor harness has
(PH1) Roll Set Sensor 1 (signal code 04) any abnormality.
in the Input/Output Checking 2. Replace the sensor (PH1) if the
Mode of Service Mode. harness is OK.
Is it “L” when the media is on the

sensor and “H” when the media is
not on the sensor?
Roll Paper Feed 2 Can the following clutches be No 1. Check if the harness of clutch
Clutch 1 (MC1) operated properly in the Function has any abnormality.
Roll Deck 1 Feed Checking Mode of Service Mode? 2. Replace each clutch (MC1 &
Clutch (MC8) MC8) if the harness is OK.
- Roll Paper Feed Clutch 1
(Signal code : 92)
- Roll Deck 1 Feed Clutch
(Signal code : 9C)
DC Driver PCB 3 Can the error be fixed by Yes OK
(PW7755) replacing the DC Driver PCB?
7. 2. 2. 2 “J-02” Roll 2 Jam


not on the sensor?
Roll Paper Feed 2 Can the Roll Paper Feed Clutch 2 No 1. Check if the harness of clutch
Clutch 2 (MC2) (signal code : 93) be operated has any abnormality.
properly in the Function Checking 2. Replace the clutch (MC2) if the
Mode of Service Mode? harness is OK.
7-10 K115sm7e1.doc
7. 2. 2. 3 “J-03” Roll 3 Jam

not on the sensor?
7. 2. 2. 4 “J-04” Roll 4 Jam


not on the sensor?
7-11 K115sm7e1.doc
7. 2. 2. 5 “J-05” Bypass Feeder Jam
Bypass Feed Clutch 1 Can the Bypass Feed Clutch No 1. Check if the harness of clutch
(MC7) (signal code : 98) be operated has any abnormality.
Bypass Feeding Motor 2 Can the Bypass Feeding Motor No 1. Check if the harness of motor
(M10) (signal code : 3C) be operated has any abnormality.
properly in the Function Checking 2. Replace the motor (M10) if the
Bypass Feeding 3 Can the Bypass Feeding Roller No 1. Check if the harness of solenoid
Roller Down Solenoid Down Solenoid (signal code : 3A) has any abnormality.
(SL3) be operated properly in the 2. Replace the solenoid (SL3) if the
Function Checking Mode of harness is OK.
Service Mode?
Bypass Start Sensor 4 Check the input signal from the No 1. Check if the sensor harness has
(PH20) Bypass Start Sensor (signal code any abnormality.
03) in the Input/Output Checking 2. Replace the sensor (PH20) if the

not on the sensor?
7. 2. 2. 6 “J-11” Cutter – Drum Area Jam

Leading Edge Sensor 1 Check the input signal from the No 1. Check if the sensor harness has
(PH12) Leading Edge Sensor (signal code any abnormality.
EE) in the Input/Output Checking 2. Replace the sensor (PH12) if the

not on the sensor?
Paper Feed Clutch 2 Can the following clutch or brake No 1. Check if the harness of clutch
(MC6) be operated properly in the or brake has any abnormality.
Paper Feed Brake Function Checking Mode of 2. Replace the clutch (MC6) or
(MC9) Service Mode? brake (MC9) if the harness is OK.
- Paper Feed Clutch

(Signal code : 91)
- Paper Feed Brake
(Signal code : 9E)
Paper Gate Clutch 3 Can the following clutch or brake No 1. Check if the harness of clutch
(MC5) be operated properly in the or brake has any abnormality.
Paper Gate Brake Function Checking Mode of 2. Replace the clutch (MC5) or
(MC10) Service Mode? brake (MC10) if the harness is
OK.
- Paper Gate Clutch
(Signal code : 90)
- Paper Gate Brake
(Signal code : 9D)
7-12 K115sm7e1.doc
7. 2. 2. 7 “J-12” Separation Area Jam
Separation Sensor 1 Check the input signal from the No 1. Check if the sensor harness has
(PH18) Separation Sensor (signal code any abnormality.
2E) in the Input/Output Checking 2. Replace the sensor (PH18) if the

not on the sensor?
Separation Corona 2 Can the Separation Corona No 1. Clean each housing and wire,
(signal code : A1) be operated and check the wire height.
properly in the Function Checking 2. Replace the corona wire.
Mode of Service Mode? 3. Replace the High Voltage Power
Supply (HVP4).
Separation Lamp 3 Can the Separation Lamp (signal No 1. Check if the harness of lamp
code : 7B) be operated properly in has any abnormality.
the Function Checking Mode of 2. Replace the Separation Lamp if
Service Mode? the harness is OK.
Pre-transfer LED 4 Can the Pre-transfer LED (signal No 1. Check if the harness of LED
code : A3) be operated properly in has any abnormality.
the Function Checking Mode of 2. Replace the Pre-transfer LED if
Separation Fan 5 Can the Separation Fan (signal No 1. Check if the harness of fan
(BL1) code : 7D) be operated properly in has any abnormality.
the Function Checking Mode of 2. Replace the fan (BL1) if the
Service Mode? harness is OK.
Separation Assist 6 Can the Separation Assist No 1. Check if the harness of each
Blowers Blowres be operated properly in blower has any abnormality.
(BL12, BL13, BL14, the Function Checking Mode of 2. Replace the blower (BL12 to 16)
BL15 & BL16) Service Mode? if the harness is OK.
- BL12 & BL16 (Signal code : 3E)

- BL13 & BL15 (Signal code : 3F)
- BL14 (Signal code : 99)
7-13 K115sm7e1.doc
7. 2. 2. 8 “J-13” Fuser Entrance Jam
Exit Sensor 1 Check the input signal from the No 1. Check if the sensor harness has
(LS2) Exit Sensor (signal code 2F) in any abnormality.
the Input/Output Checking Mode 2. Replace the sensor (LS2) if the
of Service Mode. harness is OK.

not on the sensor?
Separation Corona 2 Can the Separation Corona No 1. Clean each housing and wire,
(signal code : A1) be operated and check the wire height.
properly in the Function Checking 2. Replace the corona wire.
Mode of Service Mode? 3. Replace the High Voltage Power
Supply (HVP4).
Separation Lamp 3 Can the Separation Lamp (signal No 1. Check if the harness of lamp
code : 7B) be operated properly in has any abnormality.
the Function Checking Mode of 2. Replace the Separation Lamp if
Pre-transfer LED 4 Can the Pre-transfer LED (signal No 1. Check if the harness of LED
code : A3) be operated properly in has any abnormality.
the Function Checking Mode of 2. Replace the Pre-transfer LED if
Separation Fan 5 Can the Separation Fan (signal No 1. Check if the harness of fan
(BL1) code : 7D) be operated properly in has any abnormality.
the Function Checking Mode of 2. Replace the fan (BL1) if the
Service Mode? harness is OK.
Separation Assist 6 Can the Separation Assist No 1. Check if the harness of each
Blowers Blowres be operated properly in blower has any abnormality.
(BL12, BL13, BL14, the Function Checking Mode of 2. Replace the blower (BL12 to 16)
BL15 & BL16) Service Mode? if the harness is OK.
- BL12 & BL16 (Signal code : 3E)

- BL13 & BL15 (Signal code : 3F)
- BL14 (Signal code : 99)
Pressure Blowers 7 Can the Pressure Blowers (signal No 1. Check if the harness of blower
(BL4, BL5, BL6 & codes : 6D & 6F) be operated has any abnormality.
BL7) properly in the Function Checking 2. Replace the blowers (BL4 to 7) if
Mode of Service Mode? the harness is OK.
7. 2. 2. 9 “J-14” Fuser Inside Jam

Stripper Finger Ass’y 1 Is the tip of Stripper Finger Ass’y Yes Clean their tips.
Or Separation Finger or Separation Finger dirty?
Exit Sensor 2 Check the input signal from the No 1. Check if the sensor harness has
(LS2) Exit Sensor (signal code 2F) in any abnormality.
the Input/Output Checking Mode 2. Replace the sensor (LS2) if the
of Service Mode. harness is OK.

not on the sensor?
7-14 K115sm7e1.doc
7. 2. 2.10 Toner Empty
Setting condition of 1 Is the opening of Toner Cartridge No Direct it downward.
Toner Cartridge directed downward?
Toner Supply Motor 1 2 Can the Toner Supply Motor 1 No 1. Check if the harness of motor
(M7) (signal code : A7) be operated has any abnormality.
Toner Supply Motor 2 3 Can the Toner Supply Motor 2 No 1. Check if the harness of motor
(M6) (signal code : 98) be operated has any abnormality.
Toner Supply Clutch 4 Can the Toner Supply Clutch No 1. Check if the harness of clutch
(MC11) (signal code : 79) be operated has any abnormality.
Hopper Toner Sensor 5 Check the input signal from the No 1. Check if the sensor harness has
(TLS1) Hopper Toner Sensor (signal code any abnormality.
1d) in the Input/Output Checking 2. Replace the sensor (TLS1) if the
Does it show “H” when the Hopper

Toner Sensor is under the toner?
Toner Sensor 6 Can the error be fixed by Yes OK
(PH43 & PH44) replacing the Toner Sensors?
7. 2. 2.11 Roll Empty

Rubber belt in the Roll 1 Is the rubber belt on the right of No Install the Roll Spool correctly.
Deck each Roll Deck surely contacting
the bottom of small black roller of
Roll Spool? (Belt will be driven by
the spool if contacting properly.)
Spool Brake 2 Try to replace the Spool Brake.
Paper Feed Clock 3 Check the input signal from the No 1. Check if the sensor harness has
Sensors concerning Paper Feed Clock any abnormality.
(PH13, PH14, PH15 & Sensor in the Input/Output 2. Replace the concerning sensor
PH16) Checking Mode of Service Mode. (PH13 to 16) if the harness is OK.
- Paper Feed Clock Sensor 1

(Signal code : 08)
(Signal code : 09)
(Signal code : 0A)
(Signal code : 0b)
Does the input shows “H” and “L”

alternately?
7-15 K115sm7e1.doc
7. 2. 3 Measures against Service Call Errors
7. 2. 3. 1 “E-01” Fuser Temperature Rising Error

When “E-01” must not be detected when diagnosing the KIP9000, mask it in the Error Mask Mode.
Its Mask Code is “00”. See [8.1.8 Error Mask Mode (Sub Mode 7)] on page 8-114 for the detail.

Harness 1 Is the harness connected to each No Connect it.
IR Lamps (H1 & H2), SSR (SSR1
& SSR2) and Thermistor (TH1)?
IR Lamps (H1 & H2) 2 Plug out the KIP9000 and check No Replace the IR Lamps.
the resistance of each IR Lamp.
Is there any resistance?
Thermistor 1 (TH1) 3 Check the fuser temperature Yes 1. Clean the Thermistor 1 and
(data No.00) in the Data reinstall it correctly.
Monitoring Mode of Service 2. If the error still occurs, replace
Mode, and compare it with the the Thermistor 1.
setting value of fuser temperature
specified in each of the following
service mode items.
4-10: Fusing temperature (PPC)

4-11: Fusing temperature
(Tracing)
4-12: Fusing temperature (Film)
Are the detected temperature and

setting temperature greatly
different from each other?
Interlock 4 Check the voltage between No Check if the interlock can correctly
Terminals 0 and 1 on each Relay open and close.
2 and Relay 3.
Is it 24V?
Temperature Detect 5 Check the voltage at the Terminal No 1. Replace the Temperature Detect
PCB (PW7740) 1 on each Relay 2 and Relay 3. PCB.
Is it 0V? 2. If the error still occurs, replace
Or Thermistor 2 (TH2) the Thermistor 2.
DC Driver PCB 6 Does the gray lead wire on the No Replace the DC Driver PCB.
(PW7755) coil side of Relay 2 show 24V?
And does the orange lead wire on
the same place show 0V?
Relay 2 (RY2) 7 Check the voltage between No Replace the Relay 2.
Terminals 4 and 8 on the IR Lamp
side of Relay 2.
Is it 230VAC?
Phase Control PCB 2 8 Check the voltage at both J253-1 No Replace the Phase Control PCB 2.
(PW6125 02) and J253-3 on the Phase Control Yes Replace the SSR1
PCB 2.
Or SSR (SSR1) Does J253-3 show 0V when
J253-1 shows 0V?
Relay 3 (RY3) 9 Check the voltage between No Replace the Relay 3.
Terminals 4 and 8 on the IR Lamp
side of Relay 3.
Is it 230VAC?
Phase Control PCB 2 10 Check the voltage at both J253-2 No Replace the Phase Control PCB 2.
(PW6125 02) and J253-4 on the Phase Control Yes Replace the SSR2
PCB 2.
Or SSR (SSR2) Does J253-4 show 0V when
J253-2 shows 0V?
7-16 K115sm7e1.doc
7. 2. 3. 2 “E-02” Fuser Over-heating Error

IR Lamps (H1 & H2), SSR (SSR1
& SSR2) and Thermistor (TH1)?
SSR1 2 While checking the fuser Yes Replace the SSR1.
temperature (data No.00) in the
Data Monitoring Mode of Service
Mode, check the voltage at J253-
3 on the Phase Control PCB 2
(PW6125 02).
Does the temperature gradually
rise when the J253-3 shows 24V?
SSR2 3 While checking the fuser Yes Replace the SSR2
temperature (data No.00) in the
Data Monitoring Mode of Service
Mode, check the voltage at J253-
4 on the Phase Control PCB 2
(PW6125 02).
Does the temperature gradually
rise when the J253-4 shows 24V?
Thermistor 1 (TH1) 4 Check the fuser temperature (data No Replace the Thermistor 1 with the
No.00) in the Data Monitoring new one.
Mode of Service Mode, and
compare it with the setting value
of fuser temperature specified in
each of the following service
mode items.
4-10: Fusing temperature (PPC)

4-11: Fusing temperature
(Tracing)
4-12: Fusing temperature (Film)
Are the detected temperature and

setting temperature greatly
different from each other?
Phase Control PCB 2 5 1. Check the voltage at both No Replace the Phase Control PCB 2.
(PW6125 02) J253-2 and J253-4 on the
Phase Control PCB 2.
Does J253-4 show 24V when
J253-2 shows 5V?
2. Check the voltage at both
J253-1 and J253-3 on the
Phase Control PCB 2.
Does J253-3 show 24V when
J253-1 shows 5V?
7-17 K115sm7e1.doc
7. 2. 3. 3 “E-05” Drum Motor Error

Drum Motor, Drum Motor
Controller PCB and DC Driver
PCB?
Drum Motor (M1) 2 Can the Drum Motor (signal code : No Replace either Drum Motor or Drum
85) be operated properly in the Motor Controller PCB.
Or Drum Motor Function Checking Mode of
Controller PCB Service Mode?
(TP1142)
7. 2. 3. 4 “E-06” Counter A/B Error


Harness 1 Is the harness connected among No Connect it.
Counter A, Counter B and Main
Control PCB?
Counter A 2 Check the voltage at J209-4 on Yes Replace the Counter A.
the Main Control PCB while
printing. Does it momently change
from 24V to 0V every about 1m of
printing?
Counter B 3 Check the voltage at J209-3 on Yes Replace the Counter B.
the Main Control PCB while
printing. Does it momently change
from 24V to 0V every about 1m of
printing?
7-18 K115sm7e1.doc
7. 2. 3. 5 “E-07” Cutter Motor Error

Cutter Motor, Cutter Motor
Controller PCB, Cutter Home
Position Sensor and DC Driver
PCB?
Cutter Home Position 2 Take test print (or initial cut) while No Replace the Cutter Home Position
Sensor checking the input signal from Sensor.
(PH22) Cutter Home Position Sensor
(signal code : 43) in the
Input/Output Checking Mode of
service mode
Does the status momently change
from “L” to “H” (then “H” to “L”
soon) when the Cutter operates?
Cutter Motor (M3) 3 Can the Cutter Motor (signal No Replace either Cutter Motor or
code : 69) be operated properly in Cutter Motor Controller PCB.
Or Cutter Motor the Function Checking Mode of
(PW7756)
Cutter Oil Supply 4 Can the Cutter Oil Supply No Replace the Cutter Oil Supply
Solenoid (SL2) Solenoid (signal code : 9F) be Solenoid.
operated properly in the Function
Checking Mode of Service Mode?
Oil Pad 5 Is the Oil Pad of Cutter Unit No Supply the Oil Pad with oil.
supplied with enough oil?

7-19 K115sm7e1.doc
7. 2. 3. 6 “E-09” Web End Error
Web Cleaner 1 Clear the Web End Error in any of Yes Measure the thickness of Web roll,
Service Modes 5-9E to A0 at first. and input that value in the Service
(See NOTE on the page 8-110 for Mode 5-A1.
the detail.) After that check if the No Replace the Web. Set the Web
web is remaining or not. Is the Operation Time back to 0hour
Web ended? 0minute 0second in the Service
Mode 5-A0.
Web Sensor (PH40) and Main
Control PCB (PW11520)?
Installation of Web roll 3 Is the Web roll correctly installed? No Install it correctly.
Web Sensor (PH40) 4 Check the input signal from the No Replace the Web Sensor.
Web Sensor (signal code 36) in
the Input/Output Checking Mode
of Service Mode.
Does the status change when the

actuator block the sensor light?
7. 2. 3. 7 “E-13” Paper Feed Motor Error


Paper Feed Motor, Paper Feed
Motor Controller PCB and DC
Driver PCB?
Paper Feed Motor 2 Can the Paper Feed Motor (signal No Replace either Paper Feed Motor or
(M2) code : 84) be operated properly in Paper Feed Motor Controller PCB.
the Function Checking Mode of
Or Paper Feed Motor Service Mode?
Controller PCB
(TP0362)
7-20 K115sm7e1.doc
7. 2. 3. 8 “E-14” Fuser Motor Error

Fuser Motor, Fuser Motor
Controller PCB and DC Driver
PCB?
Fuser Motor (M5) 2 Can the Fuser Motor (signal No Replace either Fuser Motor or Fuser
code : 87) be operated properly in Motor Controller PCB.
Or Fuser Motor the Function Checking Mode of
(TP0362)
7. 2. 3. 9 “E-16” Wire Cleaning Error

Its Mask Code is “0A”. See [8.1.8 Error Mask Mode (Sub Mode 7)] on page 8-114 for the detail.

Harness 1 Is the harness connected between No Connect it.
Wire Cleaning Motor, and DC
Driver PCB?
Wire Cleaning Motor 2 Can the Wire Cleaning Motor No Replace the Wire Cleaning Motor.
(M9) (signal code : 6C) be operated
properly in the Function Checking
Mode of Service Mode?
Screw Shaft of Image 3 Is the Screw Shaft of Image Yes Clean or replace the Screw Shaft.
Corona Corona dirty or transformed? (In
this case an over load is
detected.)
7. 2. 3.10 “E-21” Fuser Thermostat Error


Thermostat, AC Circuit Board 2
and Main Control PCB?
Thermostat 2 Is the Thermostat open circuited? Yes Replace the Thermostat.
AC Circuit Board 2 3 Does J107-1 on the AC Circuit No Replace the AC Circuit Board 2.
(PW4210) Board 2 show 24V?
And does J106-7 on the AC
Circuit Board 2 show 0V?
7-21 K115sm7e1.doc
7. 2. 3.11 “E-23” LED Head Cleaning Error
Its Mask Code is “0b”. See [8.1.8 Error Mask Mode (Sub Mode 7)] on page 8-114 for the detail.

Harness 1 Is the harness connected between No Connect it.
LED Cleaning Motor and DC
Driver PCB?
LED Cleaning Motor 2 Can the LED Cleaning Motor No Replace the LED Cleaning Motor.
(M8) (signal code : 83) be operated
properly in the Function Checking
Mode of Service Mode?
Screw Shaft of LED 3 Is the Screw Shaft of LED Head Yes Clean or replace the Screw Shaft.
Head Dirty or transformed? (In this case
an over load is detected.)
7. 2. 3.12 “E-26” Surface Potential Control Error

Harness 1 Is the harness connected to No Connect it.
Surface Potential Sensor (SPS1)
and Main Control PCB?
Image Corona 2 Set the Auto SP Control to OFF, No 1. Reinstall the Image Corona
Or Drum turn off/on the KIP9000, and take correctly.
printing. Is any abnormal image 2. Replace the Drum.
printed, such as “too dark”, “with
dark background” and “too light”?
Surface Potential 3 Can the error be fixed by Yes OK (Set the Auto SP Control back to
Sensor (SPS1) replacing the Surface Potential ON, and turn off/on the KIP9000.)
Sensor?
Main Control PCB 4 Can the error be fixed by Yes OK (Set the Auto SP Control back to
(PW11520) replacing the Main Control PCB? ON, and turn off/on the KIP9000.)
7. 2. 3.13 “E-27” Density Sensor Error

Harness 1 Is the harness connected to the No Connect it.
Density Sensor?
Density Sensor 2 Is the Density Sensor or LED No Clean them.
Or LED Head Head dirty with toner?
Density Sensor 3 Can the error be fixed by Yes OK
(PH44) replacing the Density Sensor?
7. 2. 3.14 “E-28” Density Control Error

Harness 1 Is the harness connected to No Connect it.
Density Sensor and Main Control
PCB?
Density Sensor 2 Is the Density Sensor or LED No Clean them.
Or LED Head Head dirty with toner?
Density Sensor 3 Can the error be fixed by Yes OK
(PH44) replacing the Density Sensor?
7-22 K115sm7e1.doc
7. 2. 3.15 “E-30” Developer Disconnection Error
Harness 1 Is the connector J84 connected? No Connect it.
(Is another end of this cable
connected to Main Control PCB?))
7. 2. 3.16 “E-43” RFID (IC Tag) Error

RFID PCB and Main Control
PCB?
RFID IC Tag Reader 3 Can the error be fixed by Yes OK
& WriterPCB replacing the RFID PCB?
7. 2. 3.17 “E-49” Developer Positioning Motor Error


Harness 1 Is the harness connected to the No Connect it.
Developer Positioning Motor?
Developer Positioning 2 Can the Developer Positioning No Replace the Developer Positioning
Motor (M4) Motor (signal code : 68) be Motor.
operated properly in the Function Yes Reinstall Developer Unit Position
Checking Mode of Service Mode? Sensor, Sensor Disc and Cam
correctly.
Developer Unit 4 Check the input signal from the No Replace the Developer Unit Position
Position Sensor Developer Unit Position Sensor Sensor.
(PH25) (signal code 2b) in the
Input/Output Checking Mode of
Service Mode.
Is the status “L” when the

Developer Unit is at the Home
Position and “H” when the unit is
not at the Home Position?
7. 2. 3.18 “E-F0” Folder Error

Communication error 1 Is any error message indicated No This is a communication error.
on the Operation Panel of 1. Turn off/on both KIP9000 and
Folder? folder.
2. Check the cables.
3. Replace the Main Control PCB.
Error of Folder 2 Is any error message indicated Yes This is an error of Folder.
on the Operation Panel of Turn off/on the Folder.
Folder? If the error still occurs, ask the
service for the Folder.
7-23 K115sm7e1.doc
7. 2. 3.19 “E-Fb” Flash ROM Error
Defect of Flash ROM 1 Can the error be fixed by Yes OK.
replacing the Flash ROM?
7. 2. 3.20 “C-01” Toner Cartridge Error

Toner Cartridge 1 Is the KIP Toner Cartridge Yes Install the new KIP Toner Cartridge.
installed to KIP 9000, which has
already been emptied?
7-24 K115sm7e1.doc
7. 3 Measures against Image Defects
7. 3. 1 Standard settings of image process items
The following list shows standard values of voltage and current supplied to each unit that is related
with image creation. When any image defect occurs, check if the following standard values are
satisfied on each unit.
Item Standard
Voltage for Grid Plate -XV (Not constant)
(The Surface Potential becomes about -650V when Auto SP Control is set to OFF.)
Current for Image -2.0 +/-0.05mA
Corona Wire
Current for Transfer 1.4 +/-0.02mA

10.2mm
Corona
DC Component for -250 +/-3V : Plain paper

Separation Corona -300 +/-3V : Tracing 15.0mm
-10 +/-3V : Film 14.0mm
Developer Bias Developer Roller -YV against Ground (Not constant)

(Negative Bias) (It becomes about -250V +/-3V when Auto Density
Control is set to OFF.)
Toner Supply Roller -350 +/-3V against Developer Roller voltage (-YV)
Regulation Roller (Center) -100 +/-3V against Developer Roller voltage (-YV)
Regulation Roller (Both sides) +365 +/-3V against Developer Roller voltage (-YV)
7-25 K115sm7e1.doc
7. 3. 2 Measures against each image defect
7. 3. 2. 1 Halftone is too light
Dirt on LED Head 1 Is the LED Head dirty? Yes 1. Take cleaning for the LED Head
pressing [EXP CLEAN] Key.
2. Check if the Pad Ass’y 2 of LED
Head is dirty or its life is ended.
Printing media 2 Can the issue be fixed if a newly Yes Advise the user to keep the media
unpacked media is used? avoiding the humidity.
Can the issue be fixed if a Yes Explain to the user that a
supported (specified) media is satisfactory image quality may not
used? be achieved if unsupported media is
used.
Image Corona 3 Is the Image Corona dirty? Yes Clean the Corona Wire, Housing
and Grid Plate. Replace the Corona
Wire and Grid Plate if too dirty.
Is the Corona Wire fitted into the No Correct the height of Corona Wire as
V shape groove of Corona it is not correct.
Heads? Or is the Cleaning Pads
properly holding the Corona Wire?
Does the current show -2.0 +/- No Adjust the current seeing [4.3.2
0.05mA, which is supplied from Checking & Adjustment of HVP1
HVP1 to the Image Corona? (For Image Corona)] on page 4-68.
Grid voltage 4 Does the voltage show -780 +/- No Adjust the voltage seeing [4.3.6
20V, which is supplied from HVP6 Checking & Adjustment of HVP6
to Grid Plate? (For Grid Plate of Image Corona)] on
NOTE : Set the Auto SP Control page 4-79.
for measuring the Bias value.
Eraser Lamp 5 Does the Eraser Lamp light No 1. Check if the harness of Eraser
correctly? Lamp has any abnormality.
2. Replace the Eraser Lamp if the
harness is OK.
Transfer/Separation 6 Is the Transfer/Separation Corona Yes Clean the Corona Wire and
Corona dirty? Housing. Replace the Corona Wire if
too dirty.
Does the current show -1.4 +/- No Adjust the current seeing [4.3.3
0.02mA. which is supplied from Checking & Adjustment of HVP3
HVP3 to Transfer Corona? (For Transfer Corona)] on page 4-
70.
Contact of Bias Pins 7 Are the Bias Pins on the Side No 1. Reinstall the Bias Pins to contact
and Bias Plate Plate surely contacted to the Bias them to the Bias Plate.
Plate of the Developer Unit? And 2. Lubricate the Bias Pins and the
are Bias Pins and Bias Plate Bias Plate with conductive
provided with enough conductive grease.
grease?
Position of Developer 8 Is the Cam of pressurizing No Check if the Developer Positioning
Unit against Drum mechanism placed at the correct Motor or the pressurizing
position for pressing the mechanism has any abnormality.
Developer Unit to the Drum?
Developer Unit 9 Is the Developer Roller covered No Disassemble the Developer Unit and
with the toner evenly? find the cause.
Bias Power Supply 10 Are the following voltages No Adjust each output properly seeing
supplied to the rollers in the following pages.
Developer?
Developer Roller : Page 4-84
Developer Roller : -250 +/-3V Toner Supply Roller : Page 4-87
Toner Sup. Roller : -350 +/-3V Reg. Roller Center : Page 4-90
Reg. Roller Center : -100 +/-3V Reg. Roller Both sides : Page 4-93
Reg. Roller sides : +365 +/-3V
NOTE : Set the Auto Density
Control for measuring the Bias
value.
Main Control PCB 11 Perhaps is the output from Bias No Replace the Main Control PCB.
(PW11520) Power Supply not adjustable in
spite of every possible trial?
Drum 12 Can the issue be fixed by Yes OK
replacing the Drum?
7-26 K115sm7e1.doc
7. 3. 2. 2 Halftone and solid black are too light
1 Turn off the KIP9000 in the Yes Transfer defect seems to be
middle of printing, draw out the the cause of this issue. Go
Process Unit, and check the to the following 2.
toner image on the Drum. No Development defect seems
Is a normal image created to be the cause of this
between Developer Unit and issue. Go to the following 9.
Transfer Corona?
Transfer Printing media 2 Can the issue be fixed if a Yes Advise the user to keep the
Defect newly unpacked media is media avoiding the
used? humidity.
3 Can the issue be fixed if a Yes Explain to the user that a
supported (specified) media is satisfactory image quality
used? may not be achieved if
unsupported media is used.
Transfer/ 4 Is the Transfer/Separation No Install it properly.
Separation Corona properly installed?
Corona 5 Does a leak of high voltage Yes Clean the whole Transfer
occur on the Transfer Corona? Corona. Replace the
Corona Wire if too dirty.
High Voltage 6 Is the resistance of High No Replace the High Voltage
Lead Line Voltage Lead Line between Lead Line.
HVP3 and Transfer Corona
about 10 ohms?
HVP3 7 Does the current show -1.4 +/- No Adjust the current seeing
0.02mA. which is supplied [4.3.3 Checking &
from HVP3 to Transfer Adjustment of HVP3 (For
Corona? Transfer Corona)] on page
4-70.
Main Control PCB 8 Perhaps is the output from No Replace the Main Control
(PW11520) HVP3 not adjustable in spite of PCB.
every possible trial?
Development Contact of Bias 9 Are the Bias Pins on the Side No 1. Reinstall the Bias Pins to
defect Pins and Bias Plate surely contacted to the contact them to the Bias
Plate Bias Plate of the Developer Plate.
Unit? And are Bias Pins and 2. Lubricate the Bias Pins
Bias Plate provided with and the Bias Plate with
enough conductive grease? conductive grease.
Developer Unit 10 Is the Developer Roller No Disassemble the Developer
covered with the toner evenly? Unit and find the cause.
11 Are the Counter Rollers on No Reinstall the Developer Unit
both sides of Developer Unit correctly.
correctly contacted to the ends
of Drum?
Position of 12 Is the Cam of pressurizing No Check if the Developer
Developer Unit mechanism placed at the Positioning Motor or the
against Drum correct position for pressing pressurizing mechanism
the Developer Unit to the has any abnormality.
Drum?
Toner Sensor 13 Is there enough toner in the No 1. Check if the harness of
Developer Unit? Toner Sensor has any
abnormality.
2. Replace the Toner
Sensor if the harness is
OK.
7-27 K115sm7e1.doc
Development Bias Power 14 Are the following voltages No Adjust each output properly
defect Supply supplied to the rollers in seeing the following pages.
Developer?
Developer Roller
: -250 +/-3V Toner Sup. Roller
Toner Sup. Roller : Page 4-87
: -350 +/-3V Reg. Roller Center
Reg. Roller Center : Page 4-90
: -100 +/-3V Reg. Roller Sides
Reg. Roller sides : Page 4-93
: +365 +/-3V

Control for measuring the
Bias value.
(PW11520) Bias Power Supply not PCB.
adjustable in spite of every
possible trial?
replacing the Drum?
7-28 K115sm7e1.doc
7. 3. 2. 3 Every image is too light
1 Turn off the KIP9000 in the Yes Transfer defect seems to be
middle of printing, draw out the the cause of this issue. Go
Process Unit, and check the to the following 2.
toner image on the Drum. No Development defect seems
Is a normal image created to be the cause of this
between Developer Unit and issue. Go to the following 9.
Transfer Corona?
Transfer Printing media 2 Can the issue be fixed if a Yes Advise the user to keep the
Defect newly unpacked media is media avoiding the
used? humidity.
supported (specified) media is satisfactory image quality
used? may not be achieved if
unsupported media is used.
Transfer / 4 Is the Transfer/Separation No Install it properly.
Separation Corona properly installed?
Corona 5 Does a leak of high voltage Yes Clean the whole Transfer
occur on the Transfer Corona? Corona. Replace the
Corona Wire if too dirty.
High Voltage 6 Is the resistance of High No Replace the High Voltage
Lead Line Voltage Lead Line between Lead Line.
HVP3 and Transfer Corona
about 10 ohms?
HVP3 7 Does the current show -1.4 +/- No Adjust the current seeing
0.02mA. which is supplied [4.3.3 Checking &
from HVP3 to Transfer Adjustment of HVP3 (For
Corona? Transfer Corona)] on page
4-70.
(PW11520) HVP3 not adjustable in spite of PCB.
every possible trial?
Development Contact of Bias 9 Are the Bias Pins on the Side No 1. Reinstall the Bias Pins to
defect Pins and Bias Plate surely contacted to the contact them to the Bias
Plate Bias Plate of the Developer Plate.
Unit? And are Bias Pins and 2. Lubricate the Bias Pins
Bias Plate provided with and the Bias Plate with
enough conductive grease? conductive grease.
Developer Unit 10 Is the Developer Roller No Disassemble the Developer
covered with the toner evenly? Unit and find the cause.
11 Are the Counter Rollers on No Reinstall the Developer Unit
both sides of Developer Unit correctly.
correctly contacted to the ends
of Drum?
Position of 12 Is the Cam of pressurizing No Check if the Developer
Developer Unit mechanism placed at the Positioning Motor or the
against Drum correct position for pressing pressurizing mechanism
the Developer Unit to the has any abnormality.
Drum?
Toner Sensor 13 Is there enough toner in the No 1. Check if the harness of
Developer Unit? Toner Sensor has any
abnormality.
2. Replace the Toner
Sensor if the harness is
OK.
7-29 K115sm7e1.doc
Development Bias Power 14 Are the following voltages No Adjust each output properly
defect Supply supplied to the rollers in seeing the following pages.
Developer?
Developer Roller
: -250 +/-3V Toner Sup. Roller
Toner Sup. Roller : Page 4-87
: -350 +/-3V Reg. Roller Center
Reg. Roller Center : Page 4-90
: -100 +/-3V Reg. Roller Sides
Reg. Roller sides : Page 4-93
: +365 +/-3V

Control for measuring the
Bias value.
(PW11520) Bias Power Supply not PCB.
adjustable in spite of every
possible trial?
replacing the Drum?
7-30 K115sm7e1.doc
7. 3. 2. 4 Uneven density between left and right
Image Corona 1 Is the Image Corona dirty? Yes Clean each Corona Wire, Housing
2 Is the Corona Wire fitted into the No Correct the height of Corona Wire as
V shape groove of Corona it is not correct.
Heads? Or is the Cleaning Pads
properly holding the Corona Wire?
Developer Unit 3 Are the Counter Rollers on both No Reinstall the Developer Unit
sides of Developer Unit correctly correctly.
contacted to the ends of Drum?
4 Is the Developer Roller covered No Disassemble the Developer Unit and
5 Is the thickness of toner in the unit No Check if the KIP9000 is placed
different between left and right? horizontally.
Dirt of LED Head 6 Is the LED Head dirty? Yes 1. Take cleaning for the LED Head
Eraser Lamp 7 Do all LED of the Eraser Lamp No Replace the Eraser Lamp.
light?
Main Control PCB 8 Can the issue be fixed by Yes OK
LED Head 9 Can the issue be fixed by Yes OK
replacing the LED Head?
7. 3. 2. 5 Foggy background
Developer Unit 1 Is there any foreign substance on Yes Remove it.
anywhere as Developer Roller
shaft, Bias Pins or Bias Plate,
which helps the Bias escaping to
the ground?
2 Is there more (or less) toner than Yes Check the Toner Sensor.
required around the Agitator in the
Developer Unit?
Image Corona 3 Print out the Test Pattern 4 (White Yes 1. Adjust the output voltage from
print). Does this print also have HVP6 to Grid Plate seeing [4.3.6
the foggy background? Checking & Adjustment of HVP6
(For Grid Plate of Image Corona)]
on page 4-79.
2. Adjust the output current from
HVP1 to Image Corona seeing
[4.3.2 Checking & Adjustment of
HVP1 (For Image Corona)] on
page 4-68.
Developer Bias 4 Are the following voltages No Adjust each output properly seeing
supplied to the rollers in the following pages.
Developer?
Developer Roller : -250 +/-3V Toner Supply Roller : Page 4-87
Toner Sup. Roller : -350 +/-3V Reg. Roller Center : Page 4-90
Reg. Roller Center : -100 +/-3V Reg. Roller Both sides : Page 4-93
Reg. Roller sides : +365 +/-3V

Control for measuring the Bias
value.
Main Control PCB 5 Perhaps is the output from Bias No Replace the Main Control PCB.
(PW11520) Power Supply not adjustable in
spite of every possible trial?
7-31 K115sm7e1.doc
7. 3. 2. 6 Foggy thick black lines (from LE to TE)
Image Corona 1 Is the Image Corona dirty? Yes Clean each Corona Wire, Housing
2 Is the Cleaning Pad correctly No 1. Check the Wire Cleaning Motor.
placed at either home position? 2. Check if the driving mechanism
of wire cleaner has any
abnormality.
3 Can wire cleaning operation be No 1. Check the Wire Cleaning Motor.
completed within about 90 2. Check if the driving mechanism
seconds? of wire cleaner has any
abnormality.
3. Replace the DC Driver PCB
(PW7755).
Developer Unit 4 Is the Developer Roller covered No Disassemble the Developer Unit and
7. 3. 2. 7 Clear thin black line (from LE to TE)

Image Corona 1 Is any foreign substance like Yes Remove it.
filament jointing the Grid Plate to
Drum?
2 Is the Image Corona dirty? Yes Clean each Corona Wire, Housing
Existence of foreign 3 Is any foreign substance like Yes Remove it.
substance filament jointing Drum to Corona
or LED Head?
Drum 4 Is there any black line or scratch Yes 1. In case of the black line on Drum,
on the Drum of which location is remove it with a dry cloth or
just the same as the location of attached “Drum Cleaning Blade”.
black line on the print? 2. In case of the scratch, find the
cause of scratch first then
replace the Drum. (Suspected
parts for scratch on Drum are
Stripper Finger, Corona, Transfer
Guide, and so on.)
NOTE
Wipe the Drum by correct way shown in below. Incorrect way will damage the Drum.
Correct Correct Incorrect
7-32 K115sm7e1.doc
7. 3. 2. 8 White lines (from LE to TE)
Image Corona 1 Is any foreign substance like Yes Remove it.
filament jointing the Grid Plate to
Drum?
Transfer/Separation 3 Is the Transfer/Separation Corona Yes Clean each Corona Wire and
too dirty.
Entrance of Fuser Unit 4 Is there any foreign substance Yes Remove it.
around the Fuser Entrance, which
may possibly scratch unfused
image side of printing media?
Drum 5 Is there any vertical scratch on Yes Find the cause of scratch first then
the Drum of which location is just replace the Drum. (Suspected
the same as the location of white parts for scratch on Drum are
line on the print? Stripper Finger, Corona, Transfer
Guide, and so on.)
7. 3. 2. 9 Image void
Developer Unit 2 If the voids appear on the same Yes Check the surface of Developer
printed sheet repeatedly from LE Roller.
to TE having constant interval,
measure the interval between 1. If dirty, clean it with the dry cloth.
voids. Is the interval about 2. In damaged, replace the
173mm? Developer Roller.
3 Do the voids randomly appear on Yes Check the toner level in the
the same printed sheet? Developer Unit. If it is too small,
check the Toner Sensor.
Drum 4 If the voids appear on the same Yes Check the surface of Drum.
printed sheet repeatedly from LE
to TE having constant interval, 1. In dirty, wipe off the dirt with a
measure the interval between dry cloth.
voids. Is the interval about 2. In damaged, Find the cause of
565mm? scratch first then replace the
Drum. (Suspected parts for
scratch on Drum are Stripper
Finger, Corona, Transfer Guide,
and so on.)
NOTE
The Drum needs to be wiped by correct way for avoiding its damage. See NOTE on former
page.
7-33 K115sm7e1.doc
7. 3. 2.10 Dirt on the backside
Toner Receiver under 1 Is the Toner Receiver under the Yes Remove the toner from the Toner
Developer Roller Developer Roller fully filled with Receiver. Check if the inside of
the toner? machine is dirty with the spilt toner
as well.
Transfer Guide Plate 2 Is the Transfer Guide Plate dirty? Yes Clean the Transfer Guide. Also
check if a proper gap is kept
between Drum and Transfer Guide
Plate seeing [5.13.15 Adjustment of
gap between Drum & Transfer
Guide Plate].
Roll Deck or Bypass 3 Can any dirt be found on the Roll Yes Wipe off the dirt. And find the cause
Feeder Decks or Bypass Feeder, which of dirt.
might cause the issue?
Fuser 4 Is the Fuser Entrance Guide Plate Yes Clean it.
dirty?
5 Is the melted toner sticking Yes Clean it off.
around the exit part (Fuser Roller,
Pressure Roller, Stripper Fingers
and so on)?
7. 3. 2.11 Offset print (caused by high temperature)

used.
Fuser 3 Check the setting values on the Yes 1. Set it correctly.
following setting items of 2. Or set it appropriately if a special
Adjustment Mode 0. media type is used.
No.4-10: Fusing temperature

(PPC)
(Tracing)
(Film)
Is the setting value on each item

correctly set?
4 Is the Web contacted on the Fuser No Install the Web correctly.
Roller correctly? Yes Perhaps the Web is not rotating. Go
to the following 5.
Web Motor (M11), Driver PCB
(PW10257), DC Driver PCB
(PW7755) and Main Control PCB
(PW11520)?
Installation of Web roll 6 Is the Web roll correctly installed? No Install it correctly.
Web Motor (M11) 7 Can the error be fixed by Yes OK
replacing the Web Motor?
Driver PCB 8 Does the voltage between J571-0 Yes 1. Replace the Driver PCB.
(PW10257) and J573-1 on the Driver PCB 2. Go to the following 10 if the error
show 24V? still occurs.
7-34 K115sm7e1.doc
7. 3. 2.11 Weak fusing
Printing media 1 Is the Media Selector set correctly No Set it correctly.
according to the actual media
type?
2 Can the issue be fixed if a newly Yes Advise the user to keep the media
used.
Fuser 4 Turn on the KIP9000, and check No Take troubleshooting for the fuser
the fuser temperature (Data seeing [7.2.3.1 “E-01” Fuser
No.00) in the Data Monitoring Temperature Rising Error] on page
Mode of Service Mode. Does the 7-16.
fuser temperature rise normally
when in warning up?
5 Check the setting values on the Yes Increase the setting value properly.
following setting items of
Adjustment Mode 0.

(PPC)
(Tracing)
(Film)
Is the setting value on each item

much lower than what it must be?
6 Is the pressure of Pressure Roller No Adjust the pressure properly.
proper?
NOTE
Fusing pressure can be increasing or decreasing the gap between Spring Hook 1 (1) and
Spring Hook 2 (2). It is adjusted to 2.5mm in usual case. And the width of “Nip” is adjusted to
8 - 9mm on center and 10 - 11mm on both sides (“Side” means 10mm from side edges of A0
or 36” paper).
10mm 10mm
2.5mm
2 10 - 11mm 8 - 9mm 10 - 11mm
7-35 K115sm7e1.doc
7. 3. 2.12 Leading margin defect (No leading margin)
Setting value of 1 Check the setting values on the No Change the setting value properly.
leading margin following setting items of
Adjustment Modes 0 and 1.
4-bb : Image placement

(For 2nd and later
copies during multi-
print)
5-00 to 0b : Image placement
for cut sheet media
5-0C to 17: Image placement for
Roll 1
5-18 to 23 : Image placement for
Roll 2
5-24 to 2F : Image placement for
Roll 3
5-30 to 3b : Image placement for
Roll 4
Is a proper setting value specified

in each Item Number?
Feeding rollers in the 2 Is the surface of feeding rollers Yes Replace the feeding rollers.
Roll Deck worn away as a result of long term
use?
Paper Gate Clutch 3 Is the Paper Gate Clutch slipping? Yes Replace the Paper Gate Clutch.
(MC5)
7. 3. 2.13 Jitter
Drum and Drum 1 If the jitter appear on the same Yes 1. Check if any foreign substance is
Driving Part printed sheet repeatedly from LE on the 178T Gear or 72T Pulley
to TE having constant interval, that drive the Drum.
measure the interval between 2. Check if any foreign substance is
voids. Is the interval about on the Developer Counter Roller
565mm? or the end of Drum (to which the
Developer Counter Roller
contacts).
Developer Roller 2 If the jitter appear on the same Yes Check the surface of Developer
printed sheet repeatedly from LE Roller.
to TE having constant interval,
measure the interval between 1. In , clean it with a dry cloth.
voids. Is the interval about 2. In damaged, replace the
173mm? Developer Roller.
Developer Unit 3 If the jitter appear on the same Yes 1. Check if either 30T Gear of
printed sheet repeatedly from LE Developer Unit is damaged.
to TE having constant interval, 2. Check if any foreign substance is
measure the interval between on the 30T Gear.
voids. Is the interval about 6mm?
Drum Motor (M1) 4 Can the issue be fixed by Yes OK
replacing the Drum Motor?
7-36 K115sm7e1.doc
7. 3. 2.14 Unsharpened image (Focus defect)
Installation of LED 2 Is a correct gap (focus distance) No Adjust the gap properly.
Head kept between LED Head and
Drum? (The gap will not be proper
if the Positioning Bars of LED
Head are bent.)
Transfer/Separation 3 Is the Transfer/Separation Corona Yes Clean each Corona Wire and
too dirty.
7. 3. 2.15 Uneven density between front and rear

Dirt of Image Corona 1 Is the Image Corona dirty? Yes Clean each Corona Wire, Housing
and Grid Plate. Replace each
Corona Wire and Grid Plate if too
dirty.
Transfer / Separation 2 Is the Transfer / Separation Yes Clean each Corona Wire and
Corona Corona dirty? Housing. Replace the Corona Wire if
too dirty.
LED Head 3 Is the LED Head firmly fixed with No Fix the LED Head firmly.
the screws?
4 If the uneven density appear on Yes Replace the LED Head.
the same printed sheet repeatedly
from LE to TE having constant
interval, measure the interval
between voids. Is the interval
about 8mm?
7-37 K115sm7e1.doc
7. 3. 2.16 Completely white
Position of Developer 1 Is the Cam of pressurizing No Check if the Developer Positioning
Unit against Drum mechanism placed at the correct Motor or the pressurizing
position for pressing the mechanism has any abnormality.
Developer Unit to the Drum?
Contact of Bias Pins 2 Are the Bias Pins on the Side No 1. Reinstall the Bias Pins to
and Bias Plate Plate surely contacted to the Bias contact them to the Bias
Plate of the Developer Unit? And Plate.
are Bias Pins and Bias Plate 2. Lubricate the Bias Pins
provided with enough conductive and the Bias Plate with
grease? conductive grease.
Connector of LED 3 Is any connector of LED Head Yes Connect it.
Head disconnected?
Transfer / Separation 4 Is the Corona Wire of Transfer Yes Replace it.
Corona Corona broken?
5 Is the Transfer/Separation Corona No Install it properly.
Unit properly installed?
6 Does a leak of high voltage occur Yes Clean the whole Transfer Corona.
on the Transfer Corona? Replace the Corona Wire if too dirty.
High Voltage Lead 7 Is the High Voltage Lead Line No Connect it properly.
Line connected between HVP3 and
Transfer Corona properly?
8 Is the resistance of High Voltage No Replace the High Voltage Lead
Lead Line between HVP3 and Line.
Transfer Corona about 10 ohms?
7. 3. 2.17 Completely black

Image Corona 1 Is the Corona Wire of Image Yes 1. Replace the Corona Wire.
Corona broken? Or is the Corona 2. Check if the Tension Spring in
Wire not enough tensioned? the Corona Block is deformed.
2 Is the Grid Plate dirty? Yes Clean it. Replace it if too dirty.
3 Is the Grid Plate installed No Install it properly.
properly?
HVP1 4 Does the current show -2.0 +/- No Adjust the current seeing [4.3.2
0.05mA, which is supplied from Checking & Adjustment of HVP1
HVP1 to Image Corona? (For Image Corona)] on the page 4-
68.
7-38 K115sm7e1.doc
Chapter 8
Service Mode
Page
8. 1 Service Mode 8- 5
8. 1. 1 General operation of Service Mode 8- 5
8. 1. 1. 1 Entering Service Mode 8- 5
8. 1. 1. 2 Selecting each Sub Mode 8- 8
8. 1. 1. 3 Cancelling the Service Mode 8- 9
8. 1. 2 Input Output Checking Mode (Sub Mode 1) 8-10
8. 1. 2. 1 Function 8-10
8. 1. 2. 2 Indication on the Operation panel 8-10
8. 1. 2. 3 Operation 8-11
8. 1. 2. 4 Signal code list 8-12
8. 1. 3 Data Monitoring Mode (Sub Mode 2) 8-20
8. 1. 3. 1 Function 8-20
8. 1. 3. 2 Operation 8-21
8. 1. 3. 4 Description of each Data 8-22
(1) Fuser Temperature (00) 8-22
(2) Input from Paper Size Sensors (01 to 04) 8-23
(3) Input from Cut Sheet Size Sensors (05) 8-26
(4) Roll remaining level (06 to 09) 8-28
(5) Humidity of inside the machine (0A) 8-28
(6) Input Voltage from Humidity Sensor (0b) 8-28
(7) Drum Surface Potential (0C) 8-29
(8) Input Voltage from SPS (0d) 8-29
(9) Temperature of inside the machine (0E) 8-29
(10) Toner remaining level Data (10 to 12) 8-30
8. 1. 4 Function Checking Mode (Sub Mode 3) 8-32
8. 1. 4. 1 Function 8-32
8. 1. 4. 3 Operation 8-33
8. 1. 5 Adjustment Mode 0 (Sub Mode 4) 8-35
8. 1. 5. 1 Function 8-35
8. 1. 5. 3 Operation 8-36
8. 1. 5. 4 Setting item list 8-39
8. 1. 5. 5 Description of each setting item 8-46
(1) Metric or Inch (No.00) 8-46
(2) Operation of Interface (No.01) 8-46
(3) Maximum cut length (No.02) 8-47
(4) Trailing margin of long print (No.03) 8-47
(5) Special paper size (No.04) 8-48
(6) Counting unit of Counter A (No.05) 8-49
(7) Counting unit of Counter B (No.06) 8-49
(8) Operation of Dehumidify Heater (No.07) 8-50
(9) Cut length of user Test Print (No.08) 8-50
(10) Standard / Special Setting Value Changing Modes
(No.09 to 0b) 8-51
(11) Cold Sleep ON/OFF (No.0C) 8-57
(12) Compensation of Analog Outputs (No.0d) 8-57
8-1 K115sm8e1.doc
(13) Fusing temperature (No.10 to 12) 8-58
(14) LED strobe time (No.13) 8-58
(15) Pre-Transfer LED /
Separation Corona OFF timing (PPC) (No.15) 8-59
(16) Pre-Transfer LED ON / OFF (No.16) 8-60
(17) Separation Lamp ON / OFF (PPC) (No.17) 8-60
(18) Separation Lamp ON / OFF (Tracing) (No.18) 8-61
(19) Developer Bias (applied when
Auto Density Control is set to OFF) (No.19) 8-62
(20) Current setting for the Image Corona Wire (No.1A) 8-62
(21) Current setting for the Grid Plate
(applied when Auto SP Control is set to OFF) (No.1b) 8-63
(22) Current setting for the Transfer Corona Wire (No.1C to 1E) 8-63
(23) Separation Corona DC component (No.1F to 21) 8-64
(24) Paper Feed Motor Speed (No.22 to 26) 8-64
(25) Fuser Motor Speed (Bypass feed) (No.27 to 32) 8-65
(26) Fuser Motor Speed (Roll 1) (No.33 to 54) 8-66
(29) Fuser Motor Speed (Roll 4) (No.99 to bA) 8-69
(30) Image placement (For 2nd and later prints) (No.bb) 8-70
(31) Paper Feed Clutch (MC6) ON timing (No.bC) 8-70
(32) Roll Paper Feed Clutches (MC1 to MC4) and
Bypass Feed Clutch (MC7) ON timing (No.bd) 8-71
(33) Paper Gate Brake (MC10) ON timing (No.bE) 8-72
(34) Sub Separation Blower ON / OFF (No. BF to C1) 8-73
(35) TE Margin Compensation (No. C2 to C5) 8-74
(36) Separation Lamp ON / OFF (Film) (No.C6) 8-76
(37) Image Enhancement Mode Selection (No.C7) 8-77
(38) Pre-Transfer LED / Separation Corona
OFF timing (Tracing) (No.C8) 8-77
(39) Pre-Transfer LED / Separation Corona
OFF timing (Film) (No.C9) 8-78
(40) Image Enhancement Level for single pixel (No.CD) 8-79
(41) Image Enhancement Level (No. CE) (applied when
IE Mode is OFF, or IE Category is “A1” in any IE Mode) 8-80
(42) Image Enhancement Level (No. CF to d7)
(applied when IE Mode is “low”) 8-82
(43) Image Enhancement Level (No. d8 to E0)
(applied when IE Mode is “medium”) 8-83
(44) Image Enhancement Level (No. E1 to E9)
(applied when IE Mode is “high”) 8-84
(45) LED Gumma setting (No.EA to EC) 8-84
8. 1. 6 Adjustment Mode 1 (Sub Mode 5) 8-85
8. 1. 6. 1 Function 8-85
8. 1. 6. 3 Operation 8-86
8. 1. 6. 4 Setting item list 8-89
8. 1. 6. 5 Description of each setting item 8-96
(1) Image placement for cut sheet media (No.00 to 0b) 8-96
(2) Image placement for Roll 1 (No.0C to 17) 8-97
(3) Image placement for Roll 2 (No.18 to 23) 8-98
(4) Image placement for Roll 3 (No.24 to 2F) 8-99
(5) Image placement for Roll 4 (No.30 to 3b) 8-100
(6) TE margin for Roll 1 (No.3C to 47) 8-101
(7) TE margin for Roll 2 (No.48 to 53) 8-102
(8) TE margin for Roll 3 (No.54 to 5F) 8-103
(9) TE margin for Roll 4 (No.60 to 6b) 8-104
(10) Length of image for Roll 1 (No.6C to 77) 8-105
(11) Length of image for Roll 2 (No.78 to 83) 8-106
8-2 K115sm8e1.doc
(12) Length of image for Roll 3 (No.84 to 8F) 8-107
(13) Length of image for Roll 4 (No.90 to 9b) 8-108
(14) TE margin for cut sheet media (Large) (No.9C) 8-109
(15) Web operation mode (No.9d) 8-110
(16) Web operation time (No.9E to A0) 8-110
(17) Web thickness (No.A1) 8-110
(18) Auto SP Control ON/OFF (No.A2) 8-111
(19) Target Surface Potential (No.A3 to A8) 8-111
(20) Acceptable potential range for Auto SP Control (No.A9) 8-111
(21) Auto Density Control ON/OFF (error check level) (No.AA) 8-112
(22) Compensation of Target Density (No.Ab) 8-112
(23) Minimum voltage gap between SP and Bias (No.AC) 8-112
8. 1. 7 Running Mode (Sub Mode 6 : Do not operate) 8-113
8. 1. 7. 1 Function 8-113
8. 1. 8 Error Mask Mode (Sub Mode 7) 8-114
8. 1. 8. 1 Function 8-114
8. 1. 8. 3 Operation 8-115
8. 1. 9 Test Print Mode (Sub Mode 8) 8-117
8. 1. 8. 1 Function 8-117
8. 1. 8. 3 Operation 8-118
8. 1. 8. 4 Description of each Setting Mode 8-122
(1) Print Start Mode (Sub Mode No.0) 8-122
(2) Print Number Setting Mode (Sub Mode No.1) 8-123
(3) Test Pattern Selection Mode (Sub Mode No.2) 8-124
(4) Media Source Selection Mode (Sub Mode No.3) 8-125
(5) Cut Length Selection Mode (Sub Mode No.4) 8-126
(6) Media Type Selection Mode : Bypass Feed only
(Sub Mode No.5) 8-127
(7) Interval Print Mode (Sub Mode No.6) 8-127
(8) Negative Mode (Sub Mode No.7) 8-128
(9) Mirror Mode (Sub Mode No.8) 8-128
8. 1.10 Special Operation Mode (Sub Mode 9) 8-129
8. 1.10. 1 Function 8-129
8. 1.10. 2 Indication of the Operation Panel 8-130
8. 1.10. 3 Operation/description of each item 8-131
(1) How to select each item 8-131
(2) Image Corona Wire Cleaning Mode (Item No.00) 8-132
(3) Cutter Cleaning Mode (Item No.01) 8-133
(4) LED Head Cleaning Mode (Item No.02) 8-134
(5) Image Corona Adjustment Mode (Item No.03) 8-135
(6) Pre-Transfer LED Adjustment Mode (Item No.04) 8-136
(7) Transfer Corona Adjustment Mode (Item No.05) 8-137
(8) Separation Corona Adjustment Mode (Item No.06) 8-138
(9) Positive Developer Bias Adjustment Mode
(Toner Collection Process) (Item No.07) 8-139
(10) Negative Developer Bias Adjustment Mode
(Print Process) (Item No.08) 8-140
(11) Toner Supplying Mode (Item No.09) 8-141
(12) Surface Potential Control Mode :
Manual execution of control (Sub Mode 0A) 8-142
(13) Density Lock Mode : Setting of Target Density (0b) 8-143
(14) Density Control Mode : Manual execution of control (0C) 8-144
8. 1.11 Special Setting Mode (Sub Mode A) 8-145
8. 1.11. 1 Function 8-145
8. 1.11. 2 Indication of the Operation Panel 8-145
8. 1.11. 3 Operation/description of each item 8-146
(1) Backup Data Clearing Mode (Item No.0) 8-146
(2) Software Counter Setting Modes (Item No. from 1 to 4) 8-148
8-3 K115sm8e1.doc
(3) Print interval for continuous long printing (Item No.5) 8-150
(4) Key Card Setting Mode (Item No.6) 8-152
(5) Folder Selection Mode (Item No.7) 8-154
8. 2 User Modes 8-156

8. 2. 1 User Mode 1 (Test Print) 8-157
8. 2. 2 User Mode 2 (Calendar setting) 8-159
8. 2. 3 User Mode 3 (Warm Sleep Mode ON / OFF & timer setting) 8-164
8. 2. 4 User Mode 4 (Cold Sleep Mode timer setting) 8-168
8. 2. 5 User Mode 5 (Automatic paper cut at power ON) 8-171
8. 2. 6 User Mode 6 (Transfer Support LED ON/OFF [Film]) 8-174
8. 2. 7 User Mode 7 (Alarm ON / OFF) 8-177
8. 2. 8 User Mode 8 (Choice of Standard / Special Print Mode [Plain paper]) 8-180
8. 2. 9 User Mode 9 (Choice of Standard / Special Print Mode [Tracing paper]) 8-184
8. 2.10 User Mode A (Choice of Standard / Special Print Mode [Film]) 8-188
8. 2.11 User Mode B (Selection of Image Enhancement Mode) 8-192
8. 2.12 User Mode C (Print on TE margin area) 8-195
8. 2.13 User Mode D (Auto SP Control ON/OFF :
Temporal clearance of E-26 error) 8-199
8. 2.14 User Mode E (Auto Density Control ON/OFF :
Temporal clearance of E-28 error) 8-202
8. 2.15 User Mode F0 to Fb (Fold settings for Bay Folder) 8-205
8. 3 KIP Diagnostics (Program used on field service) 8-212

8. 3. 1 Having a communication between KIP Diagnostics
on service laptop (PC) and KIP9000 8-212
8. 3. 2 Outline of Tabs on KIP Diagnostics 8-217
8. 3. 3 Description of each Tab 8-218
8. 3. 3. 1 Basic Information Tab 8-218
8. 3. 3. 2 Display Tab 8-219
8. 3. 3. 3 Setting Tab 8-221
(1) Changing the setting value of each Item Number 8-222
(2) Saving all present settings in Backup RAM file (Download) 8-224
(3) Uploading the Backup RAM file to KIP9000 8-226
8. 3. 3. 4 History Tab 8-229
(1) Clearance of error / jam histories 8-230
8. 3. 3. 5 Upload ROM Data Tab 8-231
(1) Update of firmware 8-231
8. 3. 3. 6 Test Print Tab 8-234
8. 3. 4 Description of Menu Bar and Tool Bar 8-235
8. 3. 4. 1 File 8-235
8. 3. 4. 2 Setting 8-235
8. 3. 4. 3 Tool 8-236
8. 3. 4. 4 Help 8-236
8. 3. 4. 5 Tool bar 8-236
8-4 K115sm8e1.doc
8. 1 Service Mode
8. 1. 1 General operation of Service Mode
8. 1. 1. 1 Entering Service Mode

1. Press and hold the [ * ] key on the Operation Panel, and press switches in the order as [ ],
[ ], [ ] and [ ] to enter the Service Mode.
2. The [MENU] key lights green and the Status Display

indicates present Firmware version when entering the
Service Mode. MENU ENTER ONLINE
Firmware version
8-5 K115sm8e1.doc
3. Press the [MENU] key once to move to “LED all lighting mode”.
PAPER DECK MF EXIT
1 2 3 4 D1
D2 PF
D3 D4
When in “LED all lighting mode”;

• All LED and segments on the Operation Panel light.
PAPER DECK MF EXIT
1 2 3 4 D1
D2 PF
D3 D4
• All LED and segments on the Media Indicator light as well at this time.

1 vellum / tracing
1 vellum / tracing
film film

2 vellum / tracing
2 vellum / tracing
film film

3 vellum / tracing
3 vellum / tracing
film film

4 vellum / tracing
4 vellum / tracing
film film
• All “in use” Indicators light as well.
in use
8-6 K115sm8e1.doc
4. Press the [MENU] key once again to finish “LED all lighting mode”, and it becomes possible to
select each Sub Mode. (The Input / Output Checking Mode (Sub Mode No.1) is selected firstly
at this time.)
PAPER DECK MF EXIT
1 2 3 4 D1
D2 PF
D3 D4
PAPER DECK MF EXIT
1 2 3 4 D1
D2 PF
D3 D4
5. Select the necessary Sub Mode referring to [8.1.1.2 Selecting each Sub Mode] on page 8-8.
8-7 K115sm8e1.doc
8. 1. 1. 2 Selecting each Sub Mode
Service Mode consists of 10 Sub Modes, and each of them has its own Sub Mode Number.
It is possible to access the necessary Sub Mode by indicating the concerning Sub Mode Number
on the Status Display.
Sub Mode Number Name of the Sub Mode

1 Input / Output Checking Mode
2 Data Monitoring Mode
3 Function Checking Mode
4 Adjustment Mode 0
5 Adjustment Mode 1
6 Factory Mode
7 Error Check Masking Mode
8 Test Print Mode
9 Special Operation Mode
A Special Setting Mode
The far left digit of Status Display indicates the present selection of Sub Mode Number.
Sub Mode Number (Example : Input / Output Checking Mode)
MENU ENTER ONLINE
Press the [ MENU ] Key necessary times until your required Sub Mode Number is indicated.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8-8 K115sm8e1.doc
8. 1. 1. 3 Cancelling the Service Mode
Press the [ ONLINE ] Key to cancel the Service Mode.
The LED of [ MENU ] Key is put out when cancelled.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
NOTE
Make sure to turn on/off the KIP9000 whenever the Service Mode is cancelled.
8-9 K115sm8e1.doc
8. 1. 2 Input Output Checking Mode (Sub Mode 1)
8. 1. 2. 1 Function
The status of input/output signals can be observed while operating the machine as usual
Refer to [8.1.2.4 Signal Code List] on and after the page 8-12 for the Signal Codes, the
Signal Names and the Description of each Signal.
8. 1. 2. 2 Indication on the Operation panel

The 1st digit from the left indicates “1” which is the mode number of “Input / Output Checking
Mode”.
The 2nd and 3rd digits from the left indicate the Signal Code presently selected.
The 5th digit from the left indicates the status of selected signal.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
Mode number of Input / Output Checking Mode

Signal Code
Status of signal
8-10 K115sm8e1.doc
8. 1. 2. 3 Operation
1. Enter the Service Mode, and indicate the Sub Mode Number “1” on the 1st digit from the left
pressing the [ MENU ] Key.
Sub Mode Number of Input / Output Checking Mode
MENU ENTER ONLINE
2. Both 2nd and 3rd digits from the left indicate the Signal Code presently selected. Indicate the
necessary Signal Code pressing [ ] Key (increment) and [ ] Key.
Refer to [8.1.2.4 Signal Code List] on and after the page 8-12.
Example : Input signal from the Exit Sensor to be observed.

Indicate its Signal Code “2F”.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
Signal Code of Exit Sensor
3. Print some image from the outer device. (Or make a test print.)
The 5th digit indicates the status of signal by either “L” or “H”.
The status of input signal sent from the Exit Sensor is “H” normally, and it changes “L” when
the sensor detects the paper.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8-11 K115sm8e1.doc
8. 1. 2. 4 Signal code list
Code Signal name IC Port Connector Signal Condition I/O F.C.
00 UPPER_SW U015 P30 J202-1 Top Rear Cover Signal Top Rear Cover Switch (DS6) I NO
detects door open when “H”.
01 RIGHT_SW1 U015 P31 J202-2 Right Side Door Signal Right Side Door Switch (DS7) I NO
02 RIGHT_SW2 U015 P32 J202-3 Toner Cover Signal Toner Cover Switch (DS8) I NO
03 MP_SRT U015 P33 J202-4 Bypass Start Sensor Signal Bypass Start Sensor (PH20) I NO
detects the media when “L”.
04 RP_SET1 U015 P34 J202-5 Roll Set Sensor 1 Signal Roll Set Sensor 1 (PH1) I NO
08 RF_CLK1 U015 P20 J202-9 Paper Feed Clock Sensor 1 Paper Feed Clock Sensor 1 I NO
Signal (PH13) generates the clock
pulse when the media is fed.
09 RF_CLK2 U015 P21 J202-10 Paper Feed Clock Sensor 2 Paper Feed Clock Sensor 2 I NO
0A RF_CLK3 U015 P22 J202-11 Paper Feed Clock Sensor 3 Paper Feed Clock Sensor 3 I NO
0b RF_CLK4 U015 P23 J202-12 Paper Feed Clock Sensor 4 Paper Feed Clock Sensor 4 I NO
0C PSEL_DT0 U015 P24 J202-13 Media Selection Signal 0 “Plain Paper” of Media I NO
(Plain paper) Selector is pressed down
when “H”.
0d PSEL_DT1 U015 P25 J202-14 Media Selection Signal 1 “Tracing Paper” of Media I NO
(Tracing paper) Selector is pressed down
when “H”.
0E PSEL_DT2 U015 P26 J202-15 Media Selection Signal 2 “Film” of Media Selector is I NO
(Film) pressed down when “H”.
0F PSEL_DT3 U015 P27 J202-16 Inch Media Switch Signal “Engineering” when “L”. I NO
(ENG. / ARCH.) “Architecture” when “H”.
10 SZDATA0 U015 P17 J202-17 Paper Size Sensor Signal 0 Paper Size Sensor 0 (PH5A, I NO
5B, 5C & 5D) detects the
media when “L”.
media when “L”.
media when “L”.
media when “L”.
media when “L”.
media when “L”.
media when “L”.
17 SZDATA7 U015 P24 J202-24 15” Size Sensor Signal Paper Size Sensor (PH41) I NO
on Roll 1detects the media
when “L”.
NOTES
1. I / O means input signal or output signal.
2. F.C. means Function Checking (Mode).

If the signal is provided with “OK”, concerning target (motors, blowers and so on) is operatable
in the Function Checking Mode. (Refer to [8.1.4 Function Checking Mode] on and after the
page 8-32.) If the signal is provided with “NO”, it is not operatable.
8-12 K115sm8e1.doc
18 PFMTR_LD U015 P70 J204-9 Paper Feed Motor Paper Feed Motor (M2) is I NO
Synchronous Signal rotating when “L”.
19 TNR_BTL U015 P71 J204-10 Toner Remaining Level Toner Remaining Level I NO
Detection Signal Sensor detects “No toner”
when “L”. (Receives the light)
1A FUMTR_LD U015 P72 J204-11 Fuser Motor Synchronous Fuser Motor (M5) is rotating I NO
Signal when “L”.
1b ------- U015 P73 J204-12
1C DEV_TNR2 U015 P74 J204-13 Toner Detection Signal 2 Developer Toner Sensor I NO
(Developer Toner Sensor) (TLS2) detects “No toner”
when “L”.
1d DEV_TNR1 U015 P75 J204-14 Toner Detection Signal 1 Hopper Toner Sensor (TLS1) I NO
(Hopper Toner Sensor) detects “No toner” when “L”.
1E MP_SW U015 P79 J204-15 Bypass Feeder Switch Bypass Feeder is open when I NO
Signal “H”.
1F EXIT_SW U015 P77 J204-16 Exit Cover Switch Signal Exit Cover Switch (DS5) I NO
20 ------- U015 P80 J203-1
21 SW_DATA0 U015 P81 J203-2 Switch Data Signal 0 I NO
22 SW_DATA1 U015 P82 J203-3 Switch Data Signal 1 I NO
23 SIG_IN U015 P83 J203-4 Reception PCB input Signal Communicating : Pulse I NO
Not communicating : H
24 ------- U015 P84 J203-5
25 DECK_SW1 U015 P85 J203-6 Roll Deck Switch Signal 1 Roll Deck Switch 1 (DS1) I NO
detects “Top Roll Deck open”
when “H”.
detects “Middle Roll Deck
open” when “H”.
detects “Bottom Roll Deck
open” when “H”.
28 ------- U015 P90 J203-9
29 ------- U015 P91 J203-10
2A T_SIZE0 U015 P92 J203-11 Cut Sheet Size Sensor 0 Cut Sheet Size Sensor 0 I NO
Signal (PH31, 33, 35 & 37) detects
the media when “L”.
2b DEVE_HP U015 P93 J203-12 Developer Unit Position Developer Unit Position I NO
Sensor Signal Sensor (PH25) detects the
Developer Unit is pressed to
the Drum when “L”.
2C PFUT_ST U015 P94 J203-13 Internal Transportation Unit Internal Transportation Unit I NO
Set Sensor Signal Set Sensor (PH24) detects
the Internal Transportation
Unit is set when “H”.
2d T_SIZE1 U015 P95 J203-14 Cut Sheet Size Sensor 1 Cut Sheet Size Sensor 0 I NO
Signal (PH32, 34 & 36) detects the
media when “L”.
2E P_SEPR U015 P96 J203-15 Separation Sensor Signal Separation Sensor (PH18) I NO
2F P_EXIT U015 P97 J203-16 Exit Sensor Signal Exit Sensor (LS2) detects the I NO
media when “L”.
30 ------- U015 P50 J205-1
J205-2
31 ------- U015 P51 J205-3
J205-4
32 IN_CNT_B U015 P52 Counter A (Upper) Control I NO
Signal Feed Back
33 IN_CNT_A U015 P53 Counter B (Lower) Control I NO
Signal Feed Back
NOTES

8-13 K115sm8e1.doc
34 DEV_ST U015 P54 J205-9 Developer Setting Status Connector of Developer is
Signal disconnected.
35 ------- U015 P55 J205-10
36 WEB_END U015 P56 J205-11 Web Sensor Signal Web Sensor detects “Web I NO
End” when “L”.
37 ------- U015 P57 J205-12
38 SW_R U017 P40 J208-A35 Power Switch OFF Control Power Switch (S1) is turned O OK
Signal OFF when “H” is outputted.
39 PF_SPH U017 P41 J208-B35 Paper Feed Motor Speed Paper Feed Motor (M2) O OK
Change Signal rotates fast when “H”.
It rotates slowly when “L”.
3A T_SL1 U017 P42 J208-A36 Bypass Feeding Roller Down Bypass Feeding Roller Down O OK
Solenoid Control Signal Solenoid (SL3) operates
when “H”.
3b T_SL2 U017 P43 J208-B36 Bypass Reversal Roller Bypass Reversal Roller Down O OK
Down Solenoid Control Solenoid (SL4) operates
Signal when “H”.
3C T_MTR U017 P44 J208-A37 Bypass Feeding Motor Bypass Feeding Motor (M10) O OK
Control Signal rotates when “H”.
3d POW_24V U017 P45 J208-B37 24V Relay I NO
3E SEPBLW4 U017 P46 J208-A38 Separation Assist Blower 4 Separation Assist Blower 4 O OK
Control Signal (BL12 & 16) rotate when “H”.
3F SEPBLW3 U017 P47 J208-B38 Separation Assist Blower 3 Separation Assist Blower 3 O OK
Control Signal (BL13 & 15) rotate when “H”.
40 INT1 U015 P60 J204-1 Interlock Signal 1 Thermostat (TS1) is open I NO
(Thermostat) when “H”.
41 INT2 U015 P61 J204-2 Interlock Signal 2 Thermostat (TS1) or some I NO
(Door / Thermostat) door is open when “H”.
42 WCMTR_OC U015 P62 J204-3 Wire Cleaning Motor Over Over current flows when “L”. I NO
Current Detection Signal
43 CUTHP_O U015 P63 J204-4 Cutter Home Position Signal Cutter Home Position Sensor I NO
(PH22) detects the Cutter is
at the Home Position when
“L”.
44 BIAS_ST U015 P64 J204-5 Developer Bias Output 2 Bias is normally supplied I NO
Detection Signal when “H”.
45 PWR_ST U015 P65 J204-6 Power Switch Detection Power Switch (S1) is ON I NO
46 DRMTR_LD U015 P66 J204-7 Drum Motor Synchronous Drum Motor (M1) rotates I NO
47 LEDMTR_OC U015 P67 J204-8 LED Head Cleaning Motor Over current flows when “L”. I NO
Over Current Detection
Signal
48 DISP_DT24 U016 P50 J214-1 Indication Data Signal 24 O NO
4A DISP_DT26 U016 P52 J214-3 Indication Data Signal 26 O NO
4B DISP_DT27 U016 P53 J214-4 Indication Data Signal 27 O NO
4C DISP_DT28 U016 P54 J214-5 Indication Data Signal 28 O NO
4D DISP_DT29 U016 P55 J214-6 Indication Data Signal 29 O NO
4E DISP_DT30 U016 P56 J214-7 Indication Data Signal 30 O NO
4F DISP_DT31 U016 P57 J214-8 Indication Data Signal 31 O NO
NOTES

8-14 K115sm8e1.doc
5A DISP_DT18 U016 P72 J214-19 Indication Data Signal 18 O NO
5B DISP_DT19 U016 P73 J214-20 Indication Data Signal 19 O NO
5C DISP_DT20 U016 P74 J214-21 Indication Data Signal 20 O NO
5D DISP_DT21 U016 P75 J214-22 Indication Data Signal 21 O NO
5E DISP_DT22 U016 P76 J214-23 Indication Data Signal 22 O NO
5F DISP_DT23 U016 P77 J214-24 Indication Data Signal 23 O NO
60 RY6 U017 P50 J208-B28 Rylay6 (RY6) Control Signal 36V is controlled when “H”. O NO
61 U005 CLK U017 P51 Shift Lock of M62362P CLK - NO
62 U005 DI U017 P52 Serial Data of M62362P DI - NO
63 U005 BS U017 P53 BS of M62362P - NO
64 U002 A U017 P54 Selector A of 74HC4051 - NO
65 U002 B U017 P55 Selector B of 74HC4051 - NO
66 U002 C U017 P56 Selector C of 74HC4051 - NO
67 ------- U017 P57 -
68 DPMTR U017 P20 J208-A29 Developer Positioning Motor Developer Positioning Motor O OK
Control Signal (M4) rotates when “H”.
69 CUTMTR U017 P21 J208-B29 Cutter Motor Control Signal Cutter Motor (M3) rotates O OK
when “H”.
6A DP_CHG U017 P22 J208-A30 Developer Release Power Power for releasing the O OK
Charge Control Signal Developer Unit is charged
when “H”.
6B CMTR_RST U017 P23 J208-B30 Cutter Motor Reset Signal Cutter is reset when “H”. O OK
6C WCMTR U017 P24 J208-A31 Wire Cleaning Motor Control Wire Cleaning Motor (M9) O OK
Signal rotates when “H”.
6D PRESBLW_H U017 P25 J208-B31 Paper Pressure Blower Pressure Blowers (BL4, 5, 6 O OK
(High Speed) &7) rotate in a high speed
when “H”.
6E WCMTR_DIR U017 P26 J208-A32 Wire Cleaning Motor Wire Cleaning Motor (M9) O OK
Reverse Signal rotates oppositely when “H”.
6F PRESBLW_L U017 P27 J208-B32 Paper Pressure Blower Pressure Blowers (BL4, 5, 6 O OK
(Low Speed) &7) rotate in a low speed
when “H”.
70 PFMTR_DIR U017 P30 J208-A33 Paper Feed Motor Reverse Paper Feed Motor (M2) O OK
Control Signal rotates oppositely when “H”.
71 ------- U017 P31 J208-B33
NOTES

8-15 K115sm8e1.doc
72 DRMTR_DIR U017 P32 J208-A34 Drum Motor Reverse Control Drum Motor (M1) rotates O OK
Signal oppositely when “H”.
73 EXBLW3 U017 P33 J208-B34 Exhaust Fan 3 Control Exhaust Fan 3 (BL17, 18 & O OK
Signal 19) rotate when “H”.
74 HV5 U017 P34 J209-1 Cleaning Roller Bias Control Bias is supplied when “H”. O OK
Signal
75 HV5_SEL U017 P35 J209-2 Cleaning Roller Bias Polarity Negative when “H”. O OK
Switch Control Signal Positive when “L”.
76 COUNTER_B U017 P36 J209-3 Counter B Control Signal Counter B (CNTB) takes 1 O OK
(Lower : 3 pins) count when “H”.
77 COUNTER_A U017 P37 J209-4 Counter A Control Signal Counter A (CNT A) takes 1 O OK
(Upper : 2 pins) count when “H”.
78 E_LAMP U017 P90 J208-A14 Eraser Lamp Control Signal Eraser Lamp lights when “H”. O OK
79 HOP_CL U017 P91 J208-B14 Toner Supply Clutch Control Toner Supply Clutch (MC11) O OK
Signal is ON when “H”.
7A ------- U017 P92 J208-A15 Separation Fan Control (Not controlled)
Signal (Low speed)
7B S_LAMP U017 P93 J208-B15 Separation Lamp Control Separation Lamp lights when O OK
Signal “H”.
7C EXBLW_L U017 P94 J208-A16 Exhaust Blower Control Exhaust Blowers (BL2 & 3) O OK
Signal (Low Speed) rotate in a low speed when
“H”.
7D SEPBLW1 U017 P95 J208-B16 Separation Fan Control Separation Fan (BL1) rotates O OK
7E D_BIAS U017 P96 J208-A17 Developer Bias Control Bias is supplied when “H”. O OK
Signal
7F EXBLW_H U017 P97 J208-B17 Exhaust Blower Control Exhaust Blowers (BL2 & 3) O OK
Signal (High Speed) rotate in a high speed when
“H”.
80 SIG_OUT U017 P10 J208-A24 Transmission PCB Output Communicating : Pulse O OK
Signal Not communicating : H
81 LEDMTR_ U017 P11 J208-A25 LED Cleaning Motor LED Cleaning Motor (M8) O OK
DIR Reverse Control Signal rotates oppositely when “H”.
82 BIAS_SEL U017 P12 J208-B25 Developer Bias Polarity Negative when “H”. O OK
Switch Control Signal Positive when “L”.
83 LEDMTR U017 P13 J208-A26 LED Cleaning Motor Control LED Cleaning Motor (M8) O OK
84 PFMTR U017 P14 J208-B26 Paper Feed Motor Control Paper Feed Motor (M2) O OK
85 DRMTR U017 P15 J208-A27 Drum Motor Control Signal Drum Motor (M1) rotates O OK
when “H”.
86 DRMTR_SP U017 P16 J208-B27 Drum Motor Speed Switch 213.5rpm when “H”. O OK
Control Signal 427 rpm when “L”.
87 FUMTR U017 P17 J208-A28 Fuser Motor Control Signal Fuser Motor (M5) rotates O OK
when “H”.
88 U016 P80 - NO
89 U016 P81 - NO
8A U016 P82 - NO
8B U016 P83 - NO
8C U016 P84 - NO
8D U016 P85 - NO
8E U016 P86 - NO
8F U016 P87 - NO
90 P_GATE U017 P60 J208-A2 Paper Gate Clutch Control Paper Gate Clutch (MC5) is O OK
Signal ON when “H”.
NOTES

8-16 K115sm8e1.doc
91 RP_FEED U017 P61 J208-B2 Paper Feed Clutch Control Paper Feed Clutch (MC6) is O OK
92 RP_CL U017 P62 J208-A3 Roll Paper Feed Clutch 1 Roll Paper Feed Clutch 1 O OK
Control Signal (MC1) is ON when “H”.
93 RP_CL2 U017 P63 J208-B3 Roll Paper Feed Clutch 2 Roll Paper Feed Clutch 2 O OK
94 RP_CL3 U017 P64 J208-A4 Roll Paper Feed Clutch 3 Roll Paper Feed Clutch 3 O OK
95 RP_CL4 U017 P65 J208-B4 Roll Paper Feed Clutch 4 Roll Paper Feed Clutch 4 O OK
96 FU_SL U017 P66 J208-A5 Fuser Solenoid Control Fuser Solenoid (SL1) is ON O OK
97 DEHUM U017 P67 J208-B5 Dehumidify Heater Control Dehumidify Heaters (H3, 4, 5, O OK
Signal 6, 7 & 8) are OFF when “H”.
98 HOP_MTR2 U017 P70 J208-A6 Toner Supply Motor 2 Toner Supply Motor 2 (M6) O OK
Control Signal (Hopper to rotates when “H”.
Developer)
99 SEPBLW2 U017 P71 J208-B6 Separation Assist Blower 2 Separation Assist Blower 2 O OK
Control Signal (BL14) rotates when “H”.
9A SAFE_RY U017 P72 J208-A7 Relay Control Signal Fuser is normal when “H”. O OK
Fuser is abnormal when “L”.
9B MF_CL U017 P73 J208-B7 Bypass Feed Clutch Control Bypass Feed Clutch (MC7) is O OK
9C RP_CL1 U017 P74 J208-A8 Roll Deck 1 Feed Clutch Roll Deck 1 Feed Clutch O OK
9D PG_BK U017 P75 J208-B8 Paper Gate Brake Control Paper Gate Brake (MC10) is O OK
9E PF_BK U017 P76 J208-A9 Paper Feed Brake Control Paper Feed Brake (MC9) is O OK
9F CT0_SL U017 P77 J208-B9 Cutter Oil Supply Solenoid Cutter Oil Supply Solenoid O OK
Control Signal (SL2) supplies the oil when
“H”.
A0 HV1 U017 P80 J208-A10 Image Corona Control Signal High Voltage is supplied to O OK
Image Corona Wire when “H”.
A1 HV_AC U017 P81 J208-B10 Separation Corona Control High Voltage is supplied to O OK
Signal Separation Corona Wire when
“H”.
A2 HV_TR U017 P82 J208-A11 Transfer Corona Control High Voltage is supplied to O OK
Signal Transfer Corona Wire when
“H”.
A3 TR_LAMP U017 P83 J208-B11 Pre-Transfer LED Control Pre-Transfer LED lights when O OK
Signal “H”.
A4 COOL_FAN1 U017 P84 J208-A12 LED Head Cooling Fan 1 LED Cooling Fans (BL8 & 9) O OK
Control Signal rotate when “H”.
A5 COOL_FAN2 U017 P85 J208-B12 LED Head Cooling Fan 2 LED Cooling Fans (BL10 & O OK
Control Signal 11) rotate when “H”.
A6 HV6 U017 P86 J208-A13 Grid Bias Control Signal High Voltage is supplied to O OK
the Image Corona Grid Wire
when “H”.
A7 HOP_MTR1 U017 P87 J208-B13 Toner Supply Motor 1 Toner Supply Motor 1 (M7) O OK
Control Signal (Cartridge to rotates when “H”.
Hopper)
A8 DIGIT0 U016 P20 J207-2 Digit Signal 0 O NO
PSEL_DG0 J207-1
A9 DIGIT1 U016 P21 J207-4 Digit Signal 1 O NO
PSEL_DG1 J207-3
AA DIGIT2 U016 P22 J207-6 Digit Signal 2 O NO
PSEL_DG2 J207-5
AB DIGIT3 U016 P23 J207-8 Digit Signal 3 O NO
PSEL_DG3 J207-7
AC DIGIT4 U016 P24 J207-10 Digit Signal 4 O NO
J207-9
AD DIGIT5 U016 P25 J207-12 Digit Signal 5 O NO
J207-11
AE DIGIT6 U016 P26 J207-14 Digit Signal 6 O NO
J207-13
AF DIGIT7 U016 P27 J207-16 Digit Signal 7 O NO
J207-15
NOTES

8-17 K115sm8e1.doc
B0 DISP_DT0 U016 P30 J207-17 Indication Data Signal 0 O NO
B8 SEL_A U016 P40 J207-25 Toner Remaining Level O NO

Sensor Selection Signal A
B9 SEL_B U016 P41 J207-26 Toner Remaining Level O NO
Sensor Selection Signal B
BA SEL_C U016 P42 J207-27 Toner Remaining Level O NO
Sensor Selection Signal C
BB EXIT_OUTA U016 P43 J801-35 Exit Sensor Output Signal “H” is outputted when P_EXIT O NO
(Ach) Signal is “L”.
BC BUZZER U016 P44 J207-29 Buzzer Control Signal Buzzer sounds when “H”. O OK
BD EXIT_OUTB U016 P45 J802-35 Exit Sensor Output Signal “H” is outputted when P_EXIT O NO
(Bch) Signal is “L”.
BE F_LAMP1 U016 P46 J208-A1 Fuser Lamp 1 Control Signal Fuser Lamp 1 (H1) lights O NO
when “H”.
BF F_LAMP2 U016 P47 J208-B1 Fuser Lamp 2 Control Signal Fuser Lamp 2 (H2) lights O NO
when “H”.
C0 DISP_DT32 U016 P10 J216-22 Indication Data Signal 32 O NO
C8 ------- U016 P90 J216-14
C9 (KCNT_DT2) U016 P91 J216-13 Kay Card Data Signal 2

Size DT1 DT2 DT3
A0 L L L
CA (KCNT_DT1) U016 P92 J216-12 Kay Card Data Signal 1 A1 H L L
A2 L H L
A3 H H L
CB (KCNT_DT0) U016 P93 J216-11 Kay Card Data Signal 0 A4 L L H
Other H L H
CC (KEY_CNT) U016 P94 J216-10 Kay Card Control Signal Kay Card takes 1 count when O OK
“H”.
CD ------- U016 P95 J216-9
CE ------- U016 P96
CF ------- U016 P97
NOTES

8-18 K115sm8e1.doc
D0 (KCNT_ST) U015 P J216-8 Kay Card Status Signal “L” when the card is set. I NO
D1 ------- U015 P J216-7
D2 ------- U015 P J216-6
D3 ------- U015 P J216-5
D4 ------- U015 P J216-4
D5 ------- U015 P J216-3
D6 ------- U015 P J216-2
D7 ------- U015 P J216-1
D8 ------- U001 P
D9 ------- U001 P
DA ------- U001 P
DB ------- U001 P
DC ------- U001 P
DD ------- U001 P
DE ------- U001 P
DF ------- U001 P
E0 IPRDY0 bit0 Printer Ready Signal Printer is ready when “L”. O NO
E1 IPREQ1 bit1 Print Request Signal “L” is outputted when the O NO

printer is available to receive
the Print Signal.
E2 LED_TR U001 P J208-A18 Toner Remaining Level Toner Remaining Level O OK
Detection LED Control Detection LED lights when
Signal “H”.
E3 ------- U001 P J208-B18 O
E4 WEB_MTR U001 P J208-A19 Web Motor Control Signal Web Motor rotates when “H”. O NO
E5 ------- U001 P O NO
E6 ------- U001 P O NO
E7 ------- U001 P O NO
E8 PAGEBL bit2 Page Enable Signal Print when “L”. O NO
E9 IBUSY1 bit3 Data Output Busy Signal Busy when “H”. O NO
EA IPRNT0 U001 P Print Start Signal Print is requested when “L”. I NO
EB TSTPRT bit4 Test Pattern Print Signal Test Paint is requested when O NO
“L”.
EC IPCUT0 U001 P Paper Cut Request Signal Paper Cut is requested when I NO
“L”.
ED COMSTB U001 P Command Reception Signal “L” is outputted when the O NO
printer receives the
command.
EE PA_ENT U001 P Leading Edge Sensor Signal Leading Edge Sensor (PH12) I NO
NOTES

8-19 K115sm8e1.doc
8. 1. 3 Data Monitoring Mode (Sub Mode 2)
8. 1. 3. 1 Function
It is possible to monitor several data as the input voltage to the DC Controller PCB or the
temperature of Fuser.

The 1st digit from the left indicates “2” which is the Sub Mode number of “Data Monitoring Mode”.
The 2nd digit indicates the Data Number.
The 4th, 5th and 6th digits indicate the data.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
Sub Mode Number of Data Monitoring Mode

Data Number
Data
The following list shows the selectable Data Number and its Description.
Data Number Contents Unit of the Remarks

indicated data
00 Fuser Temperature Centigrade
01 Input from Paper Size Sensors of Hexadecimal 0: Paper is detected.
Roll Deck 1 1: Paper is not detected.
05 Input from Cut Sheet Size Sensors Hexadecimal 0: Paper is detected.
1: Paper is not detected.
06 Roll 1 remaining level Every 1/8 is indicated.
07 Roll 2 remaining level
0A Humidity of machine inside %
0b Input Voltage from Humidity Sensor V
0C Drum Surface Potential V
0d Input Voltage from SPS V
0E Temperature of machine inside Centigrade
0F (Reserved)
10 Toner remaining level Data 1 X/8 0: Toner is not detected.
(1st checking) Hexadecimal 1: Toner is detected.
(2nd checking) Hexadecimal 1: Toner is detected.
(3rd checking) Hexadecimal 1: Toner is detected.
8-20 K115sm8e1.doc
Sub Mode Number of Data Monitoring Mode
MENU ENTER ONLINE
2. The 2nd digit from the left indicates the Data Number presently selected. Indicate the
necessary Data Number pressing [ ] Key (increment) and [ ] Key (decrement).
Refer to the list on the former page for the Data Number and the content.
Example : “Roll 1 remaining level” is to be checked.

Indicate its Data Number “06”.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
Data Number of “Roll 1 remaining level”
3. The 4th, 5th and 6th digits indicate the data of the selected Data Number.
Refer to [8.1.3.4 Description of each Data] on and after the page 8-22 for the description
of data of each Data Number,.
Example : 3/8 of roll media is still remaining.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
Data
8-21 K115sm8e1.doc
8. 1. 3. 4 Description of each Data
(1) Fuser Temperature (00)
Actual temperature of Fuser is indicated on 4th, 5th and 6th digits.

The unit is “oC”.
Dot of the 6th digit lights when the Fuser Lamp 1 is ON, and that of 5th one lights when the Fuser
Lamp 2 is ON.
Temperature of Fuser (Example : 140oC)
MENU ENTER ONLINE
Fuser Lamp 2 ON/OFF

Fuser Lamp 1 ON/OFF
8-22 K115sm8e1.doc
(2) Input from Paper Size Sensors (01 to 04)
Input from Paper Size Sensors (for roll media) is shown by the hexadecimal data.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
Hexadecimal data
To check the input situation, convert the hexadecimal into binary. Each of 8 digits of binary data is
related with size sensors as follows.
Example) When “70” is indicated.
70 01110000
PH5 (Paper Size Sensor Signal 0)
PH41 (15” Size Sensor Signal: Roll 1 only)
Not used (always “0”: Roll 2, 3 & 4)
“0” means “Paper is detected”, and “1” means “Paper is not detected”. In this example
PH5, 6, 7 and 8 detect the paper (ON) while PH9, 10, 11 and 41 do not detect (OFF).
Reference
This mode is available to check if the size sensor is broken or not.
Supposing you check the input condition when an A0 roll (841mm wide) is loaded to the 2nd
Roll Deck, PH9 is suspected to be broken if “50” is indicated as it means “0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0”.
(“40” will be indicated if the PH9 is working properly, which means “0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0”)
NOTE
The arrangement of sensors is different between Roll 1 and other Roll.
Note that the indicated hexadecimal data of Roll 1 will be different from that of other decks if
same roll paper is used.
Please refer to the explanation on and after the next page to avoid misunderstanding.
8-23 K115sm8e1.doc
(1) Roll 2, 3 & 4
PH5 is arranged at the most inside to detect B3 and 15” paper.
PH11
Center of the paper (36")
PH10
(A0 & 34")
RP_SET2, 3 and 4 PH9

(A3, 11" & 12") (B1 & 30")
PH5
(B3 & 15")
PH6
(A2, 17" & 18")
PH7
(B2 & 22")
PH8
(A1 & 24")
Paper Paper Sensors Hexadecimal

width PH11 PH10 PH9 PH8 PH7 PH6 PH5
36” 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00
841 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 40
728 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 60
594 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 70
515 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 78
420 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 7C
364 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 7E
297 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 7F
2 1 0 3 2
Weight of 2 2 2 2 2 21 20
bits (4) (2) (1) (8) (4) (2) (1)
Upper Digit (x10) Lower Digit (x1)

width PH11 PH10 PH9 PH8 PH7 PH6 PH5
36” 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00
34” 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 40
30” 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 60
24” 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 70
22” 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 78
18” / 17” 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 7C
15” 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 7E
11” / 12” 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 7F
2 1 0 3 2
Weight of 2 2 2 2 2 21 20
bits (4) (2) (1) (8) (4) (2) (1)
Reference : Relationship between Decimal and Hexadecimal numeric system
Decimal 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Hexa-decimal 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
8-24 K115sm8e1.doc
(2) Roll 1
PH5 is arranged between PH10 and PH11 to detect 900mm, 891mm and 880mm paper.
PH41 is arranged between RP_SET1 and PH6 to detect B3 and 15” paper.
(36")
Center of the paper PH10

(A0 & 34")
RP_SET1 PH9
(A3, 11" & 12") (B1 & 30")
PH41 PH5
(B3 & 15") (900, 891 & 880mm)
PH6
(A2, 17" & 18")
PH7
(B2, & 22")
PH8
(A1 & 24")

width PH41 PH11 PH10 PH9 PH8 PH7 PH6 PH5
36” 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00
900/891 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 40
/880
841 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 41
728 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 61
594 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 71
515 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 79
420 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 7d
364 (B3) 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 7F
297 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 FF
Weight of 23 22 21 20 23 22 21 20
bits (8) (4) (2) (1) (8) (4) (2) (1)

width PH41 PH11 PH10 PH9 PH8 PH7 PH6 PH5
36” 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00
34” 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 41
30” 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 61
24” 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 71
22” 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 79
18” / 17” 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 7d
15” 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 7F
11” / 12” 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 FF
Weight of 23 22 21 20 23 22 21 20
bits (8) (4) (2) (1) (8) (4) (2) (1)
Decimal 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
8-25 K115sm8e1.doc
(3) Input from Cut Sheet Size Sensors (05)
Input from Cut Sheet Size Sensors is shown by the hexadecimal data.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
Hexadecimal data
To check the input situation, convert the hexadecimal into binary. Each of 8 digits of binary data is
related with size sensors as follows.
Example) When “F0” is indicated.
F0 11110000
PH31 (Detecting 11”)
PH32 (Detecting A4S & 12”)
PH37 (Detecting A1S, 30”, 34” & 36”)
Not used (This is always “1”.)
“0” means “Paper is detected”, and “1” means “Paper is not detected”. In this example
PH31, 32, 33 and 34 detect the paper (ON) while PH35, 36 and 37 do not detect (OFF).
Reference
This mode is available to check if the size sensor is broken or not.
Supposing you check the input condition when an A1S cut sheet media (841mm wide) is
set to the Bypass Feeder, PH35 is suspected to be broken if “90” is indicated as it means
“1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0”.
(“80” will be indicated if the PH35 is working properly, which means “1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0”)
Refer to the explanation on the next page.
8-26 K115sm8e1.doc
Center of PH34 PH36
the paper (18") (A2S & 24")
PH31
(11")
PH32
(A4S & 12") PH33 PH35 PH37
(A3S & 17") (22") (A1S, 30", 34 & 36")
Paper width Cut Sheet Size Sensors Hexadecimal

PH37 PH36 PH35 PH34 PH33 PH32 PH31
36”/841mm 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 80
(A0 orA1S)
594mm (A2) 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 C0
420mm (A3S) 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 F8
297mm (A4S) 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 FC
2 1
Weight of bits 2 2 20 23 2 2
21 20
(4) (2) (1) (8) (4) (2) (1)
Paper width Cut Sheet Size Sensors Hexadecimal

PH37 PH36 PH35 PH34 PH33 PH32 PH31
36”/34”/30” 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 80
24” 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 C0
22” 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 E0
18” 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 F0
17” 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 F8
12” 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 FC
11”” 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 FF
2 1 0 3 2 1
Weight of bits 2 2 2 2 2 2 20
(4) (2) (1) (8) (4) (2) (1)
Reference: Relationship between Decimal and Hexadecimal numeric system
Decimal 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
8-27 K115sm8e1.doc
(4) Roll remaining level (06 to 09)
The volume of roll media remaining in each Roll Deck is shown by 8 levels.
4th, 5th and 6th digits show the remaining level “X/8”.
(8/8 means the maximum level, and 1/8 means the minimum.)
MENU ENTER ONLINE
Remaining level (Example : 1/8)
NOTE
Roll remaining level is not indicated if the Roll Deck is opened or if the printer is checking roll
size. “- -” will be indicated in these cases.
(5) Humidity of inside the machine (0A)
Actual humidity of inside the machine is indicated. The unit is “%”.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
Humidity (Example : 40%)
(6) Input Voltage from Humidity Sensor (0b)
Input voltage from Humidity Sensor is indicated. The unit is “V”.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
Input voltage (Example : 0.74V)
8-28 K115sm8e1.doc
(7) Drum Surface Potential (0C)
The Potential of Drum surface detected by the Surface Potential Sensor (SPS) is indicated.
The unit is “V”.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
Drum Surface Potential (Example : 840V)
(8) Input Voltage from SPS (0d)
The input voltage from the Surface Potential Sensor (SPS) is indicated. The unit is “V”.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
Input voltage (Example : 4.10V)
(9) Temperature of inside the machine (0E)
The actual temperature of inside the machine is indicated. The unit is “oC”.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
Temperature (Example : 35oC)
8-29 K115sm8e1.doc
(10) Toner remaining level Data (10 to 12)
The Toner Remaining Level in the Toner Cartridge is shown by 8 levels.

The 4th digit shows the remaining level “X/8”. (Only “X” is indicated.)
And the input from Toner Remaining Level Sensors (8 pieces) is shown by hexadecimal data on
5th and 6th digits, which can be used to check if the Toner Remaining Level Sensors are
functioning correctly.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
Hexadecimal
Remaining level (Example : 7/8)
To check the input condition, convert the hexadecimal into binary. Each of 8 digits of binary data is
related with toner sensors as follows.
Example) When “7F” is indicated.
7F 01111111
S511 : Toner Volume Detection Signal 0 (Level 1/8)
“0” means “Toner is not detected”, and “1” means “Toner is detected”.
Therefore, the machine judges the remaining level of toner as “7/8”.
Toner Paper Sensors Hexadecimal

Remaining S518 S517 S516 S515 S514 S513 S512 S511
Level
8/8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 FF
7/8 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 7F
6/8 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 3F
5/8 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1F
4/8 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0F
3/8 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 07
2/8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 03
1/8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 01
Weight of 23 22 21 20 23 22 21 20
bits (8) (4) (2) (1) (8) (4) (2) (1)
Decimal 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
8-30 K115sm8e1.doc
NOTE
KIP9000 checks the Toner Remaining Level in the following 3 situations.
1. Right after turning on.

2. After opening/closing the Toner Cover.
3. Every 30m print
Checking is performed 3 times keeping an interval between checks. (Toner Cartridge

continues to rotate during the interval.)
Motor ON 1st checking Interval 2nd checking Interval 3rd checking

(Motor ON) (Motor ON)
KIP9000 takes average of these 3 levels and finally judges the Toner Remaining Level.
Example) 1st checking 7/8
2nd checking 2/8 Printer judges the Toner Remaining Level as 4/8.
3rd checking 4/8
Data No. “10” is the remaining level detected in the latest “1st checking”.
Data No. “11” is the remaining level detected in the latest “2nd checking”.
Data No. “12” is the remaining level detected in the latest “3rd checking”.
8-31 K115sm8e1.doc
8. 1. 4 Function Checking Mode (Sub Mode 3)
8. 1. 4. 1 Function
An individual electric component can be operated singularly to check its operation in the Function
Checking Mode.
Refer to [8.1.2.4 Signal code list] on and after the page 8-12 for the Signal Code and its
target component.
NOTES
(1) Only 1 component is available to operate at one time except for the Image Corona.
When [Image Corona Control Signal (Signal Code : A0)] is operated, [Grid Bias Control
Signal (A6)] is automatically operated same time.
(Even if [Grid Bias Control Signal] is operated, [Image Corona Control Signal] is not
operated same time.)
(2) Do not keep on operating the following Coronas so long time!

The Drum does not rotate while the Corona is discharging. If the following Corona Units
keep on discharging long time, it will lead to the damage of Drum as one point of Drum
surface is strongly charged.
Image Corona Control Signal (Signal Code : A0)
Grid Bias Control Signal (A6)
Transfer Corona Control Signal (A2)
Separation Corona Control Signal (A1)
(3) Do not operate the following lamps so long!

Cooling fans do not operate while the lamp is lighting. It will result in the breakage of lamp
as it will be heated up so much.
Eraser Lamp Control Signal (Signal Code : 78)
Separation Lamp Control Signal (7b)
Pre-Transfer LED Control Signal (A3)
(4) Do not operate the Fuser Lamps so long!

Fuser Roller and surrounding parts will be heated up so much and will be broken.
Fuser Lamp 1 Control Signal (Signal Code : BE)
Fuser Lamp 2 Control Signal (Signal Code : BF)

The 1st digit from the left indicates “3” which is the Sub Mode number of “Function Checking
Mode”.
The 2nd and 3rd digits from the left indicate the Signal Code presently selected.
The 5th and 6th digits indicate the status of the selected component.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
Sub Mode Number of Function Checking Mode

Signal Code
Status of the selected component
8-32 K115sm8e1.doc
Sub Mode Number of Function Checking Mode
MENU ENTER ONLINE
2. The 2nd and 3rd digits from the left indicate the Signal Code presently selected. Indicate the
necessary Signal Code pressing [ ] Key (increment) and [ ] Key (decrement).
Refer to [8.1.2.4 Signal code list] on and after the page 8-12 for Signal Codes and its
target component.
Example : Separation Lamp is to be lit alone.

Indicate its Signal Code is “7b”.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
Signal Code to operate the Separation Lamp
NOTE
All the Signal Codes in the list can be selected, but note that not all the component can be
operated in the Function Checking Mode. (For example sensor’s Signal Code can be selected
but the sensor is inactive.)
• Nothing is indicated on 5th and 6th digits if any “inactive” Signal Code is selected.
• Hyphens (- -) are indicated if any “active” Signal Code is selected.
Check the [F.C.] column in the Signal code list to know active/inactive. If provided with “OK” in
F.C., this component is active and can be operated in the Function Checking Mode.
8-33 K115sm8e1.doc
3. Press the [ ENTER ] Key to operate the selected component. Hyphens on 5th and 6th digits
flash when the component is operating.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
Hyphens flash when the Separation Lamp is lighting.
4. Press the [ ENTER ] Key again to stop the operation. Hyphens on 5th and 6th digits stop
flashing.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
NOTES
It is impossible to cancel the Service Mode if some component is operating in the Function
Checking Mode. Stop the operation of component first then cancel the Service Mode.
8-34 K115sm8e1.doc
8. 1. 5 Adjustment Mode 0 (Sub Mode 4)
8. 1. 5. 1 Function
Several fundamental printer settings/parameters can be changed.
Refer to [8.1.5.4 Setting item list] on and after the page 8-39 for the brief information of the setting
items.
Please refer to [8.1.5.5 Description of each setting item] on and after the page 8-46 for the detail
of the setting items.

The 1st digit from the left indicates “4” which is the Sub Mode Number of “Adjustment Mode 0”.
The 2nd and 3rd digits from the left indicate the Item Number.
The 4th, 5th and 6th digits indicate the setting value of the selected Item Number.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
Sub Mode Number of Adjustment Mode 0

Item Number
Setting Value
8-35 K115sm8e2.doc
MENU ENTER ONLINE
2. The 2nd and 3rd digits from the left indicate the Item Number presently selected. Indicate the
necessary Item Number pressing [ ] Key (increment) and [ ] Key (decrement).
Please refer to [8.1.5.4 Setting item list] on and after the page 8-39 to know the
description of setting.
Example : Fusing temperature for the plain paper is to be adjusted.

Indicate its Item Number “10”.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
Item Number to adjust the “Fusing temperature for plain paper”
8-36 K115sm8e2.doc
3. Press the [ENTER] Key after selecting the necessary Item Number. The setting value on 4th,
5th and 6th digits flashes and becomes changeable.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
The setting value flashes and becomes changeable.
4. Change the setting value pressing [ ] Key (increment) and [ ] Key (decrement).
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8-37 K115sm8e2.doc
5. Press the [ ENTER ] Key to decide the new setting value. The setting value stops flashing
when decided.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
NOTE
If you press the [ ONLINE ] Key before deciding the new value, the former setting value is
recovered.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
(Former setting value is recovered.)
8-38 K115sm8e2.doc
8. 1. 5. 4 Setting item list
Item Setting target Default Special Adjustable Unit of Refer
No. value setting Range setting to
value page;
00 Metric or inch NO A0 or 36 8-46
01 Operation of Interface NO 0 to 2 8-46
02 Maximum cut length NO 6 or 24 m 8-47
03 Trailing margin of long print NO On or OFF 8-47
04 Special paper size NO 900/891/880 mm 8-48
05 Counting unit of Counter A NO 0 to 3 8-49
06 Counting unit of Counter B NO 0 to 3 8-49
07 Operation of Dehumidify Heater NO 0 or 1 8-50
08 Cut length of user Test Print NO A0 to b5 8-50
48 to 8.5
09 Standard / Special Setting Value Changing Mode NO 0 or 1 8-51
(PPC)
0A Standard / Special Setting Value Changing Mode NO 0 or 1 8-51
(Tracing paper)
0b Standard / Special Setting Value Changing Mode NO 0 or 1 8-51
(Film)
0C Cold Sleep ON/OFF NO On or OFF 8-57
0d Compensation of Analog Outputs NO 8-57
0E Reserved NO
0F Reserved NO
10 Fusing temperature (PPC) OK 150 to 190 1oC 8-58
o
11 Fusing temperature (Tracing) OK 150 to 190 1C 8-58
12 Fusing temperature (Film) OK 150 to 190 1oC 8-58
13 LED strobe time NO 0 to 42 1 micro- 8-58
sec.
14 Reserved
15 Pre-Transfer LED / Separation Corona OFF timing NO 0 or 1 8-59
(PPC)
16 Pre-Transfer LED ON / OFF NO 0 or 1 8-60
17 Separation Lamp ON / OFF (PPC) NO 0 or 1 8-60
18 Separation Lamp ON / OFF (Tracing) NO 0 or 1 8-61
19 Developer Bias (applied when Auto Density NO 000 to 0FF Hex. 8-62
Control is set to OFF)
1A Current setting for the Image Corona Wire NO 000 to 0FF Hex. 8-62
1b Current setting for the Grid Plate (applied when NO 000 to 500 Hex. 8-63
Auto SP Control is set to OFF)
1C Current setting for the Transfer Corona (PPC) OK 000 to 500 Hex. 8-63
1d Current setting for the Transfer Corona (Tracing) OK 000 to 500 Hex. 8-63
1E Current setting for the Transfer Corona (Film) OK 000 to 500 Hex. 8-63
1F Separation Corona DC component (PPC) OK 000 to 500 Hex. 8-64
20 Separation Corona DC component (Tracing) OK 000 to 500 Hex. 8-64
21 Separation Corona DC component (Film) OK 000 to 500 Hex. 8-64
22 Paper Feed Motor speed (Bypass feed) NO -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-64
23 Paper Feed Motor speed (Roll 1) NO -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-64
27 Fuser Motor speed OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-65
(Bypass feed / PPC / Large size)
(Bypass feed / PPC / Medium size)
(Bypass feed / PPC / Small size)
2A Fuser Motor speed OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-65
(Bypass feed / PPC / Smallest size)
8-39 K115sm8e2.doc
value page;
2b Fuser Motor speed OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-65
(Bypass feed / Tracing / Large size)
2C Fuser Motor speed OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-65
(Bypass feed / Tracing / Medium size)
2d Fuser Motor speed OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-65
(Bypass feed / Tracing / Small size)
2E Fuser Motor speed OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-65
(Bypass feed / Tracing / Smallest size)
2F Fuser Motor speed OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-65
(Bypass feed / Film / Large size)
(Bypass feed / Film / Medium size)
(Bypass feed / Film / Small size)
(Bypass feed / Film / Smallest size)
(Roll 1 / PPC / Large size / 0 to 2m)
8-40 K115sm8e2.doc
value page;
(Roll 1 / PPC / Medium size)
(Roll 1 / PPC / Small size)
(Roll 1 / PPC / Smallest size)
(Roll 1 / Tracing / Large size)
(Roll 1 / Tracing / Medium size)
(Roll 1 / Tracing / Small size)
(Roll 1 / Tracing / Smallest size)
(Roll 1 / Film / Large size)
(Roll 1 / Film / Medium size)
(Roll 1 / Film / Small size)
(Roll 1 / Film / Smallest size)
8-41 K115sm8e2.doc
value page;
8-42 K115sm8e2.doc
value page;
A0 Fuser Motor speed OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-69
8-43 K115sm8e2.doc
value page;
AA Fuser Motor speed OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-69
Ab Fuser Motor speed OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-69
AC Fuser Motor speed OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-69
Ad Fuser Motor speed OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-69
AE Fuser Motor speed OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-69
AF Fuser Motor speed OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-69
b0 Fuser Motor speed OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-69
bA Fuser Motor speed OK -1.0% to 1.0% 0.05% 8-69
bb Image placement NO 0 to 100 0.1mm 8-70
(For 2nd and later prints)
bC Paper Feed Clutch (MC6) ON timing NO 1 to 30 1 msec 8-70
bd Roll Paper Feed Clutches (MC1 to MC4) and NO 1 to 20 1 msec 8-71
Bypass Feed Clutch (MC7) ON timing
bE Paper Gate Brake (MC10) ON timing NO 1 to 20 1 msec 8-72
bF Sub Separation Blower ON / OFF (PPC) NO 0 or 1 8-73
C0 Sub Separation Blower ON / OFF (Tracing) NO 0 or 1 8-73
C1 Sub Separation Blower ON / OFF (Film) NO 0 or 1 8-73
C2 Trailing Margin compensation (Roll 1) NO 0 to 3 8-74
C6 Separation Lamp ON / OFF (Film) NO 0 or 1 8-76
C7 Image Enhancement Mode Selection NO 0 to 3 8-77
C8 Pre-Transfer LED / Separation Corona OFF timing NO 0 or 1 8-77
(Tracing)
C9 Pre-Transfer LED / Separation Corona OFF timing NO 0 or 1 8-78
(Film)
CA Reserved NO
Cb Reserved NO
CC Reserved NO
CD Image Enhancement Level for single pixel 0 to 7 8-79
8-44 K115sm8e2.doc
value page;
CE Image Enhancement Level (applied when IE 0 to 7 8-80
Mode is OFF, or IE Category is “A1” in any IE
Mode )
CF Image Enhancement Level (applied to IE 0 to 7 8-82
Category A2 when IE Mode is “low”)
d0 Image Enhancement Level (applied to IE 0 to 7 8-82
Category B1 when IE Mode is “low”)
Category A2 when IE Mode is “medium”)
dA Image Enhancement Level (applied to IE 0 to 7 8-83
db Image Enhancement Level (applied to IE 0 to 7 8-83
dC Image Enhancement Level (applied to IE 0 to 7 8-83
Category B1 when IE Mode is “medium”)
dd Image Enhancement Level (applied to IE 0 to 7 8-83
dE Image Enhancement Level (applied to IE 0 to 7 8-83
dF Image Enhancement Level (applied to IE 0 to 7 8-83
E0 Image Enhancement Level (applied to IE 0 to 7 8-83
Category A2 when IE Mode is “high”)
Category B1 when IE Mode is “high”)
EA LED Gumma setting for bit “0” 0 to 100 % 8-84
Eb LED Gumma setting for bit “1” % 8-84
EC LED Gumma setting for bit “2” % 8-84
8-45 K115sm8e2.doc
8. 1. 5. 5 Description of each setting item
(1) Metric or Inch (No.00)
Either metric (ISO) or inch (ANSI) can be selected as the print format.
Selectable setting values are “A0” and “36”.
Setting value Description

A0 Metric (ISO)
36 Inch (ANSI)
(2) Operation of Interface (No.01)

It is possible to specify how the Interface operates.
Selectable setting values are “0”, “1” and “2”.

0 Channels A and B of Interface communicates with the scanner and the
controller alternately.
1 Channel A of Interface communicates with the scanner.
(Channel B is not used.)
2 Channel B of Interface communicates with the controller
(Channel A is not used.)
Image scanner
A Channel
PAPER
WI RE-CLEAN DECK
EXP-CLEAN 1 2 3 MF
4
CUT D1
SELECT EXIT
D2
D3 PF
COPY
D4 DENSITY
MENU ←
→
*
ENTER
RESE T
3 4
B Channel
Controller
NOTE
Channel A is not used.
8-46 K115sm8e2.doc
(3) Maximum cut length (No.02)
Maximum cut length can be set to either 6m or 24m.

06 6m is the maximum cut length.
24 24m is the maximum cut length.
(4) Trailing margin of long print (No.03)
If necessary, a trailing margin of 260mm long can be added to 3m or longer print.

On If print is 3m or longer, a trailing margin of 260mm long is added.
OFF No additional trailing margin is added to the long print.
Setting value is OFF 100 Setting value is On
100
50
50
0
0
Direction of
print
3m or longer
print
C
260mm
8-47 K115sm8e2.doc
(5) Special paper size (No.04)
The size sensor of Roll Deck 1 located 2nd from the outside is available to detect special paper
sizes (widths) 900mm, 891mm and 880mm. When a special size is detected, KIP9000 recognizes
its size as any of 900mm, 891mm or 880mm according to the selection in this No.04.
(If No.04 is set to “880”, special size roll is recognized as 880mm wide even if it is 891mm or
900mm.)

900 Special width of roll paper is recognized as 900mm wide.
NOTE
The PH5 of Roll 1 detects 880/891/900 as it is located between PH10 (A0/34”) and PH11
(36”), but that of Roll 2/3/4 detedcts B3/15” as it is located between RP_SET (A3/11”/12”) and
PH6 (A2/17”/18”). (In case of Roll 1, B3/15” is detected by PH41 located between RP_SET
(A3/11”/12”) and PH6 (A2/17”/18”).)
Sensor arrangement (Roll Decks 2, 3 and 4)

PH11
PH10
(A0 & 34")
RP_SET2, 3 and 4 PH9

(A3, 11" & 12") (B1 & 30")
PH5
(B3 & 15")
PH6
(A2, 17" & 18")
PH7
(B2 & 22")
PH8
(A1 & 24")
Sensor arrangement (Roll Deck 1 only)

PH10
(A0 & 34")
RP_SET1 PH9
(A3, 11" & 12") (B1 & 30")
PH41 PH5
(B3 & 15") (900, 891 & 880mm)
PH6
(A2, 17" & 18")
PH7
(B2, & 22")
PH8
(A1 & 24")
8-48 K115sm8e2.doc
(6) Counting unit of Counter A (No.05)
Counting unit of the Counter A (Upper Counter) can be specified. Selectable setting values rely on
“metric / inch setting (Item No.00)”.
• Selectable setting values in No. 05 are 0, 1, 2 and 3 if No.00 is set to “metric”.
• Selectable setting values in No. 05 are 0 and 1 if No.00 is set to “inch”.
When No.00 is set to “metric”;

0 Linear counter: 1m / count
1 Linear counter: 0.1m / count
2 Area counter: 1m2 / count
3 Area counter: 0.1m2 / count
When No.00 is set to “inch”;

0 Linear counter: 1foot / count
1 Area counter: 1foot2 / count
NOTE
The counting unit of Counter A is set as follows when shipped.
USA 1 foot/count (setting value : 0)
Europe and Asia 1m/count (setting value : 0)
(7) Counting unit of Counter B (No.06)
Counting unit of the Counter B (Upper Counter) can be specified. Selectable setting values rely on
“metric / inch setting (Item No.00)”.
• Selectable setting values in No. 05 are 0, 1, 2 and 3 if No.00 is set to “metric”.
• Selectable setting values in No. 05 are 0 and 1 if No.00 is set to “inch”.
When No.00 is set to “metric”;

0 Linear counter: 1m / count
1 Linear counter: 0.1m / count
2 Area counter: 1m2 / count
3 Area counter: 0.1m2 / count
When No.00 is set to “inch”;

0 Linear counter: 1foot / count
1 Area counter: 1foot2 / count
NOTE
The counting unit of Counter A is set as follows when shipped.
USA 1foot2 / count (setting value : 1)
Europe and Asia 1m2 / count (setting value : 2)
8-49 K115sm8e2.doc
(8) Operation of Dehumidify Heater (No.07)
It is possible to decide when the Dehumidify Heater should operate.

0 Dehumidify Heater operates only when the Power Switch is OFF.
1 Dehumidify Heater operates always.
(9) Cut length of user Test Print (No.08)
Cut length of test print that is performed from the User Mode can be specified. Selectable setting
values rely on “metric / inch setting (Item No.00)”.
In case “meter (ISO)” is selected :

Setting value Cut length
A0 1189mm
A1 841mm
A2 594mm
A3 420mm
A4 197mm
A5 210mm
b1 1030mm
b2 728mm
b3 515mm
b4 364mm
b5 257mm
In case “inch (ANSI)” is selected :

Setting value Cut length
48 48”
44 44”
36 36”
34 34”
30 30”
24 24”
22 22”
18 18”
17 17”
12 12”
11 11”
8.5 8.5”
NOTE
This cut length is not applied to the test print from the Service Mode (Sub Mode 8).
8-50 K115sm8e2.doc
(10) Standard / Special Setting Value Changing Modes (No.09 to 0b)
Some setting items of Adjustment Modes 0/1 are available to have dual setting values as
“Standard Setting Value” and “Special Setting Value”. (Such items are called “dual value items”)
The modes No. 09, 0A and 0b are available to change “Standard Setting Value” and “Special
Setting Value” respectively on these dual value items. Refer to [Operation] on page 8-53 for how to
change these values.
Each 09, 0A and 0b has its own target setting based on the media type.
Item No. Target setting

09 Dual value items concerned with plain paper can be adjusted.
0A Dual value items concerned with tracing paper can be adjusted.
0b Dual value items concerned with film can be adjusted.
Selectable setting values are “0” or “1”, and the descriptions are as follows.

0 “Standard Setting Value” of dual value items can be changed.
1 “Special Setting Value” of dual value item can be changed.
[Description]
Normally an individual setting item of Adjustment Modes 0/1 has only 1 setting value that is called
“Standard Setting Value”.
However, some setting items are available to have one more setting value called “Special Setting
Value” in addition to “Standard Setting Value”. Such setting items are called “dual value items”.
The following list shows some examples of dual setting items. (All items are concerned with plain
paper.)
Item Setting target Standard Setting Special Setting

No. Value (Example) Value (Example)
Adjustment Mode 0 10 Fuser temperature (PPC) 170 190
(Sub Mode No.4) 1C Transfer corona current (PPC) 242 265
1F DC component for Separation Corona 319 310
(PPC)
33 Fuser Motor speed -10 -07
(Roll 1 /PPC /Large size /0 to 2m)
Adjustment Mode 1 0C Image placement 11.0 9.5
(Sub Mode No.5) (Roll 1 /PPC /Large size)
3C Length of trailing margin 11.0 10.0
(Roll 1 /PPC /Large size)
6C Length of image 0.05 -0.15
(Roll 1 /PPC /Large size)
“Standard Setting Value” is the factory default that has been specified in the factory before
shipment so as to produce the best print result in our assumed usage condition. (Field
customization for the Standard Setting Value is available of course.)
“Special Setting Value” is something like “occasionally required custom setting”. There will be a
case that normally the usage condition is within as assumed so “Standard Setting Value” is enough
for getting a satisfactory print result, but sometimes (temporarily or constantly) the usage condition
becomes NOT within as assumed so you need to set a certain setting item to some “special state”
temporarily for getting a satisfactory print result in such special usage condition. This “special
state” is what we call “Special Setting Value”. For example;
• Normally the user uses recommended paper and can get a proper print result with the
default fuser temperature (170 degrees for example), but he sometimes uses a very special
paper that requires to set the fuser temperature to some special state (190 degree) for
8-51 K115sm8e2.doc
getting a proper print result. So he needs to have 2 different fuser temperature settings for
getting satisfactory result in both cases, one for recommended paper (Standard Setting
Value) and another for special paper (Special Setting Value).
NOTE
(1) It is not recommended to change the “Standard Setting Value” as it is the best factory
setting, but it is possible to do it if necessary. Preferably backup all the Standard Setting
Value before change.
(2) Refer to each setting item list to know which items of Adjustment Mode 0/1 are “dual value
items”.
[8.1.5.4 Setting item list] on and after the page 8-39
If “OK” is provided in [Special setting] column of the list, this item is a “dual value item”.
If “NO”, it is a “single value item”.
(3) Switch between “Standard Setting Value” and “Special Setting Value” can be done in the
User Modes 8, 9 and A.
If you set the User Mode to [Standard Print Mode], the “Standard Setting Value” of all dual
value items become active.
If you set the User Mode to [Special Print Mode], the “Special Setting Value” of all dual
value items become active.
Refer to the following pages for the detail of User Modes 8, 9 and A.
[8.2.8 User Mode 8] (Page 8-180)
[8.2.9 User Mode 9] (Page 8-184)
[8.2.10 User Mode A] (Page 8-188)
(4) On every dual value item, its “Standard Setting Value” and “Special Setting Value” are set
to the same value when shipped from factory.
8-52 K115sm8e2.doc
[Operation]
The “Special Setting Value” of Fuser Temperature for PPC (item No.10) is to be change in this
example.
1. As the dual value item concerned with “plain paper” is to be changed, select the item No.09 in
the Adjustment Mode 0..
MENU ENTER ONLINE
NOTE
Select “0A” if you will change the setting of any dual value item concerned with tracing paper,
and “0b” when the item is concerned with film.
2. Press the [ ENTER ] Key. The setting value on the 6th digits flashes and becomes changeable.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8-53 K115sm8e2.doc
3. As the “Special Setting Value” is to be changed, select the setting value “1” pressing [ ] Key
and [ ] Key.

0 Select this when “Standard Setting Value” is to be changed.
1 Select this when “Special Setting Value” is to be changed.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
4. Press the [ ENTER ] Key to decide the setting value “1”. The setting value “1” stops flashing.
It becomes possible to access the “Special Setting Values” of all dual value items for changing
them.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8-54 K115sm8e2.doc
5. Pressing [ ] Key and [ ] Key, indicate your required Item Number of any dual value item.
Example : As the “Special Setting Value” of [Fuser temperature (PPC)] is to be changed,

indicate its Item Number “10”.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
NOTE
Refer to each setting item list to know which items of Adjustment Mode 0/1 are “dual value
items”.
If “OK” is provided in [Special setting] column of the list, this item is a “dual value item”.
If “NO”, it is a “single value item”.
6. Press the [ ENTER ] Key. The setting value (Special Setting Value of selected dual value item)
on the 6th digits flashes and becomes changeable.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8-55 K115sm8e2.doc
7. Change the “Special Setting Value” pressing [ ] Key and [ ] Key.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8. Press the [ ENTER ] Key to decide the “Special Setting Value”. The setting value stops flashing
when decided.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
NOTE
“Standard Setting Value” does not change even if you change the “Special Setting Value”.
9. If required, select another dual value item and change the “Special Setting Value” similarly.
10. Cancel the Service Mode.
8-56 K115sm8e2.doc
(11) Cold Sleep ON/OFF (No.0C)
Cold Sleep mode can be set to ON or OFF. (This selection can be done only in the Service Mode.)

On Cold Sleep works.
OFF Cold Sleep does not work.
NOTE
Cold Sleep timer can be specified in the User Mode 4. See [8.2.4 User Mode 4 (Cold Sleep
Mode timer setting)] on page 8-168.
(12) Compensation of Analog Outputs (No.0d)
The Analog Outputs from the High Voltage Power Supplies (HVP1-6) and Bias Power Supply
(BIAS) can be compensated to the needed levels by compensating the variation of Input Voltage
(about 5V) to the Main Controller PCB. The setting value stands for the voltage (N).
This mode needs to be operated only after replacing the DCP2. See [4.4 Compensation of Analog
Outputs by Service Mode 4-0d (Necessary after replacing DCP2)] on page 4-104 for more detail.
8-57 K115sm8e2.doc
(13) Fusing temperature (No.10 to 12)
Fusing temperature for each media type can be changed. The setting unit is “degree centigrade”,
and the adjustment range is from 150 to 190.
Item No. Description

09 Fusing temperature applied when you print with a plain paper.
0A Fusing temperature applied when you print with a tracing paper.
0b Fusing temperature applied when you print with a film.
NOTE
Item No.10, 11, and 12 are “dual value items” that are available to set both “Standard Setting
Value” and “Special Setting Value”.
Refer to [(10) Standard / Special Setting Value Changing Modes (Items No.09, 0A & 0b)] on
and after the page 8-51 for the detail.
(14) LED strobe time (No.13)
Print density can be adjusted by increasing or decreasing the LED strobe time. The adjustment
unit is “1micro second. The whole print density becomes darker if the value is increased.
NOTE
(1) This setting is applied in the following cases.
• Test print
• Print from some controller that does not have density setting.
(2) Increment/decrement of this setting evenly affects all Image Enhance Categories.
8-58 K115sm8e2.doc
(15) Pre-Transfer LED / Separation Corona OFF timing (PPC) (No.15)
The OFF timing of Separation Corona and Pre-Transfer LED can be decided. This setting is
applied when printed with a plain paper. There are 2 selectable settings.

0 Both Separation Corona and Pre-Transfer LED turn OFF normally.
1 When plain paper is used, both Separation Corona and Pre-Transfer LED
turn OFF 0.12 seconds earlier than the normal timing.
(For tracing paper and film, they turn OFF normally.)
NOTE
Transfer defect may occur on the trailing edge of print if the used plain paper is very special,
but such problem might be fixed if No.C8 is set to “1”. (Transfer defect means the toner
remains on the Drum without being transferred onto the print media.)
Separation Corona
Pre-Transfer LED
8-59 K115sm8e2.doc
(16) Pre-Transfer LED ON / OFF (No.16)
It is possible to decide whether or not the Pre-Transfer LED turns ON. There are 2 selectable
settings.

0 Pre-Transfer LED does not turn ON during the print cycle.
1 Pre-Transfer LED turns ON during the print cycle.
Pre-Transfer LED
(17) Separation Lamp ON / OFF (PPC) (No.17)
It is possible to decide whether or not the Separation Lamp lights. This setting is applied when a
plain paper is used. There are 2 selectable settings.

0 Separation Lamp does not light during the print cycle.
1 Separation Lamp lights during the print cycle.
Separation Lamp
8-60 K115sm8e2.doc
(18) Separation Lamp ON / OFF (Tracing) (No.18)
tracing paper is used. There are 2 selectable settings.

Separation Lamp
8-61 K115sm8e2.doc
(19) Developer Bias (applied when Auto Density Control is set to OFF) (No.19)
It is possible to adjust the Developer Bias supplied to the Developer Roller. The Bias specified
here is directly applied when the Auto Density Control is set to OFF. The setting unit is
hexadecimal, and the setting range is from 000 to 0FF. More negative Bias is provided to the
Developer Bias when the value is increased, which makes the print image darker.
Developer Roller
NOTE
Make sure to adjust the Developer Bias in this item No.19. Do not adjust the Bias by
moving the volumes on the Bias Board, as they have been adjusted and locked in the
factory.
(20) Current setting for the Image Corona Wire (No.1A)
Intensity of current that flows on the Image Corona Wires can be adjusted. The setting unit is
hexadecimal, and the setting range is from 000 to 0FF. If the value is increased, Drum will be
charged more negative as more current flows on the Image Corona Wire.
Image Corona Wires
8-62 K115sm8e2.doc
(21) Current setting for the Grid Plate (applied when Auto SP Control is set to OFF) (No.1b)
Intensity of current that flows on the Grid Plate can be adjusted. The current specified here is
directly applied when the Auto SP Control is set to OFF. The setting unit is hexadecimal, and the
setting range is from 000 to 500. If the value is increased, Drum will be charged more negative as
more current flows on the Grid Plate.
Grid Plate
(22) Current setting for the Transfer Corona Wire (No.1C to 1E)
Intensity of current that flows on the Transfer Corona Wire can be adjusted. The setting unit is
hexadecimal, and the setting range is from 000 to 500. If the value is increased, toner will tend to
be more attracted onto the media as more current flows on the Transfer Corona Wires.
Each Item No. has its own target media.

Please adjust the proper item.
Item No. Target media

1C Plain paper
1d Tracing paper
1E Film
Transfer Corona Wire
8-63 K115sm8e2.doc
(23) Separation Corona DC component (No.1F to 21)
DC component supplied to the Separation Corona can be adjusted. The setting unit is hexadecimal,
and the setting range is from 000 to 500. If the value is increased, more negative electric charges
will be provided from the Separation Corona.
Each Item No. has its own target media type.


1F Plain paper
20 Tracing paper
21 Film
Separation Corona
(24) Paper Feed Motor Speed (No.22 to 26)
The speed of Paper Feed Motor can be adjusted. The adjustment unit is “0.05%”, and the
adjustment range is from -1.0% to +1.0%. Increment of the value makes the speed of Paper Feed
Motor faster.
Each Item No. has its own target media source.

Item No. Target media source

22 Bypass feed
23 Roll 1
24 Roll 2
25 Roll 3
26 Roll 4
8-64 K115sm8e2.doc
(25) Fuser Motor Speed (Bypass feed) (No.27 to 32)
The speed of Fuser Motor can be adjusted. This setting is applied when the print media is fed
from the Bypass Feeder. The adjustment unit is “0.05%”, and the adjustment range is from -1.0%
to +1.0%. Increment of the value makes the speed of Fuser Motor faster.
Each Item No. has its own target media type and media size.
Item No. Target media type Target media size

27 Plain paper Large
28 Plain paper Medium
29 Plain paper Small
2A Plain paper Smallest
2b Tracing paper Large
2C Tracing paper Medium
2d Tracing paper Small
2E Tracing paper Smallest
2F Film Large
30 Film Medium
31 Film Small
32 Film Smallest
NOTE
(1) Media sizes are classified into 4 levels as follows.
Metric (Width) Inch (Width)

Large A0 and B1 36”, 34” and 30”
Medium A1 and B2 24” and 22”
Small A2 and B3 18” and 17”
Smallest A3 12” and 11”
(2) Item No.27 to 32 are “dual value items” that are available to set both “Standard Setting
Refer to [(10) Standard / Special Setting Value Changing Modes (Items No.09, 0A & 0b)]
on and after the page 8-51 for the detail.
8-65 K115sm8e2.doc
(26) Fuser Motor Speed (Roll 1) (No.33 to 54)
from the Roll Deck 1. The adjustment unit is “0.05%”, and the adjustment range is from -1.0% to
+1.0%. Increment of the value makes the speed of Fuser Motor faster.
And in case of the large size of plain paper, it is possible to specify the motor speed for every
“1m long” step.
Item Media type Media size Item Media type Media size
No. (Range of media No. (Range of media length)
length)
33 Plain paper Large (0 to 2m) 44 Plain paper Large (18 to 19m)
39 Plain paper Large (7 to 8m) 4A Plain paper Medium
3A Plain paper Large (8 to 9m) 4b Plain paper Small
3b Plain paper Large (9 to 10m) 4C Plain paper Smallest
3C Plain paper Large (10 to 11m) 4d Tracing paper Large
3d Plain paper Large (11 to 12m) 4E Tracing paper Medium
3E Plain paper Large (12 to 13m) 4F Tracing paper Small
3F Plain paper Large (13 to 14m) 50 Tracing paper Smallest
40 Plain paper Large (14 to 15m) 51 Film Large
41 Plain paper Large (15 to 16m) 52 Film Medium
42 Plain paper Large (16 to 17m) 53 Film Small
43 Plain paper Large (17 to 18m) 54 Film Smallest
NOTE

8-66 K115sm8e2.doc
“1m long” step.
length)
59 Plain paper Large (5 to 6m) 6A Plain paper Large (22 to 23m)
5A Plain paper Large (6 to 7m) 6b Plain paper Large (23 to 24m)
5b Plain paper Large (7 to 8m) 6C Plain paper Medium
5C Plain paper Large (8 to 9m) 6d Plain paper Small
5d Plain paper Large (9 to 10m) 6E Plain paper Smallest
5E Plain paper Large (10 to 11m) 6F Tracing paper Large
5F Plain paper Large (11 to 12m) 70 Tracing paper Medium
60 Plain paper Large (12 to 13m) 71 Tracing paper Small
61 Plain paper Large (13 to 14m) 72 Tracing paper Smallest
NOTE

8-67 K115sm8e2.doc
“1m long” step.
length)
79 Plain paper Large (3 to 4m) 8A Plain paper Large (20 to 21m)
7A Plain paper Large (4 to 5m) 8b Plain paper Large (21 to 22m)
7b Plain paper Large (5 to 6m) 8C Plain paper Large (22 to 23m)
7C Plain paper Large (6 to 7m) 8d Plain paper Large (23 to 24m)
7d Plain paper Large (7 to 8m) 8E Plain paper Medium
7E Plain paper Large (8 to 9m) 8F Plain paper Small
7F Plain paper Large (9 to 10m) 90 Plain paper Smallest
80 Plain paper Large (10 to 11m) 91 Tracing paper Large
81 Plain paper Large (11 to 12m) 92 Tracing paper Medium
82 Plain paper Large (12 to 13m) 93 Tracing paper Small
83 Plain paper Large (13 to 14m) 94 Tracing paper Smallest
NOTE

8-68 K115sm8e2.doc
(29) Fuser Motor Speed (Roll 4) (No.99 to bA)
“1m long” step.
length)
99 Plain paper Large (0 to 2m) AA Plain paper Large (18 to 19m)
9A Plain paper Large (2 to 3m) Ab Plain paper Large (19 to 20m)
9b Plain paper Large (3 to 4m) Ac Plain paper Large (20 to 21m)
9C Plain paper Large (4 to 5m) Ad Plain paper Large (21 to 22m)
9d Plain paper Large (5 to 6m) AE Plain paper Large (22 to 23m)
9E Plain paper Large (6 to 7m) AF Plain paper Large (23 to 24m)
9F Plain paper Large (7 to 8m) b0 Plain paper Medium
A0 Plain paper Large (8 to 9m) b1 Plain paper Small
A1 Plain paper Large (9 to 10m) b2 Plain paper Smallest
A2 Plain paper Large (10 to 11m) b3 Tracing paper Large
A3 Plain paper Large (11 to 12m) b4 Tracing paper Medium
A4 Plain paper Large (12 to 13m) b5 Tracing paper Small
A5 Plain paper Large (13 to 14m) b6 Tracing paper Smallest
A6 Plain paper Large (14 to 15m) b7 Film Large
A7 Plain paper Large (15 to 16m) b8 Film Medium
A8 Plain paper Large (16 to 17m) b9 Film Small
A9 Plain paper Large (17 to 18m) bA Film Smallest
NOTE

(2) Item No.99 to bA are “dual value items” that are available to set both “Standard Setting
8-69 K115sm8e2.doc
(30) Image placement (For 2nd and later prints) (No.bb)
The vertical position of print image on the media can be adjusted. This setting is applied to the
2nd and later prints in multiple printing. The setting unit is 0.1mm, and the setting range is from
0 to 100 (0 to 10.0mm). Increment of the value shifts the whole print image to the leading edge
side, that is the leading margin on the print becomes narrower.
Setting value is decreased. Setting value is increased.
(31) Paper Feed Clutch (MC6) ON timing (No.bC)
It is possible to adjust when the Paper Feed Clutch (MC6) should operate in print process. The
setting unit is 1 millisecond, and the setting range is from 1 to 30 milliseconds.
The ON timing of Paper Feed Clutch (MC6) can be decided taking the ON timing of Paper Gate
Clutch (MC5) as the standard. If you set the No.bC to “20 milliseconds” for example, the Paper
Feed Clutch (MC6) operates (ON) 20 milliseconds earlier than the Paper Gate Clutch (MC5)
operates (ON).
Paper Gate Clutch (MC5) & Paper Gate Brake (MC10)
Paper Feed Clutch

(MC6)
8-70 K115sm8e2.doc
(32) Roll Paper Feed Clutches (MC1 to MC4) and Bypass Feed Clutch (MC7) ON timing
(No.bd)
It is possible to adjust when the Roll Paper Feed Clutches 1, 2, 3 and 4 (MC1 to MC4) and the
Bypass Feed Clutch (MC7) should operate. The setting unit is 1 millisecond, and the setting range
is from 1 to 20 milliseconds.
The ON timing of these clutches (MC1, MC2, MC3, MC4 and MC7) can be decided taking the ON
timing of Paper Feed Clutch (MC6) as the standard. If you set the No.bd to “10 milliseconds” for
example, these clutches operate (ON) 10 milliseconds earlier than the Paper Feed Clutch (MC6)
operates (ON).
Bypass Feed Clutch

(MC7)
Roll paper Feed Clutch 1

(MC1)
Roll paper Feed Clutch 2

(MC2)
Roll paper Feed Clutch 3 Paper Feed Clutch

(MC3) (MC6)
Roll Paper Feed Clutch 4 (MC4)
8-71 K115sm8e2.doc
(33) Paper Gate Brake (MC10) ON timing (No.bE)
It is possible to adjust when the Paper Gate Brake (MC10) should operate. The setting unit is 1
millisecond, and the setting range is from 1 to 20 milliseconds.
The ON timing of Paper Gate Brake (MC10) can be decided taking the OFF timing of Paper Gate
Clutch (MC5) as the standard. If you set the No.bE to “10 milliseconds” for example, the Paper
Gate Brake (MC10) operates (ON) 10 milliseconds earlier than the Paper Gate Clutch (MC5)
operates (OFF).
Paper Gate Clutch (MC5) & Paper Gate Brake (MC10)
8-72 K115sm8e2.doc
(34) Sub Separation Blower ON / OFF (No. BF to C1)
Whether or not the Sub Separation Blower operates can be decided.

0 Sub Separation Blower does not operate during the print cycle.
1 Sub Separation Blower operates during the print cycle.
Each Item No. has its own target media type.


bF Plain paper
C0 Tracing paper
C1 Film
Sub Separation Blowers

(BL12, BL13, BL14, BL15 & BL16)
NOTE
If the media is not separated well from the Drum and the Separation Area Jam (J-12) occurs
often, the air blow from the Sub Separation Blowers might solve the problem. Try to set this
mode to “1” in such case.
On the other hand, the machine inside may become dirty in this case as the toner is blown by
the air. Occasional cleaning will be required.
8-73 K115sm8e2.doc
(35) TE Margin Compensation (No. C2 to C5)
It is possible to select any compensation level which avoids the variation of TE margin caused by
the variation of roll thickness. Selectable setting values are 0, 1, 2 and 3.
Setting value (Compensation level Description (length of added TE margin)

of TE margin) Unit : mm
1/8 2/8 3/8 4/8 5/8 6/8 7/8 8/8
0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
1 0.0 +0.2 +0.4 +0.6 +0.8 +1.0 +1.2 +1.4
2 0.0 +0.4 +0.8 +1.2 +1.6 +2.0 +2.4 +2.8
3 0.0 +0.6 +1.2 +1.8 +2.4 +3.0 +3.6 +4.2
Each Item No. has its own target Roll Deck.

Item No. Target Roll Deck

C2 Roll 1
C3 Roll 2
C4 Roll 3
C5 Roll4
[Description]
When printed with both thick (new) and narrow (near empty) roll media respectively, the lengths of
trailing margin on both printouts will be different from each other. In general the TE margin tends to
become shorter than what it must be when printed with a narrower roll media. That is to say, more
TE margin should be provided as the thickness of roll is reduced for getting the same TE margin
always without affected by the variation of roll thickness.
Thick roll media Narrow roll media
Difference of trailing margin
In the Items No. C2 to C5 it is possible to select any best TE Margin Compensation Level. More TE
margin is added if larger level is selected. See the next page.
8-74 K115sm8e2.doc
The thickness of roll media is divided into 8 roll thickness levels as “8/8” to “1/8” (level is detected
by the Paper Feed Clock Sensor.). 8/8 is the thickest (new roll media) and 1/8 is the narrowest
(near to empty).
• More TE margin is added as the roll thickness level gets narrower.
• More TE margin is added as larger setting value is selected. (No compensation is
performed when the value is set to “0”)
Roll thickness Compensation (length of added TE margin)

level Setting value : 0 Setting value : 1 Setting value : 2 Setting value : 3
(No compensation)
8/8 0.0mm 0.0mm 0.0mm 0.0mm
7/8 0.0mm +0.2mm +0.4mm +0.6mm
6/8 0.0mm +0.4mm +0.8mm +1.2mm
5/8 0.0mm +0.6mm +1.2mm +1.8mm
4/8 0.0mm +0.8mm +1.6mm +2.4mm
3/8 0.0mm +1.0mm +2.0mm +3.0mm
2/8 0.0mm +1.2mm +2.4mm +3.6mm
1/8 0.0mm +1.4mm +2.8mm +4.2mm
Compensation
Trailing margin is same.
8-75 K115sm8e2.doc
(36) Separation Lamp ON / OFF (Film) (No.C6)
film is used. There are 2 selectable settings.

Separation Lamp
NOTE
(1) No.C6 is set to “0” (Lamp does not light) in default state. But the Separation Lamp may
become a solution for getting a better transfer result when some specific type of film is
used. It will be valuable to try to turn ON the Separation Lamp if transfer result looks not
satisfactory.
(2) Switch between ON / OFF can be done also in the User Mode 6. See Refer to [8.2.6 User
Mode 6 (Transfer Support LED ON/OFF [Film])] on the page 8-174.
Neither Service Mode nor User Mode has the setting priority. The final setting on either
modes become active.
(Separation Lamp is called “Transfer Support LED” in User Mode.)
8-76 K115sm8e2.doc
(37) Image Enhancement Mode Selection (No.C7)
The level of Image Enhancement can be selected. The printed image is more enhanced (become
darker) when selecting a larger level.

(Image Enhancement Mode)
0 Image is not enhanced (Image Enhancement is OFF)
1 Image is enhanced with “low” Image Enhancement Level.
2 Image is enhanced with “medium” Image Enhancement Level.
3 Image is enhanced with “high” Image Enhancement Level.
NOTE
The selection of Image Enhancement Mode ) can be done on the User Mode B also. Refer to
[8. 2.11 User Mode B (Selection of Image Enhancement Mode] on page 8-192. As neither
Service Mode nor User Mode has the priority for the setting, the setting specified on either
mode at the last occasion become effective.
(38) Pre-Transfer LED / Separation Corona OFF timing (Tracing) (No.C8)
applied when printed with a tracing paper. There are 2 selectable settings.

(For plain paper and film, they turn OFF normally.)
NOTE
Transfer defect may occur on the trailing edge of print if the used tracing paper is very special,
but such problem might be fixed if No.C8 is set to “1”. (Transfer defect means the toner
remains on the Drum without being transferred onto the print media.)
Separation Corona
Pre-Transfer LED
8-77 K115sm8e2.doc
(39) Pre-Transfer LED / Separation Corona OFF timing (Film) (No.C9)
applied when printed with a film. There are 2 selectable settings.

(For plain paper and tracing paper, they turn OFF normally.)
NOTE
Transfer defect may occur on the trailing edge of print if the used film paper is very special, but
such problem might be fixed if No.C9 is set to “1”. (Transfer defect means the toner remains on
the Drum without being transferred onto the print media.)
Separation Corona
Pre-Transfer LED
8-78 K115sm8e2.doc
(40) Image Enhancement Level for single pixel (No.CD)
An isolated single pixel can be enhanced by Image Enhancement Levels (IE Levels). Selectable IE
Levels are 0 to 7. Specifying a larger IE Level makes the single pixel darker.

(IE Level)
0 Isolated single pixel is not enhanced.
1 Isolated single pixel is enhanced.
2 Isolated single pixel is enhanced more than IE Level 1.
7 Isolated single pixel is enhanced most.
Not enhanced Enhanced
NOTE
This setting is applied to only the single pixel which is found to be “completely isolated” by the
image process software.
8-79 K115sm8e2.doc
(41) Image Enhancement Level (No. CE) (applied when IE Mode is OFF, or IE Category is
“A1” in any IE Mode)
It is possible to select an Image Enhancement Level (IE Level) that makes enhancement
commonly to all the images (pixels) belonging to the following conditions.
• All IE Categories (A1 to A5, and B1 to B5) when Image Enhancement Mode (IE Mode) is
set to “OFF” in the Item No.C7.
• IE Category A1 when IE Mode is set to “low”, “medium” and “high” in the Item No.C7.
(The items with “Applied” in the list are concerned to the above conditions.)
IE Category IE Mode (Can be set in Item No.C7)

OFF Low Medium High
A1 Applied : CE Applied : CE Applied : CE Applied : CE
A2 Applied : CE Not applied Not applied Not applied
B1 Applied : CE Not applied Not applied Not applied
Specifying a larger IE Level makes the concerning images (pixels) darker.

(IE Level)
0 Image Enhancement is not performed.
1 Images are enhanced (become darker).
2 Images are more enhanced (become much darker) than IE Level 1.
7 Images are enhanced most (become darkest).
See REFERENCE on next page for more detail about IE Category.
8-80 K115sm8e2.doc
Reference
When the Image Enhancement is activated on the item No. 8044, the KIP9000 categorizes
every single pixel of print data into any of 10 IE Categories depending on its “visual appeal
power”.
2 factors concern for the categorization, such as “isolate level” and “existence of nearby dot”.
• “Isolate level” stands for the isolation from other images, and shown by the “numeral”
of IE Category as A1 or A2. A larger value stands for more isolation from other images
(as single pixel). “More isolation” reduces the “visual appeal power” of the target pixel.
Therefore more image enhancement is required for more isolated pixel to print it much
darker.
• “Existence of nearby dot” is shown by the alphabet of IE Category as A1 or B1. Nearby
dot exists when “B”, and does not exist when “A”. As the existence of nearby dot
provides more “visual appeal power” to the concerning pixel, less image enhancement
is required.
The followings are the descriptions of 10 IE Categories, which are ordered from top to bottom
in terms of their visual appeal power. (Upper item has more visual appeal power.)
B5 : Isolate level 5 with nearby dot Have more visual appeal power
A5 : Isolate level 5 without nearby dot (Needs less image enhancement)
B4 : Isolate level 4 with nearby dot
A4 : Isolate level 4 without nearby dot
A1 : Isolate level 1 without nearby dot Have less visual appeal power
(Needs more image enhancement)
8-81 K115sm8e2.doc
(42) Image Enhancement Level (No. CF to d7) (applied when IE Mode is “low”)
Items from CF to d7 specify any of 8 IE Level to each 9 IE Categories (A2 to A5, and B1 to B5)
respectively. These settings are applies when the IE Mode is set to “low” in the Item No.C7. All the
images (pixels) belonging to a certain Image Enhancement Category is equally enhanced by the
Image Enhancement Level specified to this category.

OFF Low Medium High
A1 Not applied Not applied Not applied Not applied
A2 Not applied Applied : CF Not applied Not applied
A3 Not applied Applied : d0 Not applied Not applied
B1 Not applied Applied : d3 Not applied Not applied
Specifying a larger Image Enhancement Level makes the concerning images (pixels) darker.

(IE Level)
Reference
Refer to REFERENCE on page 8-81 for the description of IE Category
8-82 K115sm8e2.doc
(43) Image Enhancement Level (No. d8 to E0) (applied when IE Mode is “medium”)
Items from d8 to E0 specify any of 8 IE Level to each 9 IE Categories (A2 to A5, and B1 to B5)
respectively. These settings are applies when the IE Mode is set to “medium” in the Item No.C7.
All the images (pixels) belonging to a certain Image Enhancement Category is equally enhanced
by the Image Enhancement Level specified to this category.

OFF Low Medium High
A2 Not applied Not applied Applied : d8 Not applied
A3 Not applied Not applied Applied : d9 Not applied
A4 Not applied Not applied Applied : dA Not applied
A5 Not applied Not applied Applied : db Not applied
B1 Not applied Not applied Applied : dC Not applied
B2 Not applied Not applied Applied : dd Not applied
B3 Not applied Not applied Applied : dE Not applied
B4 Not applied Not applied Applied : dF Not applied
B5 Not applied Not applied Applied : E0 Not applied

(IE Level)
Reference
8-83 K115sm8e2.doc
(44) Image Enhancement Level (No. E1 to E9) (applied when IE Mode is “high”)
Items from E1 to E9 specify any of 8 IE Level to each 9 IE Categories (A2 to A5, and B1 to B5)
respectively. These settings are applies when the IE Mode is set to “high” in the Item No.C7. All
the images (pixels) belonging to a certain Image Enhancement Category is equally enhanced by
the Image Enhancement Level specified to this category.

OFF Low Medium High
A2 Not applied Not applied Not applied Applied : E1
B1 Not applied Not applied Not applied Applied : E5

(IE Level)
Reference
(45) LED Gumma setting (No.EA to EC)
DO NOT ADJUST!
These settings might be adjusted on some stage of the development of KIP9000.
8-84 K115sm8e2.doc
8. 1. 6 Adjustment Mode 1 (Sub Mode 5)
8. 1. 6. 1 Function
Several fundamental printer settings/parameters can be changed.
Refer to [8.1.6.4 Setting item list] on and after the page 8-89 for the brief information of the setting
items.
Please refer to [8.1.6.5 Description of each setting item] on and after the page 8-96 for the detail
of the setting items.

The 1st digit from the left indicates “5” which is the Sub Mode Number of “Adjustment Mode 1”.
The 2nd and 3rd digits from the left indicate the Item Number.
The 4th, 5th and 6th digits indicate the setting value of the selected Item Number.
MENU ENTER ONLINE

Item Number
Setting Value
8-85 K115sm8e3.doc
MENU ENTER ONLINE
2. The 2nd and 3rd digits from the left indicate the Item Number presently selected. Indicate the
Please refer to [8.1.6.4 Setting item list] on and after the page 8-89 to know the
description of setting.
Example : “Length of image for Roll (Roll 1 / PPC / Large size) is to be adjusted.
Indicate its Item Number “6C”.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
Item Number of “Length of image for Roll (Roll 1 / PPC / Large size)”
8-86 K115sm8e3.doc
3. Press the [ENTER] Key after selecting the necessary Item Number. The setting value on 4th,
5th and 6th digits flashes and becomes changeable.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
The setting value flashes.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8-87 K115sm8e3.doc
5. Press the [ ENTER ] Key to decide the new setting value. The setting value stops flashing
when decided.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
NOTE
If you press the [ ONLINE ] Key before deciding the new value, the former setting value is
recovered.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
(Former setting value is recovered.)
8-88 K115sm8e3.doc
8. 1. 5. 4 Setting item list
value page;
00 Image placement for cut sheet media 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-96
(PPC / Large size)
(PPC / Medium size)
(PPC / Small size)
(PPC / Smallest size)
(Tracing / Large size)
(Tracing / Medium size)
(Tracing / Small size)
(Tracing / Smallest size)
(Film / Large size)
(Film / Medium size)
0A Image placement for cut sheet media 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-96
(Film / Small size)
0b Image placement for cut sheet media 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-96
(Film / Smallest size)
0C Image placement for Roll 1 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-97
(PPC / Large size)
0d Image placement for Roll 1 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-97
(PPC / Medium size)
0E Image placement for Roll 1 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-97
(PPC / Small size)
0F Image placement for Roll 1 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-97
10 Image placement for Roll 1 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-97
(Film / Large size)
(Film / Small size)
8-89 K115sm8e3.doc
value page;
(PPC / Large size)
(PPC / Medium size)
1A Image placement for Roll 2 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-98
(PPC / Small size)
1b Image placement for Roll 2 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-98
(Film / Large size)
(Film / Small size)
(PPC / Large size)
(PPC / Medium size)
(PPC / Small size)
(Film / Large size)
(Film / Small size)
8-90 K115sm8e3.doc
value page;
(PPC / Large size)
(PPC / Medium size)
(PPC / Small size)
(Film / Large size)
(Film / Small size)
3C TE margin for Roll 1 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-101
(PPC / Large size)
3d TE margin for Roll 1 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-101
(PPC / Medium size)
3E TE margin for Roll 1 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-101
(PPC / Small size)
3F TE margin for Roll 1 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-101
40 TE margin for Roll 1 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-101
(Film / Large size)
(Film / Small size)
8-91 K115sm8e3.doc
value page;
(PPC / Large size)
(PPC / Medium size)
4A TE margin for Roll 2 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-102
(PPC / Small size)
4b TE margin for Roll 2 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-102
(Film / Large size)
(Film / Small size)
(PPC / Large size)
(PPC / Medium size)
(PPC / Small size)
(Film / Large size)
(Film / Small size)
8-92 K115sm8e3.doc
value page;
(PPC / Large size)
(PPC / Medium size)
(PPC / Small size)
(Film / Large size)
(Film / Small size)
6C Length of image for Roll 1 0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-105
(PPC / Large size)
6d Length of image for Roll 1 0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-105
(PPC / Medium size)
6E Length of image for Roll 1 0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-105
(PPC / Small size)
6F Length of image for Roll 1 0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-105
70 Length of image for Roll 1 0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-105
(Film / Large size)
(Film / Small size)
8-93 K115sm8e3.doc
value page;
(PPC / Large size)
(PPC / Medium size)
7A Length of image for Roll 2 0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-106
(PPC / Small size)
7b Length of image for Roll 2 0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-106
(Film / Large size)
(Film / Small size)
(PPC / Large size)
(PPC / Medium size)
(PPC / Small size)
(Film / Large size)
(Film / Small size)
8-94 K115sm8e3.doc
value page;
(PPC / Large size)
(PPC / Medium size)
(PPC / Small size)
(Film / Large size)
(Film / Small size)
9C TE margin for cut sheet media 100 NO 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-109
(Large size)
9d Web operation mode 8-110
9E Web operation time : Hour 8-110
9F Web operation time : Minute 8-110
A0 Web operation time : Second 8-110
A1 Web thickness 8-110
A2 Auto SP Control ON/OFF On On or OFF 8-111
A3 Target Surface Potential at 5oC 500 to 999 V 8-111
o
A4 Target Surface Potential at 10 C 500 to 999 V 8-111
o
A6 Target Surface Potential at 20oC 500 to 999 V 8-111
o
o
A9 Acceptable potential range for Auto SP Control 4 to 10 V 8-111
AA Auto Density Control ON/OFF On On or OFF 8-112
Ab Compensation of Target Density 00 to FF Hex 8-112
AC Minimum voltage gap between SP and Bias 0 to 250 V 8-112
8-95 K115sm8e3.doc
8. 1. 6. 5 Description of each setting item
(1) Image placement for cut sheet media (No.00 to 0b)
It is possible to adjust the vertical placement of print image on the media. These settings are
applied when printed with a cut sheet media. The setting unit is 0.1mm, and the setting range is
from 0 to 200 (0mm to 20.0mm). Increment of the value moves the whole image toward the trailing
edge side (that is, the leading margin gets wider).
Value is decreased. Value is increased.
Item No. Media type Media size Item No. Media type Media size
00 Plain paper Large 06 Tracing paper Small
01 Plain paper Medium 07 Tracing paper Smallest
02 Plain paper Small 08 Film Large
03 Plain paper Smallest 09 Film Medium
04 Tracing paper Large 0A Film Small
05 Tracing paper Medium 0b Film Smallest
NOTE
(1) Media sizes “large”, “medium”, “small” and “smallest” stand for as follows.

(2) Items from No.00 to 0b are “dual value items” that are available to set both “Standard
Setting Value” and “Special Setting Value”.
8-96 K115sm8e3.doc
(2) Image placement for Roll 1 (No.0C to 17)
applied when printed with Roll 1. The setting unit is 0.1mm, and the setting range is from 0 to
200 (0mm to 20.0mm). Increment of the value moves the whole image toward the trailing edge
side (that is, the leading margin gets wider).
0C Plain paper Large 12 Tracing paper Small
0d Plain paper Medium 13 Tracing paper Smallest
0E Plain paper Small 14 Film Large
0F Plain paper Smallest 15 Film Medium
10 Tracing paper Large 16 Film Small
11 Tracing paper Medium 17 Film Smallest
NOTE

(2) Items from No.0C to 17 are “dual value items” that are available to set both “Standard
8-97 K115sm8e3.doc
(3) Image placement for Roll 2 (No.18 to 23)
18 Plain paper Large 1E Tracing paper Small
19 Plain paper Medium 1F Tracing paper Smallest
1A Plain paper Small 20 Film Large
1b Plain paper Smallest 21 Film Medium
1C Tracing paper Large 22 Film Small
1d Tracing paper Medium 23 Film Smallest
NOTE

(2) Items from No.18 to 23 are “dual value items” that are available to set both “Standard
8-98 K115sm8e3.doc
(4) Image placement for Roll 3 (No.24 to 2F)
24 Plain paper Large 2A Tracing paper Small
25 Plain paper Medium 2b Tracing paper Smallest
26 Plain paper Small 2C Film Large
27 Plain paper Smallest 2d Film Medium
28 Tracing paper Large 2E Film Small
29 Tracing paper Medium 2F Film Smallest
NOTE

(2) Items from No.24 to 2F are “dual value items” that are available to set both “Standard
8-99 K115sm8e3.doc
(5) Image placement for Roll 4 (No.30 to 3b)
NOTE

8-100 K115sm8e3.doc
(6) TE margin for Roll 1 (No.3C to 47)
It is possible to adjust the length of TE margin. These settings are applied when printed with
Roll 1. The setting unit is 0.1mm, and the setting range is from 0 to 200 (0mm to 20.0mm).
Increment of the value provides more TE margin.
Exch Item No. has its own target media type and media size.
NOTE

8-101 K115sm8e3.doc
(7) TE margin for Roll 2 (No.48 to 53)
NOTE

8-102 K115sm8e3.doc
(8) TE margin for Roll 3 (No.54 to 5F)
NOTE

8-103 K115sm8e3.doc
(9) TE margin for Roll 4 (No.60 to 6b)
NOTE

8-104 K115sm8e3.doc
(10) Length of image for Roll 1 (No.6C to 77)
It is possible to adjust the length of print image. These settings are applied when printed with
Roll 1. The setting unit is 0.01%, and the setting range is from -1.00% to +1.00%. Increment
makes the image longer to vertical direction.
NOTE

8-105 K115sm8e3.doc
(11) Length of image for Roll 2 (No.78 to 83)
NOTE

8-106 K115sm8e3.doc
(12) Length of image for Roll 3 (No.84 to 8F)
NOTE

8-107 K115sm8e3.doc
(13) Length of image for Roll 4 (No.90 to 9b)
NOTE

8-108 K115sm8e3.doc
(14) TE margin for cut sheet media (Large) (No.9C)
It is possible to adjust the length of TE margin. This setting is applied when printed with a
“large” cut sheet media. The setting unit is 0.1mm, and the setting range is from 0 to 200 (0mm
to 20.0mm). Increment of the value provides more TE margin.
NOTE
(1) Media sizes “large” means A0, 36”, 34” and 30”.
(2) The length of TE margin can be adjusted by deleting or adding the image on the trailing
edge area.
8-109 K115sm8e3.doc
(15) Web operation mode (No.9d)
Set No.9d to “1” if the optional Web Unit is installed to KIP9000.

0 Web Unit does not operate.
1 Web Unit operates.
NOTE
When No.9d is set to “0”, the Web Unit is inactive even if it is installed.
(16) Web operation time (No.9E to A0)
It is possible to change the total operation time of Web Unit counted by the KIP9000 firmware.
Exch Item No. has its own setting target.
Item No. Target setting Setting range Setting unit

9E Can change “hour” of web operation time. 0 to 16 1 hour
9F Can change “minute” of web operation time. 0 to 59 1 minute
A0 Can change “second” of web operation time. 0 to 59 1 second
NOTE
(1) Recovery from “Web End” or “Web Near End” has to be done in the correct way.
a) Set all of 9E, 9F and A0 “0” (set to 0 hour 0 minute 0 second) after replacing the
web with the new one.
b) In any of No.9E to A1, press and hold the WIRE-CLEAN Key and then press the
CUT Key.
c) Turn off/on the KIP9000. “Web End” or “Web Near End” is cleared.
If the above b) and c) are not performed, Web End error will be indicated
continuously!
(2) Web operation time (No.9E to A0) and web thickness (No.A1) are linked with each other. If
either one is changed, the other one is changed also to the appropriate value
automatically.
(17) Web thickness (No.A1)
It is possible to input the actual thickness of Web. The setting range is 0.0mm to 14.0mm in 0.1mm
increment.
NOTE
The “counter” for Web End error is normally the web operation time (9E, 9F & A0). If the web
operation time is lost accidentally, web thickness is the solution to recover the counter.
Measure the actual thickness of unused side of web roll and input that value on No.A1. An
appropriate web operation time is automatically calculated from the web thickness, and it is
automatically set on each No. 9E, 9F and A0. Thus the counter can be recovered.
8-110 K115sm8e3.doc
(18) Auto SP Control ON/OFF (No.A2)
Auto SP Control can be set to ON or OFF.

OFF Auto SP Control is not performed.
ON Auto SP Control is performed.
NOTE
Service Mode 5-A2 is the same setting with User Mode D. When the Auto SP Control is set to
OFF, it may be possible to avoid machine down caused by the service call error E-26. Neither
Service Mode 5-A2 nor User Mode D has setting priority.
(19) Target Surface Potential (No.A3 to A8)
Target Surface Potential at each temperature points (5 degrees step) can be specified, which is
used when the Auto SP Control adjusts the surface potential. The setting range is from 500 to 999
in 1V increment. Increment of the setting value provides a possibility to have bigger density gap
against Developer Bias, which makes the print image lighter.
Item No. Target setting

A3 Target Surface Potential at 5oC
(20) Acceptable potential range for Auto SP Control (No.A9)
KIP9000 will show the service call error E-26 if the Automatic SP Control fails in adjusting the
potential to within acceptable range within decided times of trial. The acceptable range can be
specified in the No.A9. The setting value stands for “+/- X volts against the Target Surface
Potential. The setting range is from 4 to 10 volts in 1V increment. Increment of setting value
increases the possibility to avoid service call error E-26.
8-111 K115sm8e3.doc
(21) Auto Density Control ON/OFF (error check level) (No.AA)
Auto Density Control can be set to any of OFF, ON1 and ON2.

OFF Auto Density Control is not performed.
ON1 Auto Density Control is performed with normal error check level.
ON2 Auto Density Control is performed with strict error check level.
NOTE
Service Mode 5-AA is the same setting with User Mode E. When the Auto Density Control is
set to OFF, it may be possible to avoid machine down caused by the service call error E-28.
Neither Service Mode 5-AA nor User Mode E has setting priority.
(22) Compensation of Target Density (No.Ab)
Target Density can be compensated if necessary. The setting unit is hexadecimal, and the setting
range is 00 to FF. Increment of the setting value makes the Target Density darker.
(23) Minimum voltage gap between SP and Bias (No.AC)
When the Auto Density Control tries to adjust the density several times, the Developer Bias may
be so much increased that the voltage gap between Surface Potential and Developer Bias may
become so small. This situation may result in very light image as enough amount of toner can not
move onto the Drum at development because of small voltage gap. To avoid such situation, it is
possible to specify a minimum voltage gap. The setting stands for “-X volts against the Surface
Potential”, and the setting range is from 0 to 250V in 1V increment.
8-112 K115sm8e3.doc
8. 1. 7 Running Mode (Sub Mode 6 : Do not use)
8. 1. 7. 1 Function
Running Mode (mode No.6) is used only when the manufacturer makes an evaluation test by
operating the machine endlessly. Do not make any operation in the Running Mode as this is
not required in the field.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8-113 K115sm8e4.doc
8. 1. 8 Error Mask Mode (Sub Mode 7)
8. 1. 8. 1 Function
It is possible to ignore (mask) the Service Call Errors purposely in the Error Mask Mode. The errors
that can be ignored are listed in below.
Mask Code Name of error Error Code

00 Fuser Temperature Rising Error E-01
01 Fuser Over Temperature Error E-02
02 Fuser Thermostat Error E-21
03 Paper Feed Motor Error E-13
04 Drum Motor Error E-05
05 Fuser Motor Error E-14
06 Developer Positioning Motor Error E-49
07 Cutter Motor Error E-07
08 Counter A Error E-06
09 Counter B Error E-06
0A Wire Cleaning Error E-16
0b LED Head Cleaning Error E-23
0C Unused
0d Unused
0E Unused
0F Unused
10 Unused
11 Unused
12 Unused
13 Unused
14 Unused
15 Unused
16 Unused
17 Unused
18 Unused
19 Unused
1A Unused
1b Unused
1C Unused
1d Unused
1E Unused
1F Unused
8-114 K115sm8e4.doc
The 1st digit from the left indicates “7” which is the Sub Mode number of “Error Mask Mode”.
The 2nd and 3rd digits from the left indicate the present selection of Mask Code.
The 5th and 6th digits indicate the status (“-L” or “-H”) of selected mask item.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
Sub Mode Number of Error Mask Mode

Mask Code
Status
Sub Mode Number of Error Mask Mode
MENU ENTER ONLINE
2. The 2nd and 3ed digits from the left indicate the Mask Code presently selected. Indicate the
necessary Mask Code pressing [ ] Key (increment) and [ ] Key (decrement). Refer to the
list on page 8-114 for Mask Codes and target items.
Example : “Cutter Motor Error” is to be masked.

Indicate its Mask Code “07”.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
Mask Code of “Cutter Motor Error”
8-115 K115sm8e4.doc
3. The 5th and 6th digits indicates “-L” at first. It means the target item of selected Mask Code is
not masked presently. Press the [ ENTER ] Key to mask the target item. “-H” is indicated when
masked.
Even if this error is detected in the later printing, it will be ignored and the printer will
continue to print.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
NOTE
It is possible to mask some errors simultaneously.
4. Error masking can be cancelled by any of the following 3 ways.
(1) Indicate “-L” again pressing the [ ENTER ] Key.

(2) Cancel the Service Mode.
(3) Turn off the machine.
8-116 K115sm8e4.doc
8. 1. 9 Test Print Mode (Sub Mode 8)
8. 1. 8. 1 Function
Internal test pattern can be printed out for diagnostic purpose, with changing several settings
according to the necessity. Test Print Mode has 9 sub modes.
Sub Mode No. Setting

0 Print Start Mode
1 Print Number Setting Mode
2 Test Pattern Selection Mode
3 Media Source Selection Mode
4 Cut Length Selection Mode
5 Media Type Selection Mode
6 Interval Print Mode
7 Negative Mode
8 Mirror Mode

The 1st digit from the left indicates “8” which is the Sub Mode number of “Test Print Mode”.
The 2nd digit indicates any Setting Mode Number (from 0 to 8) presently selected.
The 4th, 5th and 6th digits indicate the setting value of the selected Setting Mode.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
Sub Mode Number of Test Print Mode

Setting Mode Number
Setting value
8-117 K115sm8e4.doc
Sub Mode Number of Test Print Mode
MENU ENTER ONLINE
2. The 2nd digit from the left indicates the Setting Mode Number presently selected. Indicate the
necessary Setting Mode Number pressing [ ] Key (increment) and [ ] Key (decrement).
Refer to the following for the setting of each Setting Mode Number. And refer to the
“reference page” shown in the list for more description of each setting mode.
Example : “Print Number Setting Mode” is to be selected for deciding the number of print.
Indicate its Setting Mode Number “1”.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
Setting Mode Number of “Print Number Setting Mode”
Setting Mode No. Contents of setting Reference page

0 Print Start Mode 8-122
1 Print Number Setting Mode 8-123
2 Test Pattern Selection Mode 8-124
3 Media Source Selection Mode 8-125
4 Cut Length Selection Mode 8-126
5 Media Type Selection Mode (Bypass Feed only) 8-127
6 Interval Print Mode 8-127
7 Negative Mode 8-128
8 Mirror Mode 8-128
8-118 K115sm8e4.doc
3. Press the [ ENTER ] Key. The setting value on the 4th, 5th and 6th digits starts flashing and
becomes changeable.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
Example : Number of print is set to 25 prints.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8-119 K115sm8e4.doc
5. Press the [ ENTER] Key to decide the setting value. The setting value on the 4th, 5th and 6th
digits stops flashing when decided.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
NOTE
(1) Unless the setting is decided, it is impossible to select other Sub Mode Numbers or other
Setting Mode Numbers.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
Sub Mode No. Setting Mode No.
(2) If the [ ONLINE ] Key is pressed before the decision of setting value, the value on
changing is cancelled and the previous setting is recovered.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8-120 K115sm8e4.doc
6. Change other setting items in the same way if necessary. When all necessary settings are
changed, select the Print Start Mode by indicating the Setting Mode Number “0”.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
Setting Mode Number of “Print Mode”
7. Confirm that “rdy” is indicated, and press the [ ENTER ] Key to start printing. “Prt” will be
indicated when on printing.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
NOTE
Press the [ ENTER ] Key again to cancel test printing in the middle.
8-121 K115sm8e4.doc
8. 1. 8.4 Description of each Setting Mode
(1) Print Start Mode (Setting Mode No.0)
This mode starts and stops a Test Print.

To start printing, press the [ ENTER ] Key when “rdy” is indicated.
To stop (cancel) printing in the middle, press the [ ENTER ] Key again.
Print Start Mode informs the status of KIP9000 indicating a Status Code on 4th, 5th and 6th digits.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
Status
Status Code Meaning

rdy Printer is ready for printing.
Er An error occurs.
JA A Jam occurs.
OP Any door is open.
noP Media is not installed on the selected media

source.
-- Waiting
Prt During print.
8-122 K115sm8e4.doc
(2) Print Number Setting Mode (Setting Mode No.1)
Number of print can be set. The setting range is from 1 to 99.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
Number of print (Example : 99 sheets)
NOTE
Do not select “SP” although it is selectable in Print Number Setting Mode. This is a special
mode to print 30,000 prints continuously, which is useful only on testing in manufacturer.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
SP (Do not select this!)
8-123 K115sm8e4.doc
(3) Test Pattern Selection Mode (Setting Mode No.2)
Printed test pattern can be selected. KIP9000 has the following 8 test patterns. Select the
necessary patter by indicating its own “pattern number”.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
Pattern number (Example : Pattern No.3)
Pattern No.1 Pattern No.4 Pattern No.7
Pattern No.2 Pattern No.5 Pattern No.8
Pattern No.3 Pattern No.6
8-124 K115sm8e4.doc
(4) Media Source Selection Mode (Setting Mode No.3)
One of 5 media source (roll 1-4 & bypass) can be selected and used for test printing. Select the
necessary source indicating its own “media source number”.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
Media source number (Example : Roll 2)
Media source No. Media source

0 Bypass Feeder
1 Roll Deck 1
2 Roll Deck 2
3 Roll Deck 3
4 Roll Deck 4
8-125 K115sm8e4.doc
(5) Cut Length Selection Mode (Setting Mode No.4)
It is possible to specify the cut length which is applied when printed with a roll media.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
Cut length (Example : A0)
Selectable setting values are as follows.
Metric format Inch format

Setting value Cut length Setting value Cut length
A0 1189mm 48 48”
A1 841mm 44 44”
A2 594mm 36 36”
A3 420mm 34 34”
A4 297mm 30 30”
A5 210mm 24 24”
b1 1030mm 22 22”
b2 728mm 18 18”
b3 515mm 17 17”
b4 364mm 12 12”
b5 257mm 11 11”
SC As required 8.5 8.5”
SC As required
NOTE
When “SC” is selected, the operator can send a cutting signal anytime to cut the roll media by
requested length. Start printing, and press the [ ENTER ] Key at the time the media should be
cut. (If the [ ENTER ] Key is not pressed, media will be cut in 6m long or 24m long depending
on the maximum cut length setting.)
8-126 K115sm8e4.doc
(6) Media Type Selection Mode : Bypass Feed only (Setting Mode No.5)
When printed with a cut sheet media, the media type can be specified.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
Media type No. (Example : Plain paper)
Media type No. Media type

0 Plain paper
1 Tracing paper
2 Film
(7) Interval Print Mode (Setting Mode No.6)
Interval Print can be activated.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
Setting value (Example : Interval print is selected.)
Setting value Media source

0 Normal print
1 Interval print
Reference
When multiple number of test printing is performed when in the Interval Mode, printer stops
completely and goes into ready state whenever after ejecting one print, and then start printing
the next sheet.
8-127 K115sm8e4.doc
(8) Negative Mode (Setting Mode No.7)
Selected test pattern is printed by negative image.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
Setting value (Example : Negative image is selected.)

0 Normal image
1 Negative image
(9) Mirror Mode (Setting Mode No.8)
Selected test pattern is printed by mirror image.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
Setting value (Example : Mirror image is selected.)

0 Normal image
1 Mirror image
8-128 K115sm8e4.doc
8. 1.10 Special Operation Mode (Sub Mode 9)
8. 1.10. 1 Function
Special Operation Mode offers the following items;
Refer to [8.1.10.3 Operation/description of each item] on and after the page 8-131.
Item Setting item Permission for Refer to

No. the operation page ;
00 Image Corona Wire Cleaning Mode 8-132
01 Cutter Cleaning Mode 8-133
02 LED Head Cleaning Mode 8-134
03 Image Corona Adjustment Mode Do not operate 8-135
04 Pre-Transfer LED Adjustment Mode Do not operate 8-136
05 Transfer Corona Adjustment Mode Do not operate 8-137
06 Separation Corona Adjustment Mode Do not operate 8-138
07 Positive Developer Bias Adjustment Mode Do not operate 8-139
(Toner Collection Process)
08 Negative Developer Bias Adjustment Mode Do not operate 8-140
(Print Process)
09 Toner Supplying Mode 8-141
0A Surface Potential Control Mode : Manual execution of 8-142
control
0b Density Lock Mode : Setting of Target Density 8-143
0C Density Control Mode : Manual execution of control 8-144
NOTE
Adjustment modes (Item No. from 03 to 08) are for manufacturer’s use to make a final
machine inspection right before shipment. It is not recommended for the service side to make
operation in these modes.
8-129 K115sm8e4.doc
8. 1.10. 2 Indication of the Operation Panel
The 1st digit from the left indicates “9” which is the Sub Mode number of “Special Operation Mode”.
The 2nd and 3rd digit indicates any Item Number presently selected.
The 4th, 5th and 6th digits indicate either status or setting value.
MENU ENTER ONLINE

Item Number
Status or setting value
8-130 K115sm8e4.doc
8. 1.10. 3 Operation and explanation for each item
(1) How to select each item
MENU ENTER ONLINE
2. The 2nd digit from the left indicates the Item Number presently selected. Indicate the
Example : “LED Head Cleaning Mode” is to be selected.

Indicate its Item Number “02”.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
Item Number of “LED Head Cleaning Mode”
8-131 K115sm8e4.doc
(2) Image Corona Wire Cleaning Mode (Item No.0)
Cleaning for the Image Corona Wire can be performed by operating its cleaning mechanism.
1. Indicate the Item Number “00” on the 2nd digit. After confirming that “- -” on 5th and 6th digits is
lighting, press the [ ENTER ] Key to start cleaning. The 5th and 6th digits indicate “8 8” in
flashing during cleaning.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
“8 8” flashes during cleaning.
NOTE
It is unable to start cleaning even if the [ ENTER ] Key is pressed if “- -” is flashing on the 5th
and 6th digits.
2. When cleaning is finished, “- -” lights on 5th and 6th digits again.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8-132 K115sm8e4.doc
(3) Cutter Cleaning Mode (Item No.1)
Cleaning for the Cutter Blade can be performed by operating its cleaning mechanism.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
NOTE
and 6th digits.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8-133 K115sm8e4.doc
(4) LED Head Cleaning Mode (Item No.2)
Cleaning for the LED Head can be performed by operating its cleaning mechanism.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
NOTE
and 6th digits.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8-134 K115sm8e4.doc
(5) Image Corona Adjustment Mode (Item No.3)
When this mode is executed;

• Drum rotates in a 330 degrees arc.
• Image Corona takes discharging when Drum is rotating.
lighting, press the [ ENTER ] Key to start the operation. Drum rotates and Image Corona takes
discharging, and the 5th and 6th digits indicate “8 8” in flashing.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
“8 8” flashes during the operation.
NOTE
It is unable to start the operation even if the [ ENTER ] Key is pressed if “- -” is flashing on the
5th and 6th digits.
2. When the operation is finished, “- -” lights on 5th and 6th digits again.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8-135 K115sm8e4.doc
(6) Pre-Transfer LED Adjustment Mode (Item No.4)

• Pre-transfer LED lights when Drum is rotating.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
NOTE
5th and 6th digits.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8-136 K115sm8e4.doc
(7) Transfer Corona Adjustment Mode (Item No.5)

• Transfer Corona takes discharging when Drum is rotating.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
NOTE
5th and 6th digits.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8-137 K115sm8e4.doc
(8) Separation Corona Adjustment Mode (Item No.6)

• Separation Corona takes discharging when Drum is rotating.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
NOTE
5th and 6th digits.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8-138 K115sm8e4.doc
(9) Developer Bias (Positive) Adjustment Mode (Toner Collection Process) (Item No.7)
Positive Developer Bias is supplied to the Developer Roller.
lighting, press the [ ENTER ] Key to start outputting the positive Bias. The 5th and 6th digits
indicate “8 8” in flashing when bias is being outputted.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
“8 8” flashes during output.
NOTE
It is unable to start outputting the bias even if the [ ENTER ] Key is pressed if “- -” is flashing
2. Press the [ ENTER ] Key again to stop outputting. “- -” lights on the 5th and 6th digits again.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
NOTE
Make sure to stop outputting manually pressing the [ ENTER ] key as it does not stop
automatically.
8-139 K115sm8e4.doc
(10) Developer Bias (Negative) Adjustment Mode (Print Process) (Item No.8)
Negative Developer Bias is supplied to the Developer Roller.
lighting, press the [ ENTER ] Key to start outputting the negative Bias. The 5th and 6th digits
indicate “8 8” in flashing when bias is being outputted.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
“8 8” flashes during output.
NOTE
It is unable to start outputting the bias even if the [ ENTER ] Key is pressed if “- -” is flashing
2. Press the [ ENTER ] Key again to stop outputting. “- -” lights on the 5th and 6th digits again.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
NOTE
Make sure to stop outputting manually pressing the [ ENTER ] key as it does not stop
automatically.
8-140 K115sm8e4.doc
(11) Toner Supplying Mode (Item No.9)
Toner Supplying Mode is a kind of setup mode used during machine installation or developer
maintenance. When it is executed, necessary amount of toner can be supplied from Hopper to
Developer automatically.
lighting, press the [ ENTER ] Key to start supplying the toner. The 5th and 6th digits indicate
“8 8” in flashing during toner supply.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
“8 8” flashes during toner supply.
NOTE
It is unable to start supplying the toner even if the [ ENTER ] Key is pressed if “- -” is flashing
2. When the printer detects “toner full”, it stops toner supplying automatically. “- -” lights on 5th
and 6th digits again.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8-141 K115sm8e4.doc
(12) Surface Potential Control Mode : Manual execution of control (Sub Mode A)
It is possible to execute Surface Potential Control manually.
1. Indicate the Item Number “0A” on the 2nd digit. After confirming that “- -” on 5th and 6th digits
is lighting, press the [ ENTER ] Key to start Surface Potential Control. The 5th and 6th digits
indicate “8 8” in flashing during toner supply.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
“8 8” flashes during Surface Potential Control.
2. When the printer finishes Surface potential Control, “- -” lights on 5th and 6th digits again.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8-142 K115sm8e4.doc
(13) Density Lock Mode : Setting of Target Density (0b)
It is possible to set new Target Density and make the KIP9000 memorize it.
NOTE
Normally it is unnecessary to set new Target Density as it has been already adjusted properly
in the factory. It is not recommended to use this mode in the field except for some special
case.
1. Indicate the Item Number “0b” on the 2nd digit. After confirming that “- -” on 5th and 6th digits
is lighting, press the [ ENTER ] Key to start Density Lock operation. The 5th and 6th digits
indicate “8 8” in flashing during toner supply.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
2. When the printer finishes Density Lock operation, “- -” lights on 5th and 6th digits again.
The Target Density is automatically refreshed.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8-143 K115sm8e4.doc
(14) Density Control Mode : Manual execution of control (0C)
It is possible to execute Density Control manually.
1. Indicate the Item Number “0C” on the 2nd digit. After confirming that “- -” on 5th and 6th digits
is lighting, press the [ ENTER ] Key to start Density Control. The 5th and 6th digits indicate
“8 8” in flashing during toner supply.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
2. When the printer finishes Surface potential Control, “- -” lights on 5th and 6th digits again.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8-144 K115sm8e4.doc
8. 1.11 Special Setting Mode (Sub Mode A)
8. 1.11. 1 Function
Special Operation Mode offers the following items;
Refer to [8.1.11.3 Operation/description of each item] on and after the page 8-146.
Item Setting item Permission for Refer to

No. the operation page ;
0 Backup Data Clearing Mode Do not operate 8-146
1 Software Counter A Setting Mode (Lower 4 digits) 8-148
2 Software Counter A Setting Mode (Upper 3 digits) 8-148
3 Software Counter B Setting Mode (Lower 4 digits) 8-148
4 Software Counter B Setting Mode (Upper 3 digits) 8-148
5 Print interval for continuous long printing 8-150
6 Key Card Setting Mode 8-152
7 Folder Setting Mode 8-154
CAUTION
Do not make any operation in the Backup Data Clearing Mode (Item No.0)! Careless
operation in this mode may result in losing all fundamental setting values individually
set on each machine!
8. 1.11. 2 Indication of the Operation Panel

The 1st digit from the left indicates “A” which is the Sub Mode number of “Special Setting Mode”.
The 2nd digit indicates any Item Number presently selected.
The 3rd, 4th, 5th and 6th digits indicate either status or setting value.
MENU ENTER ONLINE

Item Number
Status or setting value
8-145 K115sm8e4.doc
8. 1.11. 3 Operation and explanation for each item
(1) Backup Data Clearing Mode (Item No.A)
All Backup Data values are cleared and go back to the factory defaults.
CAUTION
Do not make any operation in the Backup Data Clearing Mode (Item No.A)! Careless
operation in this mode may result in losing all fundamental setting values individually
set on each machine!
1. After indicating the Item Number “0” on the 2nd digit, press and hold both [ ENTER ] and
[ MENU ], and also press and hold the [ ONLINE ] Key. “CL” flashes on the 5th and 6th digits.
MENU ENTER ONLI NE
“CL” flashes.
MENU ENTER ONLI NE
8-146 K115sm8e4.doc
2. Keep your hand from all keys when “CL” is flashing. (“CL” keeps on flashing.)
3. Press the [ ENTER ] key. All backup Data are initialized and the printer is turned off
automatically.
MENU ENTER ONLI NE
8-147 K115sm8e4.doc
(2) Software Counter Setting Modes (Item No. from 1 to4E)
The counted values on 2 software counters A and B can be changed on items b to E.
The counted value of each counter consists of 7 digits, and it is divided into 2 groups as upper 3
digits and lower 4 digits.
Item No. Contents of setting

1 Lower 4 digits of Software Counter A
2 Upper 3 digits of Software Counter A
3 Lower 4 digits of Software Counter B
4 Upper 3 digits of Software Counter B
Example) Present count of the Software Counter A is 0001234, and it is to be corrected to

0001250. This can be corrected in item No.1.
1. After indicating the Item Number “1” on the 2nd digit, press the [ ENTER ] Key. The setting
value on the 3rd, 4th, 5th and 6th digits flashes and becomes changeable.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
Setting value flashes.
8-148 K115sm8e4.doc
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
3. Decide the setting value pressing the [ ENTER ] Key. The setting value stops flashing when
decided.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8-149 K115sm8e4.doc
(3) Print interval for continuous long printing (Item No.5)
It is possible to keep a longer interval time between prints in continuous multiple number of long
printing (longer then 2 meters). The interval time between prints will become about 10 seconds
longer than usual when set to “1”.
Setting value Contents

0 Interval time is normal.
1 Longer interval (10 seconds longer than usual) is kept between prints in the
continuous multiple number of long printing.
value on the 6th digit flashes and becomes changeable.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8-150 K115sm8e4.doc
decided.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8-151 K115sm8e4.doc
(4) Key Card Setting Mode (Item No.6)
If a Key Card is connected to KIP9000, it is possible to make the printer recognize its existence,
and it is also possible to decide the counting unit.

0 Key Card is not connected.
1 Key Card is connected, and it counts the print length by every 1m for each
paper width separately.
2 Key Card is connected, and it counts the print length by every 0.1m for each
paper width separately.
3 Key Card is connected, and it counts the number of prints for each standard
size separately.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8-152 K115sm8e4.doc
decided.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8-153 K115sm8e4.doc
(5) Folder Selection Mode (Item No.7) (USE IPS ONLY)
If any folder is connected to KIP9000, it is possible to make the printer recognize what kind of
Folder is connected.

0 Folder is not connected.
1 Bay folder is connected.
2 ESTE folder is connected.
3 Reserved (Same with “Folder is not connected.”)
4 Reserved (Same with “Folder is not connected.”)
NOTE
If Bay folder is connected, the following settings are available in User Modes F0 to Fb.
• Fold type
• Width of fan folding
• Margin
Refer to [8.2.15 User Mode F0 to Fb (Fold settings for Bay Folder)] on and after page 8-205
for the details.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8-154 K115sm8e4.doc
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
decided.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8-155 K115sm8e4.doc
8. 2 User Modes
KIP 9000 provides 14 User Modes.
Name of Description User Mode Code

User Mode
User Mode 1 Test print U1.
User Mode 2 Calendar setting U2.
User Mode 3 Warm Sleep Mode ON / OFF & timer setting U3.
User Mode 4 Cold Sleep Mode timer setting U4.
User Mode 5 Automatic paper cut at power on U5.
User Mode 6 Transfer Support LED ON/OFF [Film] U6.
User Mode 7 Alarm ON / OFF U7.
User Mode 8 Choice of Standard / Special Print Mode [Plain paper] U8.
User Mode 9 Choice of Standard / Special Print Mode [Tracing paper] U9.
User Mode A Choice of Standard / Special Print Mode [Film] UA.
User Mode B Selection of Image Enhancement Mode Ub.
User Mode C Enlargement of printable area UC.
User Mode D Temporal clearance of E-26 error Ud.
User Mode E Temporal clearance of E-28 error UE.
The following optional User Modes (F0 to Fb) are normally not accessible, but become accessible
only when the Service Mode 9-H (Folder Selection Mode) is set to “1” (Bay folder). (These modes
can specify several folding settings applied when Bay Folder is connected)
Name of User Setting matter User Mode Code

Mode
User Mode F0 Fold type Applied to folding method 1 F0
User Mode F1 Width of fan folding F1
User Mode F2 Margin F2
User Mode FA Width of fan folding FA
User Mode Fb Margin Fb
8-156 K115sm8e5.doc
8. 2. 1 User Mode 1 (Test Print)
[Function]
An internal test pattern can be printed out for checking the image.
• Printing media is selected automatically.
• Cut length obeys the service mode setting. (Refer to [(9) Cut length of user Test Print
(No.08)] on the page 8-50.)
[Operation]
1. Press the [ MENU ] Key once to select the User Mode 1. [ MENU ] Key lights green and the
Status Display indicates “U1.”
MENU ENTER ONLINE
Press [ MENU ] once.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
2. The 4th, 5th and 6th digits indicates the status of KIP 9000.
- - - (flashing) : Test print is not available.

ooo (lighting) : Test print is available.
ooo (flashing) : On test printing
MENU ENTER ONLINE
Status of KIP 9000
8-157 K115sm8e5.doc
3. Press the [ ENTER ] Key when “ooo” is lighting. Test print is started and “ooo” flashes.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
4. When test print is finished, “ooo” stops flashing and lights. Press the [ ONLINE ] Key to cancel
the User Mode 1.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8-158 K115sm8e5.doc
8. 2. 2 User Mode 2 (Calendar setting)
[Function]
Calender setting can be corrected if wrong. (KIP9000 memorizes calendar information on its
circuit.)
NOTE
(1) KIP9000 can operate without problem even if the calendar setting is wrong.
(2) The calendar setting is used for diagnostics purpose. If some error or mis-feed occurs,
KIP9000 records it with the information “when” it occurred based on the calendar setting
set in User Mode 2. As such record is very useful for the service personnel to diagnose the
trouble, please set the calendar occasionally to the correct date and time.
[Operation]
1. Press the [ MENU ] Key twice to select the User Mode 2. [ MENU ] Key lights green and the
Status Display indicates “U2.”.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
Press [ MENU ] twice.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
2. The User Mode 2 has 8 sub modes which can be orderly selected by pressing [ ] and [ ]
Keys. 2 of them are “Confirmation Modes”, and the rest of 6 are “Correction Modes”.
Order of selection Name of Sub Mode Example of indication

1 Confirmation Mode – Date 020531
2 Confirmation Mode – Time 1 2.0 0.3 0
3 Correction Mode – Year C1 02
4 Correction Mode – Month C2 05
5 Correction Mode – Day C3 31
6 Correction Mode – Hour C4 12
7 Correction Mode – Minute C5 00
8 Correction Mode – Second C6 30
8-159 K115sm8e5.doc
3. Select the “Confirmation Mode – Date” first pressing the [ ] Key, and confirm the current
setting for year, month and date.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
Example : May 31, 2002
MENU ENTER ONLINE
Year
Month
Day
4. Select the “Confirmation Mode – Time” next pressing the [ ] Key, and confirm the current
setting for hour, minute and second.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
Example : 12 : 00 : 30
MENU ENTER ONLINE
Hour
Minute
Second
8-160 K115sm8e5.doc
5. If some item needs to be corrected, select its correction mode pressing [ ] and [ ] Keys.
6 Correction Modes are shown by Correction Mode Code as C1, C2, C3, C4, C5 and C6, and
necessary correction mode can be selected by indicating its code.
Correction Mode Codes Description

C1 Correction Mode – Year
C2 Correction Mode – Month
C3 Correction Mode – Day
C4 Correction Mode – Hour
C5 Correction Mode – Minute
C6 Correction Mode – Second
Example : “C5” is selected as “Minute” is to be corrected.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
Correction Mode Code for Correction Mode - Minute
6. Press the [ MENU ] Key. The setting value on 5th and 6th digits flashes and becomes
changeable.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8-161 K115sm8e5.doc
Example : Minute is to be corrected from 00 to 05.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8. Decide the new setting value pressing the [ ENTER ] Key. The setting value stops flashing
when decided.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
Setting value stops flashing.
9. Correct other setting items in the same way if necessary.
8-162 K115sm8e5.doc
10. When all necessary items are corrected, press the [ ONLINE ] Key to cancel the User Mode 2.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8-163 K115sm8e5.doc
8. 2. 3 User Mode 3
(Warm Sleep Mode ON / OFF & timer setting)
[Function]
It is possible to select whether or not the Warm Sleep Mode works. The timer for Warm Sleep can
be specified as well. If the KIP 9000 does not receive any print/copy for the time set as timer in
User Mode 3, it will go into the Warm Sleep Mode to save the power consumption.
Reference
Warm Sleep Mode is a kind of power saving mode. It works when the KIP9000 does not print
for the time the timer specifies. Power consumption is reduced by maintaining the temperature
of fuser at a lower degree than usual stand by state.
Warm Sleep Mode will be cancelled automatically when a print job or a copy job is sent from
the outer device. However it may take time until the KIP9000 starts printing as it needs to
recover enough temperature on the fuser. (Print does not start until the KIP9000 gets ready
recovering enough temperature.)
[Operation]
1. Press the [ MENU ] Key 3 times to select the User Mode 3. [ MENU ] Key lights green and the
MENU ENTER ONLINE
Press [ MENU ] 3 times.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8-164 K115sm8e5.doc
2. The Status Display indicates either “OFF” or “On” according to the current setting. Press the
[ MENU ] Key. The setting value (OFF/On) flashes and becomes changeable.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
“OFF” (or “On”) flashes.
3. Select either “OFF” or “On” pressing [ ] Key and [ ] Key..

0 Warm Sleep Mode works when a decided time has passed.
(Timer can be set in the later procedure.)
1 Warm Sleep Mode does not work.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8-165 K115sm8e5.doc
4. Press the [ ENTER ] Key to decide the setting.
• If “On“ is decided, the Status Display indicates the setting value of Warm Sleep timer in
flashing. Go to the following procedure 5 for setting the timer.
• If “OFF” is decided, go to the procedure 7 as it is unnecessary to set Warm Sleep timer.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
Setting value (timer) flashes.
5. Indicate the necessary Warm Sleep timer value pressing [ ] Key (increment) and [ ] Key
(decrement). Setting unit is “minute”, and the selectable values are 10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60,
90, 120, 180 and 240.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8-166 K115sm8e5.doc
6. Press the [ ENTER ] Key to decide the timer value. The setting value stops flashing when
decided.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
Setting value (timer) stops flashing.
7. Press the [ ONLINE ] Key to cancel the User Mode 3.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8-167 K115sm8e5.doc
8. 2. 4 User Mode 4
(Cold Sleep Mode timer setting)
[Function]
It is possible to set the Cold Sleep timer. If the KIP 9000 does not receive any print/copy for the
time set as timer in User Mode 4, it will go into the Cold Sleep Mode to save the power
consumption.
Reference
Cold Sleep Mode is a kind of power saving mode that can save more power than Warm Sleep
Mode. It works when the KIP9000 does not print for the time the timer specifies. Power
consumption is reduced greatly by completely shutting off supplying the power to the fuser
unit. The Cold Sleep Mode will be cancelled automatically when a print job or a copy job is
sent from the outer device. However it may take time until the KIP9000 starts printing as it
needs to recover enough temperature on the fuser. (Print does not start until the KIP9000 gets
ready recovering enough temperature.) Note that the Cold Sleep Mode will require longer
recovering time than Warm Sleep.
NOTE
If the Cold Sleep does not start even if the time specified in
User Mode 4 has passed, the Cold Sleep Mode may be set to MENU ENTER ONLINE
OFF. If there is a dot beside the timer value, the Cold Sleep
Mode is set to OFF (inactive).
To set the Cold Sleep to ON, see [(11) Cold Sleep ON/OFF
(No.0C)] on page 8-57.
Dot (Cold Sleep is OFF)
[Operation]
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8-168 K115sm8e5.doc
2. Press the [ MENU ] Key. The timer value for Cold Sleep flashes and becomes changeable.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
Setting value (timer) flashes.
3. Indicate the necessary Cold Sleep timer value pressing [ ] Key (increment) and [ ] Key
(decrement). Setting unit is “minute”, and the selectable values are 10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60,
90, 120, 180 and 240.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8-169 K115sm8e5.doc
4. Press the [ ENTER ] Key to decide the timer value. The setting value stops flashing when
decided.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
Setting value (timer) stops flashing.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8-170 K115sm8e5.doc
8. 2. 5 User Mode 5
(Automatic paper cut at power ON)
[Function]
It is possible to make Initial Cut for all of 4 roll media whenever KIP9000 is turned on.
Reference
Initial Cut is a function to cut off the leading part of roll media in 240mm long.
[Operation]
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
2. Press the [ MENU ] Key. The setting value flashes and becomes changeable.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8-171 K115sm8e5.doc

0 KIP 9000 takes Initial Cut for all roll media at turning ON.
1 KIP 9000 does not take Initial Cut at turning ON.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
4. Press the [ ENTER ] Key to decide the setting value. The setting value stops flashing when
decided.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8-172 K115sm8e5.doc
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8-173 K115sm8e5.doc
8. 2. 6 User Mode 6
(Transfer Support LED ON/OFF [Film])
[Function]
It is possible to turn on the Transfer Support LED for getting a clearer and darker image when
printed with a unsupported printing media.
(Transfer Support LED is also called “Separation Lamp” that is below the Separation Corona.)
NOTE
(1) The printed image may look not clear or not enough dark when printed with some king of
unsupported type of printing media. In such case the print image may possibly become
clearer and darker if the Transfer Support LED is turned on in the User Mode 6. (However
note that the Transfer Support LED is not always the complete solution for such case.)
(2) The service personnel can decide to which media type the Transfer Support LED should
work. See the following each page.
• [(17) Separation Lamp ON / OFF (PPC) (No.17)] on page 8-60
• [(18) Separation Lamp ON / OFF (Tracing) (No.18)] on page 8-61
• [(36) Separation Lamp ON / OFF (Film) (No.C6)] on page 8-76
[Operation]
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8-174 K115sm8e5.doc
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE

0 Transfer Support LED does not work.
1 Transfer Support LED works when printed with film.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8-175 K115sm8e5.doc
decided.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8-176 K115sm8e5.doc
8. 2. 7 User Mode 7 (Alarm ON / OFF)
[Function]
When alarm is set to ON, the following status can be noticed by the sound of alarm.
(1) Toner empty

(2) Toner near empty
(3) Roll empty
Reference
Alarm will continue to sound if unless either of the following operations is done.
1. Remove the cause of error. (Replace the Toner Cartridge or install a new roll media.)
2. Or press the [ ] Key to stop the alarm without removing the cause of error.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
[Operation]
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8-177 K115sm8e6.doc
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE

0 Alarm does not sound.
1 Alarm sounds if “toner empty”, “toner near empty” or “roll empty” occurs.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8-178 K115sm8e6.doc
decided.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8-179 K115sm8e6.doc
8. 2. 8 User Mode 8
(Choice of Standard /
Special Print Mode [Plain paper])
[Function]
The operation mode of KIP9000 can be set to either [Standard Print Mode] or [Special Print Mode]
according to the situation. This setting become effective when printed with a plain paper.
• When the User Mode 8 is set to [Standard Print Mode], the “Standard Setting Value” of all
dual value items controls the total print operations of KIP9000.
• When the User Mode 8 is set to [Special Print Mode], the “Special Setting Value” of all dual
value items controls the total print operations of KIP9000.
Reference
Some setting items of Adjustment Modes 0/1 of Service Mode are available to have dual
setting values as “Standard Setting Value” and “Special Setting Value”. (Such items are called
“dual value items”)
• “Standard Setting Value” is (in many cases) the factory default setting that is suitable to
produce a satisfactory image in a recommended usage condition.
• “Special Setting Value” is a kind of custom setting that is required to produce a
satisfactory image in some special usage condition.
The user sets the User Mode 8 to either [Standard Print Mode] or [Special Print Mode]
considering the situation, like he/she sets it to [Standard Print Mode] when in the
recommended condition and sets it to [Special Print Mode] when in the special condition.
When set to [Standard Print Mode] for example, the “Standard Setting Values” of all dual value
items become effective and the KIP9000 operates according to those settings.
the page 8-51 for more description of “Standard Setting Value” and “Special Setting Value”.
NOTE
User Modes 8, 9 and A are the selection mode of [Standard Print Mode] and [Special Print
Mode]. They are concerned with their own target media type respectively as follows.
User Mode 8 : Concerned with the plain paper

User Mode 9 : Concerned with the tracing paper
User Mode A : Concerned with the film
8-180 K115sm8e6.doc
[Operation]
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8-181 K115sm8e6.doc

0 Standard Print Mode is applied in printing. (When plain paper is used.)
1 Special Print Mode is applied in printing. (When plain paper is used.)
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
decided.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8-182 K115sm8e6.doc
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8-183 K115sm8e6.doc
8. 2. 9 User Mode 9
Special Print Mode [Tracing paper])
[Function]
according to the situation. This setting become effective when printed with a tracing paper.
• When the User Mode 9 is set to [Standard Print Mode], the “Standard Setting Value” of all
• When the User Mode 9 is set to [Special Print Mode], the “Special Setting Value” of all dual
Reference
The user sets the User Mode 9 to either [Standard Print Mode] or [Special Print Mode]
NOTE

8-184 K115sm8e6.doc
[Operation]
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8-185 K115sm8e6.doc

0 Standard Print Mode is applied in printing. (When tracing paper is used.)
1 Special Print Mode is applied in printing. (When tracing paper is used.)
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
decided.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8-186 K115sm8e6.doc
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8-187 K115sm8e6.doc
8. 2.10 User Mode A
Special Print Mode [Film])
[Function]
according to the situation. This setting become effective when printed with a film.
• When the User Mode A is set to [Standard Print Mode], the “Standard Setting Value” of all
• When the User Mode A is set to [Special Print Mode], the “Special Setting Value” of all dual
Reference
The user sets the User Mode A to either [Standard Print Mode] or [Special Print Mode]
NOTE

8-188 K115sm8e6.doc
[Operation]
1. Press the [ MENU ] Key 10 times to select the User Mode A. [ MENU ] Key lights green and the
Status Display indicates “UA.”.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8-189 K115sm8e6.doc

0 Standard Print Mode is applied in printing. (When film is used.)
1 Special Print Mode is applied in printing. (When film is used.)
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
decided.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8-190 K115sm8e6.doc
5. Press the [ ONLINE ] Key to cancel the User Mode A.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8-191 K115sm8e6.doc
8. 2.11 User Mode B
(Selection of Image Enhancement Mode)
[Function]
The printed image can be enhanced most appropriately by selecting proper Image Enhancement
Mode. KIP9000 has 4 Image Enhancement Modes. Printed image is more enhanced (become
darker) when selecting a larger level. Try to select a larger level if the image looks weak.
Setting Image Enhancement Description

value Mode
0 Mode 0 (OFF) Image is not enhanced
(Image Enhancement is not performed)
1 Mode 1 Image is enhanced normally.
2 Mode 2 Image is more enhanced (becomes darker) than Mode 1.
3 Mode 3 Image is most enhanced. (become darkest)
NOTE
The selection of Image Enhancement Mode can be done on the Service Mode (4-C7) also.
Refer to [(37) Image Enhancement Mode Selection (No.C7)] on page 8-77. As neither Service
Mode nor User Mode has the priority for the setting, the setting specified on either mode at the
last occasion become effective.
[Operation]
1. Press the [ MENU ] Key 11 times to select the User Mode B. [ MENU ] Key lights green and the
Status Display indicates “Ub.”.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8-192 K115sm8e6.doc
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
Setting Image Enhancement Description

value Mode
0 Mode 0 (OFF) Image is not enhanced
(Image Enhancement is not performed)
1 Mode 1 Image is enhanced normally.
2 Mode 2 Image is more enhanced (becomes darker) than Mode 1.
3 Mode 3 Image is most enhanced. (become darkest)
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8-193 K115sm8e6.doc
decided.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
5. Press the [ ONLINE ] Key to cancel the User Mode B.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8-194 K115sm8e6.doc
8. 2.12 User Mode C (Print on TE margin area)
[Function]
User Mode C allows to print the image in the TE margin area (no TE margin is provided).
Normal Image area is enlarged
(TE margin is provided.) (No TE margin is provided.)
The following 3 settings are selectable.
Setting Selected setting Description

value
0 Normal setting Does not allow for printing on TE margin area. (Default)
1 TE Margin Print Mode 1 Allows for printing on TE margin area. A longer interval
is kept between prints for cleaning.
2 TE Margin Print Mode 2 Allows for printing on TE margin area. Normal interval is
kept between prints.
NOTE
When a continuous printing “without TE margin” is performed, sometimes the image on the
former print may be very weakly printed on the next print as “ghost image”.
• The Margin Print mode 1 has a special cleaning process between prints to get rid of
this ghost image. Therefore the interval between prints becomes longer than usual so
the print productivity is reduced, but a better image quality can be expected.
(Recommended setting)
• The Margin Print Mode 2 does not have the cleaning process. Therefore the print
productivity is the same as usual, but the prints may have ghost image. (Not
recommended setting)
8-195 K115sm8e6.doc
[Operation]
1. Press the [ MENU ] Key 12 times to select the User Mode C. [ MENU ] Key lights green and
the Status Display indicates “UC.”.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8-196 K115sm8e6.doc
Setting Selected setting Description

value
0 Normal setting Does not allow for printing on TE margin area. (Default)
1 TE Margin Print Mode 1 Allows for printing on TE margin area. A longer interval
is kept between prints for cleaning.
2 TE Margin Print Mode 2 Allows for printing on TE margin area. Normal interval is
kept between prints.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
decided.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8-197 K115sm8e6.doc
5. Press the [ ONLINE ] Key to cancel the User Mode C.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8-198 K115sm8e6.doc
8. 2.13 User Mode D
(Auto SP Control ON/OFF :
Temporary clearance of E-26 error)
[Function]
Auto SP Control can be set to ON or OFF. When it is set to OFF, service call errors E-26 might be
temporarily cleared for avoiding the breakdown of KIP9000.
Reference
The image quality varies according to the variation of temperature of surrounding environment.
To achieve a constant image quality in any environment, KIP9000 flexibly adjusts the
Developer Bias to the most appropriate level monitoring the variation of actual density with the
Density Sensor. And accompanying to the variation of Developer Bias, the surface potential of
Drum is also adjusted flexibly to have a proper voltage gap against Developer Bias. This
control for the surface potential is called Auto SP Control. If the Auto SP Control can not work
correctly for some reason, a service call error E-26 is indicated and no more print becomes
available.
As the user can not clear this error, KIP9000 will continue to be in breakdown until the error is
cleared by the service personnel. But if the error can be temporarily cleared in the User Mode
E by easing the error check level, KIP9000 will be relieved from breakdown and you will be
able to continue printing.
When you will clear the error by the User Mode E, note that;
• Image quality may not be satisfactory as the real time adjustment does not work.
• There may be some case that the error can not be cleared even if you ease the error
check level.
• The User Mode E does not remove the real cause of error. Therefore the service
personnel need to go customer site immediately for removing the real cause of error.
1. Press the [ MENU ] Key 13 times to select the User Mode D. [ MENU ] Key lights green and
the Status Display indicates “Ud.”.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8-199 K115sm8e6.doc
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE

0 KIP9000 does not make error checking for E-26. (OFF)
1 KIP9000 makes error checking for E-26. (ON)
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8-200 K115sm8e6.doc
decided.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
5. Press the [ ONLINE ] Key to cancel the User Mode D.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8-201 K115sm8e6.doc
8. 2.14 User Mode E
(Auto Density Control ON/OFF :
Temporary clearance of E-26 error)
Auto Density Control can be set to ON or OFF. When it is set to OFF, service call errors E-28
might be temporarily cleared for avoiding the breakdown of KIP9000.
Reference
The image quality varies according to the variation of temperature of surrounding environment.
To achieve a constant image quality in any environment, KIP9000 flexibly adjusts the
Developer Bias to the most appropriate level monitoring the variation of actual density with the
Density Sensor. This is called Auto Density Control. If the Auto Density Control can not work
correctly for some reason, a service call error E-28 is indicated and no more print becomes
available.
As the user can not clear this error, KIP9000 will continue to be in breakdown until the error is
cleared by the service personnel. But if the error can be temporarily cleared in the User Mode
E by easing the error check level, KIP9000 will be relieved from breakdown and you will be
able to continue printing.
When you will clear the error by the User Mode E, note that;
• Image quality may not be satisfactory as the real time adjustment does not work.
• There may be some case that the error can not be cleared even if you ease the error
check level.
• The User Mode E does not remove the real cause of error. Therefore the service
personnel need to go customer site immediately for removing the real cause of error.
1. Press the [ MENU ] Key 14 times to select the User Mode E. [ MENU ] Key lights green and the
Status Display indicates “UE.”.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8-202 K115sm8e6.doc
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE

0 KIP9000 does not make error checking for E-28. (OFF)
1 KIP9000 makes error checking for E-28 with normal check level. (ON1)
2 KIP9000 makes error checking for E-28 with strict check level. (ON2)
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8-203 K115sm8e6.doc
decided.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
5. Press the [ ONLINE ] Key to cancel the User Mode D.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8-204 K115sm8e6.doc
8. 2.15 User Mode F0 to Fb
(Fold settings for Bay Folder)
[Function]
KIP9000 provides 4 kinds of folding method when it is works together with Bay Folder.
The User Modes F0 to Fb are available to make customization on each of these folding methods
by specifying “fold type”, “width of fan fold” and “margin” respectively.
(1) Fold type

The following 3 types are selectable.
Setting Fold type

value
00 Not folded
01 Fan folding
02 Fan folding &

cross folding
(2) Width of fan fold

The width of fan fold can be increased or decreased ranging from 180 to 210mm (from 7.1” to
9.0”) in 1mm increment (0.1” increment).
8-205 K115sm8e6.doc
(3) Margin
Additional margin can be provided to the “last” fan fold, and its length can be increased or
decreased ranging from 0 to 30mm (from 0.0” to 1.2”) in 1mm (0.1”) increment.
12 User Modes from F0 to Fb have their own target setting as follows.
User Mode Target setting Target folding method

F0 Fold type Folding method 1
F1 Width of fan fold
F2 Margin
F5 Margin
F8 Margin
FA Width of fan fold
Fb Margin
8-206 K115sm8e6.doc
[Operation]
1. Indicate the code of necessary User Modes (F0 to Fb) pressing the [ MENU ] Key when the
KIP9000 is in normal condition.
User Mode Code Target setting Target folding method

F2 Margin
F5 Margin
F8 Margin
FA Width of fan fold
Fb Margin
[ MENU ] Key lights green and the Status Display indicates “FX.” on its 1st and 2nd digits from
the left.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
Press [ MENU ] necessary times.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8-207 K115sm8e6.doc
2. The Status Display indicates any setting value on its right half according to the selected User
Mode. Press the [ MENU ] Key, and the setting value flashes and becomes changeable.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8-208 K115sm8e6.doc
Selectable setting values depend on the selected User Mode.
(a) Fold type : Select any of “00”, “01” and “02”.
Setting Fold type

value
00 Not folded
01 Fan fold
02 Fan fold &

cross fold
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8-209 K115sm8e6.doc
(b) Width of fan fold : Change the value within the following adjustable range.
Unit Adjustable range Setting unit

Metric 180 to 210mm 1mm
Inch 7.1” to 9.0” 0.1”
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
(c) Margin : Change the value within the following adjustable range.
Unit Adjustable range Setting unit

Metric 00 to 30mm 1mm
Inch 0.0” to 1.2” 0.1”
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
8-210 K115sm8e6.doc
4. Press the [ ENTER ] Key to decide the selected setting value. It stops flashing when decided.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
5. Press the [ ONLINE ] Key to cancel the User Mode.
MENU ENTER ONLINE
MENU ENTER ONLINE
Reference
The followings are the default on each folding method.

Folding method Fold type Width of fan folding margin
Folding method 1 02 (fan fold & cross fold) 190mm 8.5” 0mm 0.8”
8-211 K115sm8e6.doc
8. 3 KIP Diagnostics
(Program used on field service)
KIP Diagnostics is an exclusive program used on the field service of KIP models including KIP9000.
8. 3. 1 Having a communication between KIP

Diagnostics on service laptop (PC) and
KIP9000
1. Copy the necessary programs of KIP Diagnostics onto anywhere in the service laptop (PC).
NOTE
Make sure to put 3 programs [KIPDiag.exe], [KipDiag.chm] and [KipDiag_JP.chm] in the
same folder.
8-212 K115sm8e7.doc
2. Confirm both service laptop (PC) and KIP9000 are turned off.
Connect the COM1 port of laptop and the DIAG. Port of KIP9000 with the RS232C cross cable.
Diag Port
NOTE
Use the following type of RS232C cable.
Printer PC
(D-Sub 9 pins female type) (D-Sub 9 pins female type)
2 RxD 2 RxD
3 TxD 3 TxD
5 SG 5 SG
8-213 K115sm8e7.doc
3. Turn on both laptop and KIP9000.
4. Run [KIPDiag.exe].
The main screen of KIP Diagnostics is indicated without indicating any information.
8-214 K115sm8e7.doc
5. Select [Serial Port] under [Setting].
6. Set the setting items in [Serial Port Dialog] to the

values shown in the right picture, and click on [OK].
Set to these values
8-215 K115sm8e7.doc
5. KIP Diagnostics starts a communication with the printer.
The information sent from the printer is indicated.
NOTE
If the communication is shut off for some reason, recover
it by [Initialize] under [Setting].
8-216 K115sm8e7.doc
8. 3. 2 Outline of Tabs on KIP Diagnostics
KIP Diagnostics has 6 Tabs that cover almost all main functions of KIP Diagnostics.
Basic Screen Tab Indicates the basic information of KIP9000 such as ROM version,
counter value and etc.
Display Tab Indicates kinds of signal status (input/output) and input data.
(Display Tab covers the functions of “Input/Output Checking Mode”
and “Data Monitoring Mode” of Service Mode.)
Setting Tab Available to change kinds of printer parameters. Also available to

upload and download the backup RAM file.
(Setting Tab covers the functions of Adjustment Mode 0/1 of
Service Mode.)
History Tab Indicates recent errors and jams with such information as error/jam
code, date/time, and counter value.
Upload ROM Data Tab Uploads the firmware data (ROM file) to KIP9000.
Test Print Tab Prints out the internal test printing.

(Test Print Tab covers the Test Print Mode of Service Mode.)
8-217 K115sm8e7.doc
8. 3. 3 Description of each Tab
8. 3. 3. 1 Basic Information Tab

Basic Screen Tab indicates the basic information of KIP9000 such as ROM version, counter value
and etc.
Machine ROM Version Version of current KIP9000 firmware

Information I/F Version Version of the Interface 8
Max Length Maximum print length
Architecture Selected print format (metric or inch)
Print Speed Print speed of KIP9000
Counter Total Counter Total length of print is indicated. (Counting unit is always “linear
meter”.)
Counter A Count value of Counter A.
Counter B Count value of Counter B.
Status Status of KIP9000 is indicated precisely.
Toner Volume Remaining level of toner in Toner Cartridge
Option Connected optional device is shown (if connected).
Condition Status of KIP9000 is shown.
Deck / Manual Feed The following media information on each media source is
indicated.
- Media width
- Media type
- Remaining level
Presently selected media source is shown by [>>].
8-218 K115sm8e7.doc
8. 3. 3. 2 Display Tab
Display Tab Indicates kinds of signal status (input/output) and input data. (Display Tab covers the
functions of “Input/Output Checking Mode” and “Data Monitoring Mode” of Service Mode.)
(1) (2) (3)
(1) [Number] column indicates the 4 digits codes. The left 2 of each 4 digits code are either “10xx”
or “20xx”.
• “10xx” are the items that belong to the Input/Output Checking Mode of Service Mode. “10”
stands for the Mode Number of Input/Output Checking Mode, and “xx” stands for the Signal
Code.
• “20xx” are the items that belong to the Data Monitoring Mode of Service Mode. “20” stands
for the Mode Number of Data Monitoring Mode, and “xx” stands for the Data Number.
(Examples)
1015 200A
Signal Code Data Number

Mode No. of Input / Output Mode No. of Data
Checking Mode Monitoring Mode
(2) [Name] column indicates either Signal Name (Input/Output Checking Mode) or the contents of
data (Data Monitoring Mode).
(3) [Data] column indicates the status of signal (Input / Output Checking Mode) or the input data
(Data Monitoring Mode).
8-219 K115sm8e7.doc
NOTE
Display Tab covers the functions of Input/Output Checking Mode and Data Monitoring Mode of
Service Mode. See the following pages for the descriptions of those modes..
[8.1.2 Input / Output Checking Mode (Sub Mode 1)] on and after the page 8-10
[8.1.3 Data Monitoring Mode (Sub Mode 2)] on and after the page 8-20
8-220 K115sm8e7.doc
8. 3. 3. 3 Setting Tab
It is possible to change many kinds of printer parameters, and also possible to upload and
download the backup RAM file. (Setting Tab covers the functions of Adjustment Mode 0/1 of
Service Mode.)
(1) (2) (3) (4)
(1) [Number] column indicates the 4 digits codes. The left 2 of each 4 digits code are either “40xx”
or “50xx”.
• “40xx” are the items that belong to the Adjustment Mode 0 of Service Mode. “40” stands for
the Mode Number of Adjustment Mode 0, and “xx” stands for the Item Number.
• “50xx” are the items that belong to the Adjustment Mode 1 of Service Mode. “50” stands for
the Mode Number of Adjustment Mode 1, and “xx” stands for the Item Number.
(Examples)
4012 5090
Item Number Item Number

Mode No. of Adjustment Mode 0 Mode No. of Adjustment Mode 1
(2) [Name] column indicates the setting target (brief name) of each Item Number.
(3) [Data] column indicates the current setting value of each Item Number.
(4) [Min/Max] column indicates the selectable setting values or the changeable range.
NOTE
Setting Tab covers the functions of Adjustment Modes 0/1 of Service Mode. See the following
pages for the descriptions of those modes.
[8.1.5 Adjustment Mode 0 (Sub Mode 4)] on and after the page 8-35
[8.1.6 Adjustment Mode 1 (Sub Mode 5)] on and after the page 8-85
8-221 K115sm8e7.doc
(1) Changing the setting value of each Item Number
NOTE
It is recommended to save all the present setting values in Backup RAM file for safety before
changing the setting value. Refer to [(2) Saving all present settings in Backup RAM file
(Download)] on the page 8-224.
1. Click the right button of mouse on any setting value ([Data] column) of requested setting item
to indicate “Edit”.
Click on [Edit] with left button of mouse to indicate a window for changing the setting value.
Window for changing

the setting value
Click the right button of

mouse here to indicate [Edit].
NOTE
The following 2 ways also indicates the window for changing the setting value.
(1) Double-click on the setting value ([Data] column) of requested setting item.
(2) Click once on the setting value ([Data] column), and press the [Enter] Key of Keyboard.
8-222 K115sm8e7.doc
2. Change the setting value in the Edit Diagram, and click on [OK].
Example) Setting value is to be changed from “900” to “880”.
Reference
There are 2 ways to change the setting value.

• Select any existent setting value from the pull-down menu.
• Or input the required setting value directly with keyboard.
3. The 4 digits code is marked with (E) when its setting value is changed. Change other setting
items in the same way if necessary. When all necessary settings are changed, click on
[Upload] icon to upload new settings to KIP9000.
Code is marked with (E)

when its setting is changed.
Click on [Upload] to upload

new settings to KIP9000.
4. When all new settings are uploaded and become effective on KIP9000,
[Complete] is indicated. Click on [OK] finally.
8-223 K115sm8e7.doc
(2) Saving all present settings in Backup RAM file (Download)
All present settings specified on Setting Tab (All Adjustment Mode 0/1 settings of Service Mode)
can be downloaded and saved in the Backup RAM file.
Reference
KIP9000 will recover the previous setting values as specified on Setting Tab at the time of
“Download” if Backup RAM file is “uploaded”. Therefore it is recommended to download the
present settings and save them in the Backup RAM file BEFORE changing any setting of the
Setting Tab. After getting the Backup RAM file, even a great customization on the Setting Tab
will be safe.
Refer to [(3) Uploading the Backup RAM file to KIP9000] on page 8-226 for “upload”.
1. Click on [Backup] icon.
8-224 K115sm8e7.doc
2. Select a save folder and give a filename for the Backup RAM file, and click on [Save].
All the present setting values specified on Setting Tab are downloaded from KIP9000 and
saved in the Backup RAM file.
8-225 K115sm8e7.doc
(3) Uploading the Backup RAM file to KIP9000
A Backup RAM file can be uploaded to KIP9000 to recover all the previous setting values specified
on Setting Tab at the time of “download”. Upload will be useful in the following situations.
• When some setting value is lost for some reason, and it must be recovered.
• When all the setting values specified on one KIP9000 are to be copied to another KIP9000
to have completely same situation on both machines. (Download from one KIP9000 then
upload to another one.)
1. Click on [Restore] icon.
2. Select a Backup RAM file (*.ram) that is to be uploaded to KIP9000, and click on [Open].
8-226 K115sm8e7.doc
3. KIP Diagnostics reads all the setting values saved in the Backup RAM file, and automatically
changes the setting values on the Setting Tab according to the read values. [Complete!] is
indicated when all setting values are changed according to the Backup RAM file.
Setting values will change according to the setting

values saved in Backup RAM file.
NOTE
The KIP Diagnostics just indicates the saved settings in Backup RAM file on the screen. Note
that these values are not effective on the KIP9000 yet at this stage.
8-227 K115sm8e7.doc
4. Click on [Upload] icon on the KIP Diagnostics, and click on [Yes] on the confirmation window.
All the settings on Setting Tab are uploaded to KIP9000.
5. [Complete!] is indicated when all the settings are uploaded and become
effective on KIP9000. Click on [OK] to finally.
8-228 K115sm8e7.doc
8. 3. 3. 4 History Tab
History Tab indicates recent errors (Service Call Error) and jams with such information as error/jam
code, date/time, and counter value. Clearance of the error/jam histories is also available.
Error history
(1) (2) (3) (4)
Jam history
(1) [Number] column indicates the order that the recent error/jam occurred. (Smaller value means
more recently occurred error/jam)
(2) [Code] column indicates either Error Code (E-00XX) or Jam Code (J-00XX).
(3) [Date/Time] column indicates the date and time that the concerning error/jam occurred.
(4) [Count] column indicates the counter value indicated when the concerning error/jam occurred.
8-229 K115sm8e7.doc
(1) Clearance of error / jam histories
1. There are 2 [Clear] icons on the History Tab. The upper button in [Error History Information]
section clears the error history, and another one in [Jam History Information] clears the jam
history. Click on your requested [Clear] icons.
Clear icons
2. The record of every error or jam is deleted.

Click on [OK] when [Complete!] is indicated.
8-230 K115sm8e7.doc
8. 3. 3. 5 Upload ROM Data Tab
It is possible to update the firmware by uploading the ROM file (*.rom) to the KIP9000. (ROM file is
supplied from the manufacturer.)
NOTE
All the current printer parameters (specified in Setting Tab of KIPDlPRO or Adjustment Mode
0/1 of Service Mode) will be maintained surely even after firmware updating. However it is
strongly recommended to save the present setting values in the Backup RAM file for the safety
before firmware updating.
(1) Update of firmware
1. Click on [Browse] icon in the Upload ROM Data Tab.
8-231 K115sm8e7.doc
2. Select a firmware file (*.ram) that is to be uploaded to KIP9000, and click on [Open].
NOTE
Firmware file (ROM file) is supplied from the manufacturer.
3. Confirm that the filename of ROM file as well as its file path are indicated in [Filename], and
then click on [Upload] icon. Click on [Yes] when a confirmation message is indicated. KIP
Diagnostics starts uploading the ROM file to KIP9000. Normally uploading will take some
minutes.
8-232 K115sm8e7.doc
4. Printer is restarted automatically when uploading of ROM file is finished,
and [Complete!] is indicated on the application side. Click on [OK] finally.
8-233 K115sm8e7.doc
8. 3. 3. 6 Test Print Tab
Internal test pattern can be printed out from KIP9000 with specifying several settings as cut length,
number of print, media type and etc. (Test Print Tab covers the function of Test Print Mode of
Service Mode.)
(1)
(2) (6)
(3) (7)
(4)
(5)
(1) Select any of 8 test patterns.
(2) Select any of Roll 1, 2, 3, 4 and Bypass Feeder as the media source.
(3) Select any cut lengths.
(4) Specify the number of prints. Maximum number is 999.
(5) Click on [Start] to start printing.
If [Paper Deck] is set to “Manual Feed”, [Manual Feed Setting] area becomes changeable.
(6) Select any paper widths according to the used cut sheet paper.
(7) Select any of “Plain Paper”, “Tracing Paper” and “Film” according to the type of used cut sheet
paper.
8-234 K115sm8e7.doc
8. 3. 4 Description of Menu Bar and Tool Bar
8. 3. 4. 1 File
Save The information indicated in each tab can be saved in a text file.
(Available tabs are Basic Information, Display, Setting and History.)
Print The information indicated in each tab can be printed out from the Windows
Printer Driver.
(Available tabs are Basic Information, Display, Setting and History.)
Print Font It is possible to select a font that is to be used when the above “Print” is
performed.
Exit Finished KIP Diagnostics.
8. 3. 4. 2 Setting
Initialize Recovers the communication between KIP Diagnostics and KIP9000 when it
is shut off.
Serial Port Specifies the communication settings between KIP Diagnostics and KIP9000.
Tool Bar Tool Bar is indicated when checked.
8-235 K115sm8e7.doc
8. 3. 4. 3 Tool
ROM Maker This command is always not accessible as it is not used in the field.
8. 3. 4. 4 Help
Index Can search the necessary functional explanations of KIP Diagnostics by

[Contents] or [Index].
About Version of KIP Diagnostics or some other information is indicated.
8. 3. 4. 5 Tool bar
The function of each icon is as follows.
Help
Serial Port
Initialize
Print
Save
8-236 K115sm8e7.doc

KIP 9000 Service Manual Ver A - 0

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originalbeschreibung:

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

KIP 9000 Service Manual Ver A - 0

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

High Volume

(2) Superior printing productivity

(3) Long parts life and low frequency of service maintenance

(4) Pre-calibrated LED Head

(5) Image Enhancement Technology

(6) Installation of roll media and Toner Cartridge while printing

(7) Long print

Power Switch Operation Panel User Interface

Right Side Door

Media Indicator “in use” Indicators

Name of part Function

Toner Cartridge Fuser Handle

Internal Transportation Unit Lever

Name of part Function

Dehumidify Heater Switch

Interface Connector for scanner Top Rear Cover

Folder Port VGA Port Interface Connector

Connected controller unit must meet UL Standard 60950-1 (UL-

NOTE: Specification for Power Cord used in North America

PAPER DECK MF EXIT

No. Name of part Function

Example 1 : Metric mode Example 2 : Inch mode

plain paper plain paper

plain paper plain paper

plain paper plain paper

plain paper plain paper

Top Drawer is not

Middle Drawer is not

2.2 Unpacking 2-3

2.3 Level the KIP9000 2-11

2.4 Removal of Tape, Screws and Shock Absorbers 2-12

2.6 Installing the Monitor 2-31

2.7 Installing the Controller 2-50

2.8 Installing the Toner Cartridge 2-48

2.9 Loading Media into the Roll Decks 2-50

2.10 Installing the Cut Sheet Tray 2-57

2.11 Turning on the KIP9000 2-58

2.12 Supplying Toner into Developer Unit 2-59

(1) Power source should be as follows (according to your region).

(2) The equipment must be on a dedicated circuit.

(3) Connect this equipment to a properly grounded outlet.

(6) The equipment should not be exposed to the direct sunlight.

195cm (77 inch) or wider

1. Remove the top crate and 4 side crates.

A : Drum Package E : Setup Procedure and User’s Manual

4. Remove the plastic.

5. Remove the wrapping film.

Description Picture / Notes Quantity

LED Cleaning Pad 1

M4x10 Flush Head Screw 3

Monitor Panel BKT 1

M4x6 Tooth Washer Screw 3

• 1 for securing the

• 2 for securing the

M4x10 Tooth Washer 4

Cut Sheet Feeder Tray 1

Setup Toner Bottle (200g) 1

Drum Cleaning Blade 1

Drum Shading Sheet 1

KIP IPS Computer

Power Supply Lead 1

Turn the 4 Height Adjusters (1) on the bottom.